Home

HNS SPC - User Manual

1. rE 16 Fig r 16 Select SQL dataa Se guum teer RUE ud M E MEI SPCR MN E MD aoe MN tt nt CRT eee TU E cree ney one M ore Re Iba E 16 eiii ea Taclo MN E I UU TT 17 Figure 10 eg MPG QING CIONY PT 17 Figure 19 Select GPI directory acces eio m a aah Seg clea aise Shah po dM ML M LL E 18 Figure 20 Create xBa ase database P n 18 Figure 21 Re index XB ASC database inet ssa penyyatethitanactievancsaiehaadvatengunteinaradtinbaasach AR ab eR RE tr dU pnaaiiateudueas bacpataadaeensadiatuaaaetacd aas cl cap ME Uca Iv Nl PUR PCR TUE 19 Figure 22 CODY XBase 10 5 OL Cala pase CMT 19 Fig re 23 Simple archiving R EE a cas aS ce ue Sarma ce a ce aca e 20 Figure 24 Batch VN ttc tt tea eta eg ey ce tances cpt ale ble pi cee Pha ica ap octane el aan es agente 21 Figure 25 Archiving IID gel OCC SS a ale mio leech T 22 Figure 26 zo deo iBo cR 22 FIQUre 27 EXDOMeG JD CONC table Ssss M R 23 Fig re 2 i selection RR RD Tm 23 Figure 29 T D SEO wt ete ie ech ee ene MM PAM ge ent eee et ee ann ieee 23 Figure 30 The important elements of the database structure ccccccccsseeseeecennssseeecennaauseseeseaaunseeeseanaa
2. sssssssssssissssssiissesisss seen sse nn hn nnhi hh ss nh rh resin sh sinn rns ssar sisi sni r hrs s an sns rss nnns nnns 173 Figure 245 Warning message Invalid distribution parameter isses essere nnn ss na hes sna ense saisie suain issu rss sna sns sa nnne n 173 Figure 246 Warning message Fitting test cannot be performed eese esee esses nennen ne naa aa hn reisen aa sn rris suas sess sss s saisis rss sa asa rris naa sns 173 Figure 247 Warning message The Sampling Control service is not running lisse essen nnne nnns nnns nnaa ann n ss en sara sse ess sa sane n aa ann 174 Figure 248 Warning message The Automatic Alert service is not running ssssessssssssssssssssissss seen nnne hn nnn nnns nn h ness aa sire nni nre s insi sss n nnns nnns 174 Figure 249 Warning message The Automatic Export service is not running sesessssssssssssssissssi eese nnn enhn hn n ssa si sse n rns ssa sn sene nnns 174 Figure 250 Warning message Confirmation of the xil iiis o aeter ER Een 3 VR a eeu VE RN EEUU APR TEE ATA YXRRRR E Fed REV EU PRSE EEATAFRRRIAK eed VY pd UP eg a PNE cee 175 Figure 251 Error message SQL database GITOF aosnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnrrnrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrnrrnrrttrr rnrn MAR cR MR Lr EEEE nS E OMM pI LUPA M pK EE PM EM e PU PR RICE ale 176 Figure 252 The error message WIND OW Lugo eosapigevAF REN PER FRE ARCH FRU E PaU
3. 0 135 probability value of the linearized distribution function 3s point Confidence prescribed confidence level of the fitting test Fitting test type numeric result and the qualification of the prescribed fitting test The qualification means the accepting or rejecting the given distribution by the fitting test Gamma Epsilon Eta Lambaa Parameters used in case of the Johnson transformation In case of Weibull and Rayleigh distribution also the m Bo button is active in the Distribution Data window The Probablity Points Data window is displayed by pressing this button HNS SPC User Manual 84 PWNS TECNICAL DEVELOPMENT C0 LTD BB 517 34 B5B 726 90 B3 593 52 BB53 2 r47 98 B1B 37 88 B E Print values on printed page Ok Type the percent value in BL 1 and press ENTER Figure 110 Significant probabilty points data of Weibull and Rayleigh distribution 0 135 3 10 50 and 63 5 probability values calculated by the linearized distribution function are displayed in this window These are the significant probability values used for the lifetime analysis but it is possible to get an optional probability value in the B field Type the given probability value in the B field then press the Enter or Tab button on the keyboard to display the requested value The user defined probability value can be
4. 168 Figure 236 Set current and reset selection irae eas tue Red tps Rug oc eR e Lie a vd Gb gu Ru pla qug uc ades e Fe Baa Ros UUg uu b ep rlgus pd rea eR eM OUAN geb MS eases 168 Figure 237 Opened anaysis windows of the selected sample ranges sss esee seen nenne ss nn ann nnns sn aa in nnns ss sara nnns sana nn eerren aaa snas 168 FIGUIG 230 Pr grams and USCIS serisi aeea raa Nro xk cti du Ra ie aD rA UM NI ETEA EEEE ote a eT APU UK UM Muda PE RA DN DAE RED SEE Edu UNIP Cua ERA S EU UM E du t IRE 170 Figure 239 Program configuration data T 170 Figure 240 Warning message Invalid password s eeeeiiseeee sees eses esee sees enun nena snas shui sr anna aaa s nhau area essa assa suas esee aa sess sa ases esae snas aa ases esas sare s asas esas 171 Figure 241 Warning message Multiple instances cccccccccssccccnseecscnseuccensenescnssueeenseneeeeseueeenseneeeeuaueeeensneeensaueeensaaeeensauaeensanesensaasensanesensauasensaneseesaaass 171 Figure 242 Warning message There is no MPG aire iret o EO FER SERE HUE EL RO ER RE erecting Sec seo ER NA Ux IR MIRI ERU II KNIE M SEI MUI LER CU seen 172 Figure 243 Warning message MPG saving Ci Ol asebesscosudid ai pq EBep e tac bbo dudar odi uU oPans Dose LRM Se ease bond GU M UP exa Dass LA Noep EE SaonE I UU IN axaP oen AR Foe DmM M PODER EEEE 172 Figure 244 Warning message There are no samples to analyse
5. Export Measurements Interventions Reset selection iW Capability index diagram i iT 8 B O A 7 Analysis Control chart Pareto diagram Intervention pareto Export Samples data Interventions Reset selection Summarized pareto analysis by product by producing equioment Certificate Product Parameter Create MPG Editor MPG Wizard Modify Hemove Input by gauge My iy ET Input by keyboard BEEN Z RN eee eee RN HNS SPC User Manual 7 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD Access level Menu continuation of previous page f Data loggers Mitutoyo DL DT10 8g B BH Mitutoyo DP 3DX and DP 7 8 RM Mitutoyo DL1000 o 8 0 B Starrett 742A 8 B Elcometer 300SP A B BAM TERADYNE W419 Laser Trim System Reports EN a T a eee Lo ed e e as e Process Settings ps p Soe Settings um rj ee E Database terminology Le Lo Default goals MPG Operator s right Gauges Select and Settings Sound E mail HNS DataConnection MINFO OoC DataConnection Sampling Control Service Checking service Automatic alerts Service Checking service Automatic exports Service Checking service Active licences and users Configuration Accessing of functions marked with a sign can be enabled by given settings Menus and menu items marked wi
6. Hm uos ene the sampling date and time of the given sample SIE eire the shift ID entered to the given sample Team the team ID entered to the given sample HNS SPC User Manual 65 O Am User ID the ID of the user who has input the given sample Toofl the ID of the tool which was used during the production of the given sample Tool ID can only be entered in case of a machine with changeable tools otherwise the tool ID fields are disabled See also the Machine menu item of the Database menu Mask the mask ID entered to the given sample Rejected sample the rejected status of the given sample These samples and all of their measured values are skipped in all calculations The rejected samples are grey coloured in the sample list See the chapter Rejecting a sample on the control chart in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu Acknowledged sample the acknowledged status of the given sample See the chapter Control chart acknowledgement in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu Intervention the intervention entered to the given sample See the chapter Recording a marker in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu Comment the comments entered to the given sample See the chapter Recording a mar
7. l HNS SPC Error MPG error file NONANE MPG 191 Specified gauge can mot be used with K Device strategy Q5 gt MANUAL Error code 183 Additional code F F Ch Database error i E Figure 259 Error message Measuring program error Reason Device strategy and data input by keyboard is selected in the measuring program but they cannot be used together Suggestion Change the strategy or the gauge by editing manually or delete and create the measuring program again Reference MPG menu HNS SPC User Manual 179
8. 20 04969 Xqga 3za 13 379347 gac 3zea 20 023850 Ir RS I e Lead CpkEk Ra 1 34 Lnbeglcesbaeraeecwrxab beu LnETISS RA RE haud n l Down up Close Print Save Oooo S Figure 113 Capability study report HNS format QDAS report contains also figures control chart density function and linearized distribution function beside the listed data QDAS report contains also the sample data given by the user at the data input in case of a machine capability study If there is more value of a sample data in the selected sample range than the earliest will be displayed in the report QDAS report cannot be displayed on the screen it is forwarded to the printer selected in the Printer menu item of the File menu directly HNS SPC User Manual 87 HNS SPC V55 On going Process Capability D amp 19 37 2008 1F Factor 1F 1WORKGROUP 1F TWORKGROUP 1MACHINE Position Product 1F 1T 1F TPRODUCT Drawing number 1F 1T 000 Parameter TEST 1 Spec 20 000 UL 20 040 0 040 LL 19 960 CTQ Normal 0 040 R Sk 0 080 09 22 1995 03 06 from Samples 100 09 22 1995 03 06 to Values 500 Damag ed Outgoing i Chart SPC Monitoring xbar s Process out of control NOT stable 20 040 US Distribution normal State 12 0 003 i Skewness 0 06 Mae m average 7
9. Distribution Hormal Calculated Graphical Mean 14 867923 14 867657 Skewness a 87 HC38 855 X 14 871765 Deviation a 081242 p 201368 Flatness a 5e H B 135z x 14 863543 Confidence 95 0 Chi 2 508 Distribution is matched x Distribution Johnson transzformation SU Calculated Graphical Mean psa pBaz8 Skewness 164 meag e65x 2 289 Deviation pas s98 Flatness 2 96 HCB8 135X Fez54 Confidence 95 0 Chit 66 774 Distribution is NOT matched Gamma 1 30004 Eta 1 31763 Epsilon a 98131 Lamda ja 66678 Figure 109 Distribution data Meanings of the results are the following Distribution distribution type Calculated mean mean calculated by the measuered values Calculated deviaton standard deviation calculated by the measured values Graphical mean mean determined by the 5096 probability value of the linearized distribution function graphically Graphical deviation standard deviation determined by the 3s points 99 865 and 0 135 probability values of the linerized distribution function graphically Skewness skewness value used for continuous distributions Flatness flatness value used for continuous distributions M 99 86596 99 865 probability value of the linearized distribution function 3s point M O0 1359 6
10. c Shift M szak Mask Maszk Shirt Mask Team Parti E ct e Type or modify identifier data Figure 54 Product data By pressing the dF button next to the code field the reserved ID s codes of the products defined in the given factory can be listed as usual and a product s data can be copied into the fields of this window Beside the code and name also the drawing number and further three data of the products can be recorded The name of the three optional fields can be given in the Database terminology menu item of the Settings menu The Shift Team and Mask as default fields can be renamed related to this product compared to the database terminology The primary and secondary names of these can be given in the fields on the window s underside See the database terminology in the Database terminology menu item of the Settings menu 2 3 5 2 Change product data The data of a product can be changed in the Product Change menu item of the Database menu Firstly the product to be changed has to be selected in the Product window as follows x Steel rivet Steel rivet Draw num Ba4948 T Haterial hsra3e2 Height lua EE Select required item from the list Figure 55 Selecting a product for changing After selecting the product the given data can be changed in the Product window Attention When an xBase databa
11. Message HNS SPC Error MPG error file SAMPLE MPG 171 Specified parameter and machine assigning measured process Q5 nat found in database Error code les Additional code F F Ch Database error Figure 258 Error message Measuring program error Reason he selected measuring program refers to a process or sub process which cannot be found in the database the given process has not been created Comment The program checks before opening the MPG whether the processes occur in the measuring program can be found in the actual database Suggestion Firstly check the database selection and change it if it is not correct If incorrect parameter or machine workgroup machine head position identifier occurs in the measuring program change it by editing manually or delete and create the measuring program again If the given process has not been created in the database yet or it has been deleted create the process in the database If the parameter or machine workgroup machine head position identifier has been modified in the database correct it in order that the same parameter and machine identifier occurs in the database and in the measuring program Reference MPG menu Select database menu item of the File menu Measured process and Attributed process menu item of the File menu Message
12. You can set status of value as outstanding to skip it Figure 197 Warning message outstanding value is detected Comment If a measured value is modified the outstanding value test will be done again The excluding of the outstanding value is not possible in case of M and MX items because the measured values input in these items are not stored in the database The outstanding value test is also done related to the samples input in the S items before closing the data input After finishing all measurements and qualifications of the measuring program the program asks for acknowledgement of the data input x All inputs finished Are the inputs of all pieces right in The data will be saved sutomatically You can not change data after closing inputs Figure 198 Closing the data input in the measuring program HNS SPC User Manual 137 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD By pressing the Yes button the data input is closed and the collected data cannot be modified If the collected data are wanted to modify for example the last piece has to be re measured the No Abort MPG button should be pressed In this case the MPG Abort window appears on the screen After closing the data input but before saving the data the measured values can be modified subsequently The measurement window can be displayed by double clicking the measured value to be modified The new measured value or damaged
13. Category 1 category 100 a n code name 1 3 fault B NENNEN DENN so NENNEN pa a NENNEN ER MD Length of analysed period 8 30 8 55 a m 4 14 11 43 a m 20 analysed pcs TOO grin rro 3 Close Figure 154 Pareto analysis by failure cost Pareto analysis by cost can be made only if the cost data is given at the creating of the failure group in the Failure group Add menu item of the Database menu Above the several bars the failure cost value caused by the given failure failure occurrence failure cost are displayed in absolute value and this number compared to the failure cost value caused by all the failures in percentage 2 6 22 Intervention pareto In the Analysis Intervention pareto menu item of the Analysis menu Pareto analysis can be displayed by the interventions recorded to the samples within the selected sample range This analysis is the same as for the measured samples see the description about the Analysis Intervention pareto menu item related to the measured samples of the Analysis menu 2 6 23 Export Samples data The attributed data of the selected sample range can be exported into a text file or Excel file in the Export Samples data menu item of the Analysis menu In the setting window the name and path of the text file have to be given and the format of the export file ha
14. Figure 70 Measured process table In the table there are always displayed the measured processes belonging to the product workgroup and machine which is selected in the drop down lists in the window s left top corner If all item is selected in these lists all the measured process in the actual factory will be displayed By switching on the Head Position switch also the sub processes related to heads positions will be displayed If there is not defined any measured process belonging to the selected product workgroup and machine then the no data text is written in the first row of the table The black narrow before the Product column shows the highlighted measured process A measured process s settings can be modified by rewriting this data in the table The changing will be valid if the window is closed by pressing the Change OK button The changing will be rejected if the window is closed by pressing the Change Cancel button See also the chapter Process settings for measured processes Change Creating a new measured process can be done with the Add new process by parameter and Add new process by product buttons These buttons effect the same functions as the Measured HNS SPC User Manual 52 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO process by Parameter and by Product menu items of the Database menu See also the chapter Measured process by parameter and Mea
15. Hame Factory n A AA Factory A Figure 10 Logging in without password password protection is disabled After typing the correct password if password protection is enabled the user will be logged in to the main window of the given access level Giving an incorrect password causes the program to display an error message and returns the password window User s log in data are used in case of operating measuring programs and creating reports primarily Last selected factory will be opened automatically after logging in Factory s ID and name are displayed in the status row of the password window Current factory can be changed with the Factory 2701 button If previous selected factory cannot be found it has been already removed or another database is used program offers the list of factories which are in the selected database A factory has to be chosen in this list this factory will be selected after logging in The user have to had right to access this factory naturally x a Mame Factory A Factory A Select a list item to use Figure 11 Selecting a factory If there is no selected database opened database or factory than the Starf button of the start up window will be disabled and only closing of the software is possible Logging in is possible at the next program start HNS SPC User Manual PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT G0 LTD 1 3 3 2 Summary table of the program functions
16. J D Select a database and connect Figure 2 SQL database selecting window Driver and Alias should be chosen firstly than user password of the database should be given in the Password field default user ID and password SPCuser SPC Attention When selecting the SQL database the password set by the administrator is needed The user identifier has to be entered during the SQL settings among the Alias configuration data while the password belonging to it has to be given before logging on The user ID and password is only needed for logging onto the server and it is independent of the program s own user identifier and password By pressing the Connect button program logs in to the selected SQL server By switching on the Connect automatically on the next start switch program will log in to the server at next start automatically using the present previous driver alias and password After starting and logging in to the SQL server in case of using an SQL database the following start up window appears ssr o e STATIS HILAL FPROLESS HND BUALITY CONTROL i Start Log ind Plasko Rata i 11 Has Pecnnrircal veweliopmaent Co eT F A Figure 3 The start up window The window displays the program name the name of the workstation and the company which is authorised to use it Content of the status row from left to right Data about the actual HNS SPC program release x HNS SP
17. all switch is on all processes of the selected product will be exported Name Code Product Product Test pB amp 33 rs ts Parameter kao ss lt i COR lt lt all T Select Horkgroup kay all gt Machine ka FR Figure 91 Selecting all measured processes of a product to export Attention In case of using lt lt all switch the exported file contains the data of all processes of the given product Bee carefully by using this switch because this file cannot be imported into the HNS SPC database the data of one process can be always imported together If this multiple file is imported all data will be recorded to one process Therefore it is recommended to use the all switch for data analysis in other systems e g Excel The samples are exported in a text file as default The name and path of the text file have to be given in the File text field or can be selected by the button In case of multiple export see the all switch the samples of the several processes are recorded in one text file one after the other The order of the processes are the same as in the database they are separated with an empty row In case of export into Excel table the given switch has to be on Decimal point and date format have to be set according to the applied Windows operation system The output is an opened Excel file which contains the samples of several processes on severa
18. e Independent charts for all failures of group failure charts Several control charts are taken to each failures of the failure group control charts are taken only for the failure group and for the failure categories as default See the displaying of the failure charts in the Analysis Control chart menu item related to the attributed samples of the Analysis menu e Show next IDs and codes in sample data area The sampling date and time and the mask ID of the appointed sample are displayed on the control chart as default Here can be selected which further sample data user ID shift team tool is wanted to display next to these data No 3 Date 10 12 2005 10 7 a m Xanana 2 42900 Uzer vk R 0 38800 HMask 1234 5679 Intervention Comment Figure 214 Displaying the sample data on the control chart Note The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy so it is possible to give different settings for the different workstations For example the DPM data can be displayed on the evaluating workplace for the engineer and not displayed on the measuring workplace for the operator together Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy HNS SPC User Manual 150 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO 2 10 8 Default goals When a measured parameter is created the index requirements have to be given related to the machine Capability ind
19. menu This figure may help to identify the measured parameter 6 Measurements The values of the measurements already done are displayed in this list During a measurement the position of the current measured value is marked in the given field The measured values out of specification are red coloured and are marked with a down arrow under the lower specification limit or an up arrow above the upper specification limit The outstanding values are grey coloured and are in brackets Measurements 1 0verall lengh 2 Head lenght oa2Stalk length 4 Head diameter Sistalk diamete x A Measured value Par um 2 Damaged LX Cancel caliper gt Measuring DATA IM tt Ia Figure 184 Marking the current position in the measuring program window HNS SPC User Manual 131 PANG TURA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD If more than 14x5 measured values which can be displayed together have been entered the last 14x5 measured values are always displayed When the measuring program is finished all the measured values can be displayed by using the 88 E E buttons As the first step of the measuring program the checking setting zero adjustment and tare of the gauges applied in the measuring program are done as occasion requires depending on the type of the gauges A window displayed on the screen marks this process In case of using more gauges each gauge
20. Access level rd nd 4st Co i File Select database Select factory Select MPG directory Select GPI director Create xBase database Reindex xBase database Copy xBase to SQL database Archiving Export IDConnect Print settings Logout from access level Database x according to the configured database terminology Factor Add Change Hemove Table Workgroup Change Hemove Table Machine Change Hemove Table Product Change Hemove Table Measured parameter Change Hemove Table Measured process by Parameter by Product Process settings Change Table Check Failure group Change Hemove Table Attributed process by Parameter by Product Process settings Change Table Check Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q oX HNS SPC User Manual 6 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Access level Menu continuation of previous page BEEN AS ee ee Measured samples Oo A B Delete samples 8 4j Export O MA c Import Attributed samples Delete samples Export Import Delete samples by date Sampling control Status Event Alerts Scheduled tasks and running alerts Alert states by processes Analysis Date range for analysis Select measured samples Save process settings Change specification Analysis Frequency Distribution Density Probability Capability study Measurements diagram Control chart Intervention pareto
21. Archiving can mean to create a copy In this case the Remove archived samples from the current database switch should be switched off If this switch is on archived samples will be removed from the original database Archived samples cannot be removed from the original database in case of using an SQL database this function is enabled only in xBase databases In case of switching on the Archive full database archive all factory switch the Remove archived samples from the current database switch is not enabled because it is not allowed to deleting data from another factory Archiving can be started by pressing the Archive button Time of the archiving depends on the amount of the data and the speed of the data access If removing of the archived samples is selected the program will ask the user for conformation of the deleting HNS SPC User Manual 21 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT C0 If there is a database in the selected directory the program sends an error message and the archiving will not be done Ef Database Archiving E Destination CArchiv TEST1 Simple Batch Archive all samples E keep samples of last control charts C Archive samples by time range E j 2 E E Archive Beginning date 2067 81 81 Clesing date 2087 12 31 Ff Close Archive full database Carchive all factory Remove archived samples from the current database 4 2 5 sec Configure and start
22. Calculations menu item of the Settings menu Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy 2 10 15 MINFO OoC DataConnection The program is able to forward Out of Control data to the HNS MINFO system The data are forwarded through the MINFO OoC DataConnect interface in a DBF file which includes the OoC and OoC inspection data of the several processes When creating a measured or an attributed parameter it is possible to select the parameters whose OoC data have to be forwarded to the MINFO system see the MINFO OoC data switch in the Measured parameter and Failure group menu items of the Database menu The MINFO DataConnect file is created and filled with data by the HNS SPC program and the data are processed by the MINFO system The directory where the MINFO OoC DataConnect file will be placed has to be selected in the MINFO OoC DataConnection menu item of the Settings menu ES Select MINFO DataConnection Path X Path path HINF OINF o Restore Cancel ok Enter the path to HIMF DataConnect files Figure 234 Selecting the MINFO DataConnect directory The MINFO DataConnect file is used specially for forwarding data to the MINFO system the structure and the using of this file is not introduced in this document Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy 2 10 16 Automatic
23. Exporting the attributed samples selected for analysis into text file or Excel file Interventions Exporting the interventions of the attributed samples selected for analysis into text file or Excel file Reset selection Deleting the selection of the attributed samples selected for analysis Summarized pareto analysis by product Pareto analysis for more several failure groups belonging to the same product This pareto diagram contains all failure groups of the product without reference to the machine HNS SPC User Manual 12 MPG PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD e by production equipment Pareto analysis for more several failure groups belonging to the same machine This pareto diagram contains all failure groups connected with the given machine and its heads or positions without reference to the product Certificate e Product Printing a quality certificate for a product e Parameter Printing a quality certificate for a parameter Create Creating a new measuring program e MPG Editor inthe MPG Editor window e MPG Wizard in a simplified data entry window Modify Modifying a measuring program Remove Deleting a measuring program Run Running a measuring program e Input by gauge by gauges channels defined in the measuring programs e Input by keyboard input all measured values by keyboard Data loggers Reading out and recording in the database data from portable da
24. Fajl Szerkeszt s Form tum M zet S g Praduct code name draw num TEST Product test DB1 Parameter name units Data 1 test DB1 mrm Workgroup codename TEST Workgroup test DIBT Machine code name head position TEST Machine test DB1 D D date time intervention parameter failure group user id shift team tool mask average range deviation rejected 2006 06 09 07 26 tool change 19 97540 0 02700 0 01069 2008 06 10 13 34 maintenance 20 032860 0 02500 0 00976 2008 06 13 08 04 machine setting 20 02340 0 03300 0 01350 2006 06 15 16 12 material change 20 00620 0 04200 0 01630 2006 06 15 22 21 machine setting 19 97040 0 02500 0 00950 2008 06 16 11 54 temperature setting 18 837280 0 02100 0 00773 Figure 134 Text file with the exported interventions HNS SPC User Manual 100 S MUS TEGNICALDETELIPHENT C0 LTD Example for the Excel file with the interventions Ej Microsoft Excel Munkaf zet1 ET Oj x E F jl Szerkeszt s Nezet Besz r s Form tum Eszk z k datok blak S g K rd se van rja beide v X Qgida3dia Tviixma amp FIM 4 aao Bit Fo allman Da A z ud Nu 3 d acy d x h i i v ltoztat sok visszak ld se v lem nyez s vege E 20 Y fe A x Product code name drawing number usd TEST Product test DB1 Parameter name units Data 1 test DB1 mm Workgroup code name TEST Workgroup test DB1 Machine code name
25. Statistical process and quality control User Manual JS MUN TEGNICALDETELIPHENT CO LID User Manual 2009 March 31 HNS SPC otatistical process and quality control Copyright 1995 2009 HNS Technical Development Co Ltd H 9027 Gy r Gesztenyefa u 4 Hungary Phone 36 96 506 930 Fax 36 96 506 931 E mail soc hns eu PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD Contents STING TINS POL OCT AIT ettt A 1 1 1 2 SoltWare access levels uii oiseau a nsecisidgeauteseeteresusedassuees 1 1 2 Stalino UNG pro grai aa DE ERE 1 1 3 3 2 Summary table of the program functions ss sssssnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnmnnn 6 2 ise iloiei Wolieisi dolgorolgz i1 Peer 9 A Reni 9 ANIM m 16 Leke Te Noto 21 af Loi RR T cm 16 MARO gei m T eee 17 2223 oelet MPO OCCO NR u 17 2 2 4 Select GP OIE CON enrere O A E reS 18 2 2 5 Create xBase database ccccccccsscescccccceceeeseecceeeeeeeeeseceeeeeeseeesseeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeesssaeaeeeeeeesssasaeseeeeeeesssaaageeeeeees 18 222 0 hestndex xDass database oori eset a Gas
26. The product registration product data found in the actual factory can be displayed in a table in the Product Table menu item of the Database menu In this table can be reached all functions creating changing copying removing related to product E Hame Name by Language 1 Mame by Language 2 Drawing number Language 1 Mame by Language 2 Drawing number E T Steel rivet Steet rivet S 49548 7 Add new Dette Copy Change Cancel Change Ok Figure 56 Product table If there is not defined any product in the given factory then the no data text is written in the first row of the table The black narrow before the Code column shows the highlighted product Creating a new product can be done with the Add new button in this window See the further steps in the chapter New product The highlighted product can be removed from the database by pressing the Delete button See the further steps in the chapter Remove product The highlighted product can be duplicated by pressing the Copy button Firstly the Product window appears filled in with the data of the product to be copied excepting the identifier code The fields are filled in can be changed See also the chapter New product Last step of the copying is choosing of the database items wanted to copy and then the pressing of the Copy button x ltems to copy Wo
27. button See the further steps in the chapter Remove workgroup The highlighted workgroup can be duplicated by pressing the Copy button Firstly the Workgroup window appears filled in with the data of the workgroup to be copied excepting the identifier code The fields are filled in can be changed See also the chapter New workgroup Last step of the copying is choosing the database items wanted to copy and then the pressing the Copy button x Items to copy Horkgroup jul Users Iv Machine Sample Control events Iv Interventions Product Measured parameters W Measured processes m Failure groups attributed parameters iv Attributed processes Select database levels to be copied Figure 43 Copying a workgroup Note The database items are under each other can be selected only in order from up to down consistently and only the items under the workgroup can be selected Accordingly the order is Machine gt gt Interventions and Measured Attributed processes can be selected if Machine is selected In case of selecting Measured Attributed processes the machines of the new workgroup will be related with the same measured parameters and failure groups as the machines of the earlier workgroup and process settings will be the same A workgroup s data can be modified by rewriting this data in the table The changing will be valid if the window
28. button next to the Code field the reserved ID s codes of the machines defined in the given factory can be listed as usual and a machine s data can be copied into the fields of this window In the Toof group a selection has to be made specifying whether the machine uses changeable marked and identified or not changeable not specified tools This is important because if the tool type is defined as changeable the program later enables the user to save the tool ID to the sample hence making it possible to analyse the processes of the machine by the tools It is also necessary to specify whether the machine has a single Head and or Position production place or multiple ones As with the tool type selection this becomes important later on because if more than a single head and or position is specified it is possible to create sub processes for the individual heads and positions within one machine These sub processes can be used by data input and analysis too 2 3 4 2 Change machine data The data of a machine can be changed in the Machine Change menu item of the Database menu and the intervention list of the machine can be managed Firstly the workgroup and then the machine to be changed have to be selected as follows x E Name RF 1HORKGROUPCYMRACHINE RF 1HORKGROUPCYMRACHINE ene Soa Head ho Position 1 OOO ms Select a list item to use Figure 45
29. the rate of the rejected parts p the number of the failures c the rate of the failures u according to the selected process s chart type mask the mask ID has been entered to the given sample 2 PM the acknowledged sample status See the chapter Control chart acknowledgement in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu Ints bases an intervention entered related to the given sample See the chapter Recording a marker in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu Com a comment entered related to the given sample See the chapter Recording a marker in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu All the displayed data in the window are always applied to the highlighted sample All this data and statuses can be input modified or deleted in this window except the data which have an extra marking Hm eaeeixe the sampling date and time of the given sample Shift the shift ID entered to the given sample Team the team ID entered to the given sample User ID the ID of the user who has input the given sample Toofl the ID of the tool which was used during the production of the given sample Tool ID can only be entered in case of a machine with changeable tools otherwise t
30. 2005 12 05 jf2is6 Enter the attributed process settings Figure 77 Attributed process s settings In the window s header can be seen whether the settings in this window are related to machine to all head or to all position according to the previous process selection Attention The changes of the process settings and the modification time are stored so the new settings are applied to the samples that are entered after the changing See the applying of the settings to previous samples in the Save process settings menu item related to measured samples menu item of the Analysis menu Process settings are the following e Sample mode inspecting for Inspection s strategy it can be the following e looking for all failures Occurances of each failure in the failure group have to be inspected e most critical failure only If a failure is found inside the given failure group the insepction will not be continued It is recommended to order the failures in a failure group by seriousness According to this it is allowed to record only one failure by pieces in case of data input by pieces In case of summarized sample data input user cannot give the number of rejected parts but the number of rejected parts will be equal to number of failure occurances The number of recorded failure occurances cannot be larger as the sample size e Sample size Number of attributed data are in a group number of pieces are take
31. Analysis menu First step is to select the given process whose samples wanted to be analysed see the chapter Process selection After the process selection the Select Measured Samples window is displayed This window contains the measured samples stored in the database related to the given process Ef Select Measured Samples xX Sample data Settings User ID Hask Specification Bilateral Shift Tool 20 080 p 40 a 848 Team Rejected Ack Capability On going Process C HE Heasurement Date Ack Set iud o Emm Distribution Normal 1 2 3 e aa0 e aa80 panne 4 aes SSS Control chart 6 2 SPC 7 samples and the measured values i within stored in the database Monitoring process settings related to 5 4 related to the selected time range cL Calculated the highlighted sample DUEB AMEN quer pam Calculated Calculated ZH Hz3 tis Selected samples i nt Sample Cance a From ud z e THU r tx ILII ime je iaaa ris actual selected sample range Select first and last sample of sample r samp ling date and time of the m first and last sample Figure 97 Select measured samples Measured samples and the measured values within are displayed in this window the columns of the list contain the following information HNS SPC User Manual TT PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Sample the number of the sa
32. C Hardware C RTS CTS 9 ii TMO s fia C 9608 Stopbit s 19288 Cancel i bit C 384648 Set gauge communication parameters Figure 229 Communication parameter settings of the serial port In case of communication with serial port the gauge and the program have to operate with the same settings If one of these settings is not equal a communication failure will occur These parameters have to be set according to the documentation of the given gauge The transmission settings of the gauge have to be checked during the connecting and setting of the gauge because it is possible to change the transmission parameters in case of some gauges from the menu of the gauge or with switches It is recommended to use the connecting cable given by the manufacturer of the gauge Attention The settings above are stored in the HNS SPC configuration file The original settings of the several gauges are set automatically when starting after the installation of the program or after removing the configuration file and re starting the program It is necessary to change the settings in case of the gauges whose communication parameters can be set on the gauge and are different from the original settings If a gauge error is detected and there is no evident failure faulty connection gauge is off etc these communication parameters have to be checked The communication between the gauge and the program can be checked with the Te
33. Change Cancel button 2 3 10 Attributed process After building the production system workgroup machine the products and their parameters the processes should be created An attributed process means a relation between a failure group and a machine A failure group can also be related with a head or position of a machine it called a sub process Attributed processes can be created in the Attributed process menu item of the Database menu The creating can be done for the several failure groups one by one by Parameter item or for all failure group of a product together by Product item 2 3 10 1 Attributed process by parameter When creating an attributed process by a parameter the first step is selecting a product and a failure group within it After the selection the Process List Configuration window appears wherein the processes related to the given failure group the machines are related with it are listed It there is not any attributed process related to this failure group than the Workgroup and Machine fields are empty EA Process List Configuration X Code Name Product fiF 1T IF 1PRODUCT Failure group ei f fault group en Manufacturing Equipment Horkgroup name LF 1HORKGROUP Hachine name LF 1H0RKGRDUP 1HRCHINE Process and subprocesses to keep Machine Head zz Add EE Remove E Position Add or remove process as relation of par
34. EE 32 Figure 45 Selecting a machine for changing ccccccsesceccccsceeseeecsnnenseeecesnaaueeeeeseaaeeseeeeeaneeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeaasaseeeeeaaaaaaeeeesnaaaneeeessaaaasseessaauaaaesssnsaaasesessaauanseeses 32 Figure 46 Change machnie s data T 33 Figure 47 Increasing the number of the heads positions sce sss cecsxecsvcstaicriuesacan neck ussesdedeakacsneteasdiieesada sacddaviayceedaadsnidbasdiieeebia A UDx p rnnr Errr MM tra UD rrenen rreren 33 GE NEN mU sessir aeea rE EEEE EE E EE AEE AEA AEE Aa RAE AA AOR E Aa Daa EA AA OEE EEE 34 Figure 49 Selecting an intervention for changing ccccccseesececscnsneeeecesnaaesseessaseseeeseaneaeeeeeseaaeeeeeseeaaaaaaeeseaaeaaaeeeesnaaauseeessaaaasseessaaaaaaesssssaasessessaaennsseses 34 IPs MN delolci elauciu o T 35 Figure 51 gt Machine tablo T 36 PIQUE D2 eoo s oE Encop RTT 36 Figure 53 increasing the number or the heads positions asas siiis cervo x aE Oe FE FRaD aaO ad dE o pa Pa Raege SuSE cebat a Road ado qui tu bo TERRAE e OEE de vae Mad Na sd een FR Pa reran rnnr rnern reen 37 Figure 94 Product Aala t P 38 Figure 55 Selecting
35. Editing the MV item of the measuring program Items can be created appointed and removed the same way as on the MS M MX sheet The measuring program supports also the attributed processes the data input and the automatic evaluating on the measuring workstation Attributed samples can be input by two ways Summarized data can be input for a sample together or it is possible to input the data by pieces Attributed data can be input by pieces with the A and AS items which can be edited on the A AS sheet Ed Mpc Editor I X Header nsnm S Hu AAS A1 A2 Bu E1 E2 Alert File Input and store attributed data by pieces Executing order H n Chart automatically PSL Code Mame Failure group Fea L fault group Workgroup tris rF 1uoRKGROUP Hachine fis1G fBrauoRkeROUP MRCHNE head B s position B e Select Safety data input with OK NOK marks NONANE MPG Figure 172 Editing the A AS item of the measuring program Items can be created appointed and removed the same way as on the MS M MX sheet The attributed data input by pieces can be done by two ways 1 entering the occurrence of the given failure 2 entering the OK or NOK status of the piece in the regard of the given failure The first way is the default and the second way can be enabled by switching on the Safety data input with OK NOK marks switch HNS SPC User
36. It is possible to save the values of identifiers and offer them at the making of the certificate next time the switch next to the given field has to be on The name field of the unused identifiers has to be left empty There are four fields with unchangeable name for giving the buyer the quantity the shipper ID and the production time If one or more of these data is not wanted to display in the certificate the given value s field has to be left empty There is a date field among the user defined fields which can be used for example to give the date of the transfer The production time from to is always displayed in the certificate it can be typed or it is taken automatically for example by the mask IDs In addition suitable not suitable qualification can be displayed in the certificate by the appropriate switch The important statistical and capability data of the processes of the given product can also be displayed in the certificate e g number of parts minimum and maximum value process mean standard deviation mean range mean and capability indices If the switches are switched on next to critical significant and normaf switches the capability indices of the measured parameters with the given CTQ levels are displayed in the certificate CTQ level can be given in the Measured parameter menu item of the Database menu If there is not switched on any switch here the statistical data will not be displayed in
37. More measured values can be displayed on the measurements diagram by turning it over The cursor can be moved and the diagram can be turned over by the following buttons in the left down corner of the diagram eee skip to the first measured value of the selected sample range v turn a page forward EH 0 skip a measured value forward R gt Q skip a measured value backward uU EM turn a page backward Ea skip to the last measured value of the selected sample range The cursor can be moved with the mouse by clicking on the given bar The diagram can be turned over with the mouse by clicking on the right or the left side of the diagram while holding down the mouse button The several display modes can be changed by the feu button Measured values are displayed compared to the mean as default but it is possible to display the absolute values of the measurements or display the measured values as points E Measuremen ts Diagram TEST Data 1 Test DB 1 TEST TEST Ed Measuremen ts Diagram TEST Data 1 Test DB 1 TEST TEST inl x dx USL 20 040 PRA i i ANE APT pue V IY LSL 19 96 19 960 Sample 3175 Value 28 8461 Time 6 9 2068 7 28 a m Sample 3175 Value 28 8461 Time 6 9 2008 7 28 a m Mask 1234 56 Mask 1234 56 Interv Remark Interv Remark ku 85 v eaj ise v wie ao Han in 1 eie Bc ku a u 3 sev ie
38. Settings menu Program identifies the access level of the entered user by the password and opens the main window user surface of the access level connected to the given user If the password protection is not enabled user is always entered on the highest access level Attention The database of the software is capable of registering many factories but the passwords belong to only one factory as each factory has its own independent sets of passwords When selecting a factory user has to know and enter the required user ID and password 1 2 Starting the program After installation the program can be run by clicking the SPC menu item of the SPC group in the Start menu or directly with the HNS SPC shortcut displayed on the Windows desktop Program can be started only in one copy as default see the Special program settings In case of starting the second copy of the program following window is displayed x MARKING Program is already running Multiple instances of the program can mot be uzed Figure 1 Waring message in case of multiple instances If SQL database is used SQL database was the previous selected database firstly it is necessary to choose the SQL server in the following window HNS SPC User Manual 1 DANNS TECNICAL DEVELOPMENT C0 LTD HNS SPC SQL Database a x Drivers Aliases DRACLE ODBC uw Password Connect automatically on the next start
39. The Alert is acknowledged switch in the middle of the window is connected to the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert function An alert can be acknowledged by switching on this switch and giving an intervention or a comment See further information in the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert document Attention The selected intervention and the given comment are always recorded to the actual appointed sample and are saved in the database by pressing the Ok button 2 6 12 7 Control chart acknowledgement The inspecting of the control chart can be marked by pressing the TE button the acknowledged chart range is marked with a green line on the control chart see the chapter Meaning of the data on the control chart The acknowledged status can be set for the appointed sample or the acknowledged status of a sample can been removed by pressing this button Attention The acknowledged status is recorded to the appointed sample and is saved in the database at the time of the setting 2 6 12 8 Rejecting a sample on the control chart A sample can be rejected or the rejected status of a sample can be deleted by pressing the button Always the status of the appointed sample is set or deleted by pressing this button The calculated values on the control chart are re calculated by changing the rejected status of the sample This function is enabled for the second and third access level Attention
40. The number of the item is not determined by the executing order of the items but according to their order in the measuring program file physically It is possible to make a sample item by using one measured value or two measured values and a mathematical operation see the following figures Mathematical functions can be used in the Inheritance using in build parser field The sample item can be resulted from the measured values optionally the sample mean range or standard deviation etc values can also be used The length of the formula can be maximum 250 characters See the functions in the MPG Measuring Program document EJ Inherited value MPG 5 I x E Inherited value MPG 5 l x Simple inheritance sl Simple inheritance Be jae1 882 eee Check E HZHH Check C Inheritance using in build parser C Inheritance using in build parser DE o a c Ms as Specify inheritance mode and set inheritance Specify inheritance mode and set inheritance Ef Inherited value MPG 5 X C Simple inheritance Inheritance using in build parser SUBCMAXCUC D V21 MINVELD V2 D Dae Specify inheritance mode and set inheritance Figure 170 Giving the references of the measured values in the S item The operator can display all the control charts of the processes used in the S items The control charts can be displayed automatically by switching on the Chart automatically switch
41. This function can be enabled by pressing the button next to the head or positon field It is possible to take the head position number automatically it cannot be typed by the operator at the running of the measuring program according to the user defined settings x Iv Automatic number without keyboard input Beginning value h E Closing value fE lt lt Run time input ey Cancel Automatic increment 1 ey Current value ii Ok Enter the settings Figure 168 Head positon number input settings The head position number is given by the operator as default If the Automatic number without keyboard input switch is on the head position number is taken automatically started from the beginning value and increased with the automatic increment value The automatic increasing lasts until the closing value is reached The next head position number is displayed in the current value field The automatic head positon numbers cannot be changed by the operator It is possible to change the closing value has been given here by the operator at the running the measuring program if the Run time input switch is on The closing value cannot be bigger than the number of the heads positions of the given machine Note HNS SPC User Manual 121 A HN TEEHIGLOEELIPIEN C0 If the closing value is reached the remainder increment value is added to the beginning value For example i
42. amp amp X zm tool change Cancel F i ri Save this marker data for all samples of the MPG Enter marker data to save with sample Figure 201 Save the marker data for all samples of the MPG Note The Save this marker data for all samples of the MPG switch is displayed only for the current recorded sample in the measuring program which was run just now because the program and the database do not support the connecting of samples of different processes subsequently This function is valid only for the given machine because the extension cannot be defined for another machine s sample because of the different intervention list The extension means the copying of the interventions data intervention measured parameter failure group causes the intervention and the comment together HNS SPC User Manual 139 JS UG TECANCAL DEVELOPMENT C0 LTD 2 8 Data loggers menu In the Data loggers menu the data of the external data logger devices can be read out and saved in the database See the description about this menu in the Gauges document HNS SPC User Manual a0 DANNS TECANCAL DEVELOPMENT C0 LTD 2 9 Reports menu Several reports can be made in the Reports menu of the program This menu is enabled only in case of SQL database See the description about this function in the Reports document HNS SPC User Manual us PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD 2 10 Settings me
43. etc which is displayed in the MPG selection window for the operator The sampling frequency can be given in the Specified sampling rate field This value is not taken into account this is only displayed in the MPG selection window for the operator as text information HNS SPC User Manual 119 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Three strategies Product Parameter Device of the measuring program can be selected in the Strategy field The selected strategy affects the ia of the measurements and qualifications of the several pieces See the meaning of the strategies in the MPG Measuring Program document A measuring program contains measured and attributed parameters of only one product hence this product has to be selected from the database by pressing the Product button and selecting a product If it is required to enter the mask and team ID see the Sample data sheet in the MPG menu item of the Settings menu these obligations can be switched off related to the given measuring program by the Mask may be empty and the Team may be empty switches In case of switching on the mask filtering team filtering switches only the samples with the same mask team ID which is recorded to the given sample will be displayed on the operator s control chart and measurements diagram program takes several control charts for several mask team IDs The measuring program can be dedicated to operators option
44. kod user ID Display names using 1 language 2 language Cancel Configure naming system of database elements by your terminology Figure 204 Database terminology HNS SPC User Manual 143 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO The names before the data entry fields in the Database Terminology window are used as default Two names can be given to each database levels as in case of the name of the database items for example the product name The language to be used can be selected in the Display names using field The names given in the first or in the second column are displayed according as the 1 language or the 2 language possibility is selected The names in the database terminology are valid only for the actual factory and each factory has an own database terminology When a new factory is created the program displays the Database Terminology window where the names related to the new factory can be given with accepting the default names or modifying them Note The bilingual names can be used the best if for example the same database is used by Hungarian and English users because in this case everybody can work with the names in his her own language The Hungarian user can use the names given in the primary language while the English user can use the names given in the secondary language In the Hungarian version of the program the capability study report see the Print settings menu item of
45. menu The analysed sample range in these analyses is independent from the selected sample range of the other analyses 2 6 26 1 Summarized pareto analysis by product All failure groups within a product are summarized without reference to the machine This analysis can be displayed in the Summarized pareto analysis by product menu item of the Analysis menu Firstly the product whereby the pareto analysis is made has to be selected than the selected time range have to be given in the Summarized Pareto Settings window HNS SPC User Manual 113 EA Summarized Pareto Settings PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT C0 Code Tem Draw num fiF 1T 888 Hame AF 1PRDODUCT Producing equipment Summarised failure groups for all producing equipment Period to summarize Cancel 2088 08 82 6 3 2088 89 82 6 63 Enter period to summarize and other calculation settings Figure 159 Settings of the summarized Pareto analysis by product The format and managing of the summarized pareto diagram is the same as the pareto diagram of one failure group See the description about the Analysis Pareto analysis menu item of the Analysis menu 2 6 26 2 Summarized pareto analysis by machine All failure groups related to a machine are summarized without reference to the product This analysis can be displayed in the Summarized pareto analysis by producing equipment menu item of the
46. ooo oes turn a page backward Ea skip to the last sample of the selected sample range Apart from these buttons the cursor can be positioned with the mouse If the sample to be appointed can be seen on the displayed chart range the sample can be appointed by clicking on it with the left mouse button The control chart can be turned over with the mouse by clicking on the right or the left side of the diagrams If the left mouse button is hold down continuously the displayed control chart is turned over in the appropriate direction 2 6 20 3 Displaying the failure data on the control chart Points on the control chart mean the number of the rejected parts rate of the rejected parts number of the failures rate of the failures related to the samples depending on the kind of the chart These values are calculated by the failure data in the sample The failure data of a sample can be displayed by clicking on the given point with the right mouse button The failure data of the sample are displayed in an extra window HNS SPC User Manual 106 aire E Sample Data B x Sample zize n nere 50 al Humber of faulty pieces 3 1 fault Z fault 2 3 fault 1 View attributed data of the current sample Figure 144 Displaying the failure data on the control chart The list contains the sample size the number of the rejected parts and the occurrence of the several failures as well as
47. status can be input in this window The damaged status can also be input by clicking the given measured value with the right mouse button This function is enabled for the 2 technician and the 3 engineer access level as default but is can be enabled for the 1 operator access level see the Operator can change measured values and states after closing inputs switch on the nput Measuring sheet in the MPG menu item of the Settings menu When all the specified measurements and qualifications are performed successfully the Save button can be pressed By pressing this button the collected measured and attributed data are saved in the database Sl Close Figure 199 Buttons in the measuring program window The data can be saved automatically at the time of the closing the data input This function can be enabled with the Automatically saving of data on closing data inputs switch on the Input Measuring sheet in the MPG menu item of the Settings menu The displaying of the control charts in the measuring program can be started by the Charf button This function can be used any time the control charts can also be displayed without data input The following control charts belong to the given measuring program the control charts whereon a new sample has been recorded in the given measuring program and the control charts which s displaying has been enabled in the measuring program in th
48. the certificate By the Failures data switch the displaying of the attributed data related to the given product can be enabled In this case the total number of parts and the number of rejected parts is displayed by failure groups within the product If there are rejected parts the code name and frequency of the failures are also listed This function can be used only in SQL database HNS SPC User Manual 116 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO The displayed data can also be sorted by heads and positions related to the measured and attributed parameters by switching on the Head and Position switches The capability and failure data can be summarized by mask ID Firstly the Special summary using of mask switch has to be on and the given mask ID has to be given In this case the statistical data will be calculated by the samples with the given mask ID If the switch next to the mask ID entry field is on the given mask ID will be offered next time automatically For example if the mask field is used for recording the LOT ID a certificate can be made by a given LOT The list of the mask identifiers recorded in the selected time interval is displayed in the certificate if the Create mask list switch is on The capability indices are not displayed in the certificate among the statistical data if the Hide capability indices switch is on Before printing the language of the certificate English or Hungarian has to be
49. 13 332 13 384 19 976 1 z 3 4 5 B z Heads 20 00562 E ME Print x Positions 15 898688 x Figure 130 Head position chart The head position analysis is displayed by pressing the Eur button on the control chart This button is active only in case of a process for multihead multiposition machines if the data are also collected for machine for the main process and for heads and or positions for sub processes The head position analysis ensures the same possibility to display the control chart for machine head and position as the possibility at the displaying the measured values on the control chart By clicking on the point of the given head position the control chart of the given head position are displayed automatically The points related to the several heads positions mean the means of the measured values displayed on the machine s control chart or rather the deviation from the mean of all heads positions If the heads and positions are used together two charts are displayed but if only the heads or positions are used only one chart is displayed in this window In the left bottom corner of the window the mean of the all heads positions are displayed To display the control chart of a given head or position only the head or position point has to be clicked by left mouse button This displays the last control chart for the given head or position automatically The chart can be printed by pre
50. Always the status of the appointed sample is set or deleted and the status change is saved in the database at the time of the changing 2 6 12 9 Control chart settings All control chart settings can be seen or modifying in the Control Chart Settings window by pressing the TEEI button Control Chart Settings X Tupe Mode Process type SPC Control General EAM Monitoring Kind s gt Size 188 E rien E DoC xx DoC R s Toohwear Control Limits Harning Limits calculated not used Uri p amp eeeee uur peeeee LE a eeee LL peee Urt paese wu poeeeem E tus esso Lm faa Configure measured control chart settings Figure 129 Control chart settings HNS SPC User Manual 97 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO The meaning of the control chart settings is the same as in the measured process settings see the Process settings Change menu item related to the measured processes of the Database menu 2 6 12 10 ANOMA head and position analysis Program ensures possibility to manage the multiple processes of the multihead and multiposition machines The head or position chart shows the actual state after the last data input of a given machine s all heads or positions in a diagram Ed ANUMA by Head and Position Charts TEST TEST 2 1 Bl x 20 010 20 007 20 004 20 001 13 338 20 008 20 000
51. Analysis menu Firstly the workgroup and a machine whereby the pareto analysis is made has to be selected than the selected time range have to be given in the Summarized Pareto Settings window EA Summarized Pareto Settings X Product Summarised failure groups for all products Producing equipment Workgroup hrs oo hrauoRkGROUP Machine hs LF 1HDRKGROUP 1MRCHINE Period to summarize Cancel 2088 08 03 la7 33 2008 89 03 la7 33 Enter period to summarize and other calculation settings Figure 160 Settings of the summarized Pareto analysis by machine Failures can be summarized by a given head or position in case of multihead multiposition machines If a multihead multipositon machine is selected it is possible to select a head or positions in the Summarized Pareto Settings window The given head or position can be selected after switching on the Head Position summary switch HNS SPC User Manual 114 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO X Product Summarised failure groups for all m Producing equipment Horkgroup fiF 15 1F 1HORKGROUP Machine TEST 3 TEST 3 Head Position summary gt Ed Summarized Pareto Settings al Period to summarize Cancel 2088 08 83 p 28 2088 09 83 pz 28 Enter period to summarize and other calculation settings Figure 161 Settings of the summarized Pareto analysis by head po
52. Attention An empty database can be created only in a directory which has not already contained database files otherwise the program displays an error message 2 2 6 Re index xBase database Database service means a logical checking of data files and database relations SQL database does not require this function Service of xBase databases can be done in the Reindex xBase database menu item of the File menu Damaged records are removed from the data files and header data of the data file is checked In addition damaged relations are removed that means removing the records that contains failed references keys By switching on the Check data integrity of tables switch the correctness of the relations between database tables is checked too Service can be started by pressing the Starf button HNS SPC User Manual 18 PANS TURA DEVELOPMENT CO ES xBase Database Service x A xBase Database Service Start MSAMPLE Lancel Please wait 18 5 sec Cancel i Check data integrity of tables i Close Iv Check data integrity of tables Close Checking packing and reindexing of Base tables Checking packing and reindexing of xBase tables Figure 21 Re index xBase database Actual state of the service is displayed in the status line during the service After the service the program re indexes the data files The time of the service depends on the size of the database files and
53. CO Es Save Settings X Distribution Distribution settings lt lt for Stored Samples Test settings for Next Samples 22 Process E Type settings Tool change settings Toolwear settings Chart E Chart settings type mode kind size I Control Limit settings E Harning Limit settings Out of Control settings Select items to save current settings parts into database Figure 102 Save measured process settings Settings can be saved by two ways e Saving for Stored Samples Modified settings will be valid for the selected sample range the settings of the selected sample range are updated with the modified settings e Saving for Next Samples Modified settings will be valid for the samples which will be recorded after this Changed settings Saving for stored samples Settings liv Hv Saving for next samples Stored samples 1 a eje se s m Selected sample range Last stored sample in the database Next sample to be measured Attention Program makes a sample border into the process if a setting is modified A sample range with different process settings cannot be selected for analysis all samples within a selected sample range have to be had the same settings It is recommended to change the settings with due foresight and save the settings for next samples only in reasonable case X Figure 103 The ways of saving the measu
54. Database menu In this table can be reached all functions creating changing copying removing related to measured parameters EJ Measured Parameter X Product P59569 T wi Mame by Language 2 CTU Unit Decimals Specifia Stak length Stalk lengh Critical fmm 2 881 ilateral 4 fidd new Delete Copy Change Cancel Change Ok Figure 60 Measured parameter table In the table there are always displayed the measured parameters of the product which is selected in the drop down list that in the window s right top corner If there is not defined any measured parameter under the selected product then the no data text is written in the first row of the table The black narrow before the Name column shows the highlighted measured parameter Creating a new measured parameter can be done with the Add new button in this window See the further steps in the chapter New measured parameter A new measured parameter is created under the product which is selected in the drop down list in the window s right top corner The highlighted measured parameter can be removed from the database by pressing the Delete button See the further steps in the chapter Remove measured parameter The highlighted measured parameter can be duplicated by pressing the Copy button Firstly the Measured Parameter Settings window appears filled in with the data of the measured parameter to be copied excepting the
55. E Sample time for search x im Date ZBBB BB Z1 E Time 12 27 p m Cancel l Figure 99 Search by sampling time Selected sample range can be sorted by defined conditions The Filter button has to be pressed to set the filter conditions Samples can be filtered by sample data user ID shift team tool and mask by simple or multiple filter settings HNS SPC User Manual 78 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO X Filter Conditions Enable filtering Sample User ID to load Shift C to filter out Team Poo Substituting Mask fo Separator i Set conditions to filtered loading of samples Tool Figure 100 Filter settings The samples are sorted by sample data given in the Filter Conditions window It is possible to load the samples that fill these conditions by the to load switch or to load the samples that do not fill these conditions by the to filter out switch The conditions are filled if the sample data are the same as the data in the filter settings The character in the substituting field can replace any other character default The character in the separator field can be used as a separator in case of giving more sample ID in a field default Filter conditions are valid if the Enable filtering switch is on Attention Several filter conditions will be used if a value is given to it Empty fields are not conside
56. Import process is the same as in case of measured samples see the Import menu item related to measured samples of the Data menu The only difference compared to measured samples that the sample size the number of the rejected parts and the number of the several failure s occurrence are recorded instead of the measured value Example for import file format 50 3 0 2 1 1999 09 30 08 55 XY A01 103 A123CrLf 50 1 0 1 0 1999 09 30 09 55 XY A01 103 A123CrLf Meaning of the data in the first row sample size 50 rejected parts in the sample 3 number of the first failure s occurance 0 number of the second failure s occurance 2 number of the third failure s occurance 1 sampling date and time 1999 09 30 08 55 user ID XY shift ID AO1 team ID 103 tool ID none mask ID A123 2 5 9 Delete samples by date Measured and attributed samples can be deleted together by sampling date in the Delete samples by date menu item of the Data menu This function can be used only in case of SQL database otherwise this menu item is not active Ef Delete Samples by Date X Date of samples to delete from to bns Ez 2008 566 069 ce 2668 67 12 Ty Attention ention ar Delete All measured and attributed Samples in selected date range Will be deleted from the database Set date range of samples to be deleted Figure 95 Delete samples by date Firstly the beginning and clos
57. Manual 124 PANG TELA DEVELOPMENT GO In case of using the OK NOK status it can be avoid the missing the inspection of a failure However the time of the data input will be larger Summarized data of an attributed sample can be input with the A1 and A2 items which can be edited on the A1 A2 sheet Ed MPG Editor X Header HE Hx 5 HL A AS Al Az nu Ei E2 Alert File Input and store attributed data by sample Item 1 fi Chart automatically PSL Input Remove before Code Name after Failure group rei f fault group Horkgroup fiF 15 1F 1HO0RKGRDUP Hachine fis 16 LF 1HORKGROUP 1HRCHINE head le position la 2 Select NHONRHE HPG Figure 173 Editing the A1 A2 item of the measuring program Items can be created appointed and removed the same way as on the MS M MX sheet It has to select in the Input field that the summarized attributed sample data are wanted to input before or after the input of the other data measured data and attributed data by pieces Like in case of measured processes the attributed processes whereto new samples are saved are listed in the process displaying menu of the measuring program so the operator can display the control chart of these processes or the control chart of these processes can be displayed automatically Such an attributed process can also be added to the process displaying men
58. Selecting a machine for changing After selecting the machine the given data can be changed in the Machine window HNS SPC User Manual 32 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Code fis 16 amp Mame 1F 1HDRKGROUP 1MACHINE 1F 1HORKGR UP 1HARCHINE Tool Not changeable C Changeable Head 1 Interventions once o ed e Cancel 7 Position 1 Type or modify item data and intervention list Figure 46 Change machnie s data In case of changing the machine code the program displays a warning message and asks the user for confirmation of the renaming Attention When an xBase database is used the machine code identifiers the database items so when modified all database elements in the relations have to be modified according to the database relations Hence the modification of the code takes time depending on the size of the database the state of the modification can be seen on the screen Stopping the program Ctrl Alt Del Reset turning the computer off while the modification is underway may result in damage to the database relations and loss of data Interventions are always related to a given machine so all machines have their own intervention list Reduction the number of the heads positions means removing sub processes and in particular case recorded samples So the program ask for confirmation of deleting before removing after pressing the Ok button before c
59. Settings menu 3 2 9 The Automatic Alert service is not running Message x ATTENTION Ho ALERT ENGINE service runs in the currently selected factory There are processes marked as important which have to be checked automaticallu but no service running in this factory Check Alert Engine running computers SPC programs startrrestart servicelz if needed Figure 248 Warning message The Automatic Alert service is not running Reason There are important processes in the actual selected factory but the Automatic Alert service is not enabled on either SPC workstations in the given factory Comment Itis enabled the checking of the Automatic Alert service Suggestion You should enable the service if it is required Reference Automatic alerts menu item of the Settings menu 3 2 10 The Automatic Export service is not running Message Automatic Export Engine X ATTENTION Ho AUTOMATIC EXPORT ENGINE service runs in the currently selected factory There are processes to be exported automatically but no service running in this factory Check Automatic Export Engine running computers and SPC programs starterestart zerwicels if needed Figure 249 Warning message The Automatic Export service is not running Reason There are processes appointed for Automatic Export in the actual
60. The textual error message gives general information for the user related to the error while the other error data ensures the exact locating of the error In case of xBase databases the Database error button can also be pressed and the following Database Error window will be displayed Error code Fee Pseudo code Fse File FACTORY Figure 253 The xBase database error message window The special error codes can be displayed in this window these codes also can be use to localising of the error HNS SPC User Manual 176 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD 3 3 3 Gauge error Message A HNS Digimatic SMUZ 4 USBMUZ 4 NE m Initialization m re pf renwal LXI Cancel Ineweu ERROR TIF Figure 254 Error message Gauge error Reason The selected gauge is not available Suggestion You should make an end of the reason of the error and you should ask the checking of the gauge again with the Retry button The data can be entered by the keyboard after pressing the Manuaf button if it is enabled among the settings The window can be closed by pressing the Cancef button The steps of the prevention of the gauge error 1 Check whether the correct gauge is selected Otherwise you have to select the correct gauge in the Gauge menu item of the Settings menu or in the measuring program 2 Check the gauge settings in the Gauge menu item of the Settin
61. aUe na n URRUE ERERRVEENER LFU FEY ka a Rer Mass dad ea pus 56 2 3 10 2 Alfributed process DY o qeeltio NT E 57 2 3 11 Process settings for attributed process cccccccccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeseeeeeessasseeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeas 57 VES ed ied ak Gi ac g 2 eC OR TT EE 57 2371 2 eu DOCES aDeSe Pr Pe RE E Ce eee Re Pee ene ene ee one een ee ee eee ee eee 61 2 3 11 3 Checking the process setting s borders eise eiiis e eise sees e nn ah nnn hu ains nu aras anna aane assa a aas a ssa a sas a asas asas sana ann 62 29212 Sampling COMM Ol CVC MCN E EO cmm 62 24 Process SC ICC NOUN NE EE D OE E E 63 HNS SPC User Manual PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO 25 Dala FG m 65 Pe VS AS OOS OCS erica cate ates ear E Mm 65 2 5 2 Delete measured samples ccccccsseeccccceesececcceeeecececaeeceeeeeaeeeeseueceeeseaeeeeeseaseeeeeseaecessesesaageeeseaseseeeesaas 67 2 5 3 Export measured samples cccccssseccccceesececcceuseeccceuueeeeeseuseeeecsuseceesseaueeessssugeceesssueeeessessagesesssaaaeeeesaas 68 2 5 4 Import measured samples cccccsseeeccccceeeceecceeececccaeeeceeeeeeeeessegeceeeseaeceeesseeeeeeesaeceeseessageeeseaseeeeeesaas 69 VERE tug eU SANS REO UE 71 2 5 6 Delete attributed samples we esac cick tUe rans ute aee ba veran cut
62. archiving of the current database Figure 25 Archiving in process The state of the archiving can be seen in the Database Archiving window Note If archiving is done inordinately for example by database size it is recommended to archive all samples however it is recommended to archive by time range in case of regular archiving 2 2 9 Export IDConnect Production system and products are described in the HNS SPC database These information can be reached by other systems that send data for the HNS SPC IDConnect interface ensures to reach identifiers without direct database connection for an external system Production system and product data will be recorded in text files IDConnect files can be made in the Export IDConnect menu item of the File menu by off line way ES HNS IDConnect IDConnect directory 5Browse Table name IDF IDM IDP TEST1 Sf Close Specify location of IDConnect text tables and export x Figure 26 Export IDConnect The IDConnect directory and the Table name have to be given The table name is the code of the factory as default IDConnect export can be started by pressing the Export button IDConnect tables contain machine and product data identifiers and relations stored in the HNS SPC database in CSV format which are suitable for further processing DF factory table header code and names in 1 and 2 language of the factory IDM
63. are initialized separately The measuring program cannot be continued until all the necessary gauges are ready for working The validity of the last checking of the controlled gauges applied in the given measuring program is also inspected here In case of necessity the validation has to be made in order for all relevant gauges See this function in the Gauges menu item of the Settings menu Ed HNS Digimatic SMUA 4 USEMUA 4 cen Initialisation i rh Manual LXI Cancel 123 Retry Figure 185 Gauge checking The sample data to be saved with the current sample has to be entered in the Sample Codes window x User ID Sampling time Shift 2008 09 11 Team 12 88 p m Mask Ok Set data to assign to the samples Figure 186 Giving the sample data The optional or compulsory sample data are the following User ID user ID If the ID of the operator who is performing the measuring program has been already entered in the program log in window this field is filled in automatically SII acie shift ID It can be filled in automatically see the Shift ID s menu item of the Settings menu Team team ID Mask mask ID Sampling time sampling MPG running date and time It is filled automatically according to the computer s clock This date and time can
64. be copied into the directory given in the Destination field The data made by the archiving compose a new several usable xBase database Attention Selected destination directory cannot contain HNS SPC database files otherwise program will not enable to start the archiving Possibilities related to archived period as follows e Simple archiving Archive all samples Whole database is archived only data that are necessary for smooth tracking of processes remain in the original database If Keep samples of last control chart switch is on than samples on the last control chart will not be archived In this case there will always remain data for a control chart in the original database This option is enabled only in SQL database Archive samples by time range Data saved at a given time range in the database will be archived by a beginning and a closing date given by the user e Batch archiving Samples of selected time range are archived in several databases and in several directories separated in defined time intervals Sorting can be done by years by quarters or by months Time period can be appointed according to the selected sorting time that is years quarters or months have to be given as beginning and closing date Only actual selected factory will be archived as default but it is possible to archive every factories can be found in the selected database by the Archive full database archive all factory switch
65. be modified by the operator as default but this possibility can be disabled with the Sampling time can not be modified by the operator switch on the Sample data sheet in the MPG menu item of the Settings menu HNS SPC User Manual 132 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT GO Sample data can be entered compulsory or automatically see the Sample data sheet in the MPG menu item of the Settings menu The sample data are saved and stored with the samples which are input in the measuring program Note The name of the fields in the Sample Codes windows are used according to the database terminology of the actual factory see the Database terminology menu item of the Settings menu After entering the sample data the measuring program runs according to the specified commands systematically If there are items related to head position in the measuring program and the head position number has to be given by the operator the following head position number entry window will be displayed before the relevant items x ID number t E Where was the piece made Figure 187 Giving the head position number If the head position numbers are increased automatically and the modifying of the closing value is enabled for the operator than the following window will be displayed to give the maximum head position number If the Use previous closing maximum values switch is not swi
66. be selected in the Gauges List menu item of the Settings menu In the further gauge selection lists of the program measuring program creation gauge selection and settings only the gauges selected here will be displayed All the gauges supported by the program are enabled as default so it is not necessary to use this menu item by all means but it can ease the gauge selection in the further functions 4 Installed Gauges X Installed HHS Digimatic SMUA 2 HHS Digimatic SMNUX 4 USBNUX 4 L S5pec HHS Digimatic SMNUX 4 M1 M2 2 HHS Digimatic SMUX 16 USBNUX 16 CSpec HNS Digimatic SMUX 18 Max Chn l n all ON gt gt W data import from CSU is enabled Cancel Ok lt lt all OFF Select gauges which are installed and usable in this measuring station Figure 224 The list of the installed gauges A gauge can be enabled with the switch before the name of the gauge All the gauges can be enabled or disabled with the all ON gt gt and lt lt all OFF buttons Attention The data input from keyboard cannot be disabled 2 10 11 2 Gauge selection and settings In the Gauges Select and Settings menu item of the Settings menu the settings of the gauges to be used can be given as well as the gauge to be used for single measurements see the Measured samples menu item of the Data menu can be selected EE x Gauge W Show available ports only HHS Digim
67. be switched on next to the name of the given report A logo can be printed in the header of the reports The file that contains the picture in bmp format has to be selected in the Logo field The picture file can also be searched by the button 2 2 12 Logout from access level User can exit from the HNS SPC program by the Logout from access level menu item of the File menu HNS SPC User Manual 24 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO 2 3 Database menu 2 3 1 Database structure The program s database is a multi level relation database which is suitable for structured storing the SPC data This database is built on the basis of two registration One of them is the production system workgroups and machines and the other is the product products measured and attributed parameters registration Relations of database items are in the following figure 2 Workgroup n Workgroup 1 Failure group 2 Failure group h n Failure group 1 Product n Parameter 1 Workgroup 1 Measured process 2 Measured process h 2 Attributed process n Attributed process Figure 30 The important elements of the database structure 1 Attributed process Default names factory workgroup etc are shown in the figure which can be change by setting of the database terminology see the Database terminology menu item of the Settings menu 2 3 2 Factory H
68. chosen as well as the date of the certificate and the name and status of the person who signs the certificate can be given Certificate can be made by pressing the View Print View Print button That means printing or displaying on the screen depending on the settings in the Print settings menu item of the File menu In case of enabling both possibilities the certificate will be displayed on the screen firstly than by closing the Certificate window program asks for confirmation of printing x Do you print the certificate Cancel Figure 163 Printing the certificate for product Note In case of displaying the certificate on the screen further buttons can be displayed by pressing the 3 button at the bottom of the window If the certificate is saved or printed by these buttons the format of the file print is the same as displayed on the screen unlike the result of the normal printing Attention If capability and failure data are occurred in the certificate the appropriate data have to be loaded it takes time depending on the quantity of the data The state of the process can be seen in the status window displayed on the screen 2 6 27 2 Certificate for parameter Firstly the product and the parameter within has to be selected by the lt lt Certified parameter button Note Only the name and the drawing number are printed in the product identifier field of the certificate b
69. common password system is used without reference to the previous password settings The default passwords are the following First the lowest access level SPCT Second access level SPC2 Third the highest level SPC3 Attention The passwords belong to a given factory so passwords have to be given separately to each factory It is recommended to change the default passwords immediately after the creation of the new factory When using simple passwords only the access level can be known by the given password but the user cannot be identified It is possible to identify the user himself herself when logging in giving his her own user ID and name in the password window The user identification can be required by the User s ID must be entered and the User s name must be entered switches on the Password Login sheet lf one or both switches are on it is not allowed to log in until the user types the required user ID or name 2 10 4 2 Personal passwords In case of personal password system each user has a personal password and a personal user ID and an access level also belongs to each user so each user uses an own password to login to the program on the given access level HNS SPC User Manual 145 DANNS TECANCAL DEVELOPMENT C0 LID A Password and Login Settings X Simple gt Personal gt gt Password Login User ID Hame Password Lewel Blask Katalin HHHEEHEHEEHEHEH 7 lt blaskoa katal i
70. defined by switching on the given Product dependent Parameter dependent or Failure group dependent switch and then the given product measured parameter or failure group has to be selected by the button In case of defining these relations it is possible to display in the Marker Data window only the interventions that have references to the given product measured parameter or failure group see Analysis Control chart menu item in the Analysis menu Attention It is recommended to give the intervention s name in two languages at once because interventions in contrast to other database items are always displayed at a selection only in one language which is selected in the database terminology 2 3 4 2 2 Change intervention The name and relations of the earlier defined interventions can be modified by pressing the Change button in the Interventions field after selecting the Machine Change menu item of the Database menu Ef select Intervention X material change tool change Product s49548 T Measured parameter Failure group Select intervention from the list Cancel rt Figure 49 Selecting an intervention for changing After selecting the intervention the given data can be changed in the Intervention Data window HNS SPC User Manual 34 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO An earlier defined interventions can be removed by pressing Remove bu
71. depending on the kind of the chart R s mH ms sample range standard deviation moving range or moving standard deviation depending on the kind of the chart Intervention intervention entered to the sample Comment comment entered to the sample In addition the comment that refers to the automatic acknowledgement of an alert is displayed in this field See the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert document Date 6 9 2008 Five a m 130 0390 Process is stable 130 0129 User t 0 0317 Pp 1 Hask 0 03276 Ppk Intervention Figure 120 Information of the appointed sample The data of the actual displayed sample range according to the chart size settings can be seen in the field inside the double frame p Q grand mean of the samples process mean of the displayed chart range R S Rm mean of the sample ranges or mean of the sample standard deviations depending on the kind of the control chart A O a ates estimated standard deviation of the sample range HNS SPC User Manual 91 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD Status the process is monitored by the control chart automatically according to the Capability indices OoC settings and it is qualified as stable in control or not stable out of control If the process is not stable the on going process capability indices Cy Cy will not be calculated and
72. e Display statistical data It is possible to display the number of the parts under the lower specification limit above the upper specification limit and inside the specification limits on the control chart and these are displayed in percentage compared to the number of the parts in the analysed sample range e Display DPM data pcs It is possible to display the number of defected parts referred to the million parts number of parts out of the specification limits 1 000 000 value The total DMP value and the DPM values under the lower specification limit and above the upper specification limit are also displayed severally e Use Z index not the capability indexes The Z index calculated by the Six Sigma method is displayed instead of the process capability indices on the control charts In this case the process capability is qualified by the Z index compared to the index requirement Zgoal value given by the user e CL s by samples when sample size is changing charts p u In case of a failure group with a not constant sample size see the Attributed process menu item of the Database menu the control limits of the p and u charts are calculated for each sample separately depending on the sample size The control limits are layered if the actual sample size is changed It is recommended to switch on this switch certainly if the sample size of the several samples differs more than 2596 from each other
73. failures chart 4 Control Chart Settings X Category 1 category Control Limits Harning Limits Chart type c id calculated not used ize 25 M iu usi UHL po NEL 2 088 1st Ja ub o Dot 2 common setting for all charts allecategories failures af this group 2 common settings for all failure charts of this group Set attributed control chart settings Figure 150 Control chart settings category chart EA Control Chart Settings X Failure 2 fault Chart type C Harning Limits E not used Lontrol Limits calculated m ize 25 s ion ust f UHL Poo ja X NEUE 2 000 po ub Dot common setting for all charts allecategories failures of this group 2 common settings for all failure charts of this group Set attributed control chart settings Figure 151 Control chart settings failure chart The meaning of the control chart settings is the same as in the attributed process settings see the Process settings Change menu item related to the attributed processes of the Database menu The settings in the Control Chart Settings window are always valid for actual displayed chart all failures chart category chart failure chart The settings are exceptions to this rule are marked in the setting window The settings which are mark
74. fields Input Measuring Sample data Log Alert and Others Ed MPG Settings X Input Heasuring Sample data LogrAler t Others v MPG data input process can be re started without closing MPG window Input sample ID s on first run only C Sample completed sound Data inputs started automatically when MPG selected nm Automatically saving of data on closing data inputs m Harning window appears on OoS measurement W Re measuring enabled Operator can change measured values and states after closing inputs gm Operator can change to manual input on gauge error Llose gauges on closing data inputs COM port selections overridden by COM ports selected in Gauge Settings Check and set your MPG configurations Figure 216 MPG Settings Input Measuring HNS SPC User Manual 151 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD The settings on the Input Measuring sheet are the following e MPG data input process can be re started without closing MPG window The re starting of the measuring program can be enabled If the measuring program is run more times together it is not necessary to return into the MPG selection window and to select the measuring program before each running severally e Input sample ID s on first run only In case of running the measuring program more times together if the previous switch is on the sample data have to be entered only before the first running When the measuring pro
75. head position TEST Machine test DB1 0 date time intervention parameter failure group user id shift team tool mask average range deviation rejected 2008 06 09 7 28 tool change 19 9754 0 027 0 01069 2008 06 10 13 34 maintenance 20 0328 0025 000976 2008 06 13 6 04 machine setting 20 0234 0 033 0 0135 2008 06 15 16 12 material change 20 0062 0 042 0 0163 2008 06 15 22 21 machine setting 19 9704 0 025 00095 km 2008 06 16 11 54 temperature setting 19 9728 0021 0 0773 M 4 MMunkal ja ae Rag lg Alakzatokhy N w 3 Al 2 amp cil 94 A S32SE808 K sz NUM A Figure 135 Excel file with the exported interventions Note The text is entered in the Comment field maximum 250 character in the Marker Data window is not exported 2 6 16 Cancel the sample selection The selection of the analysed samples can be cancelled in the Reset selection menu item related to the measured samples of the Analysis menu Some functions e g the Select database menu item of the File menu are disabled if an analysed sample range is selected because some data are saved in the database directly and some data are loaded from the database during the analysis Before using a disabled menu item the sample selection has to be cancelled When logging out of the program sample selection is cancelled automatically 2 6 17 Capability index diagram Capability index diagram shows the change of the capability indices of a selected
76. highlighted z at dier N f the highligh Factories codes in the ames of the highlighted factory Select a list item to use Figure 34 Selecting a factory for changing current database After selecting the factory to be changed the user identifiers according to the settings in the given factory have to be entered because the data of the factory can only be modified by a user who has the highest access rights in that factory If the user has the necessary rights the data entry window described at the creation of a new factory appears where the factory data the factory code and names can be modified In case of changing the factory code the program displays a warning message and asks the user for confirmation of the renaming HNS SPC User Manual 26 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO X Ed Rename ATTENTION You will change an identifier code Do you really want to do this renaming If you execute the given renaming then MPGs Rename which use the old code will not work Do you really want to rename Figure 35 Confirmatinon of the identifier s renaming Attention When an xBase database is used the factory code identifiers the database items so when modified all database elements in the relations have to be modified according to the database relations Hence the modification of the code takes time depending on the size of the database The state of the modification can be seen on t
77. in the given factory can be listed as usual and a measured parameter s data can be copied into the fields of this window This function simplifies the creation of the measured parameters that are the same or similar to each other HNS SPC User Manual 40 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT GO Head diameter Head diameter Head lenght Head lenght P59569 T Overall lenght Overall lenght P59565 T gt Stalk diameter Stalk diameter P5H5B59 T gt Stalk length Stalk length 549548 T gt Head diameter Head diameter 54H548 T gt Head lenaht Head lenaht t JL Figure 59 List of measured parameter s names Further data beside the name in the Measured Parameter Settings window e Unit Unit of the measured parameter e Figure The picture file which is displayed related to the given measured parameter at running the measuring program The file name can be typed or select by means of the need not be given because the program searches it in the selected GPI directory automatically Accordingly the picture files have to be placed in this selected directory See the selection of the GPI directory in the Select GPI directory menu item of the File menu If you do not want to display any picture this field should be empty Note Picture s size can be 324 x 234 pixels and picture s type can be as follows Windows Bitmap File BMP Independent JPEG Group JPG JF JPE Graphics Interchan
78. is closed by pressing the Change Ok button The changing will be rejected if the window is closed by pressing the Change Cancef button 2 3 4 Machine Machine registration contains the data of the machines defined under the workgroups in the actual factory and can be managed in the Machine menu item of the Database menu Any number of machines can be created in a workgroup HNS SPC User Manual 31 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO The name of the menu item changes according to database terminology of the given factory 2 3 4 1 New machine A new workgroup can be created in the Machine Add menu item of the Database menu As the machines are registered under the workgroups the workgroup have to be selected before creating a new machine Firstly the code of the machine should be given which identifiers the machine inside the workgroup so is not allowed to have more machines the same code in a workgroup The name of the machine can be given in two different languages recommended in English and in Hungarian If only one name is given it is automatically copied in the other language s field so the given machine will have one name in both languages x Code LA Name Tool Interventions Not changeable Ja C Changeable F 2 54 Change Head 1 Position 1 EX ke Remove Type or modify item data and intervention list Figure 44 Machine data By pressing the
79. item of the Settings menu HNS SPC User Manual 164 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO X Path Enable loading HN5 DataConnection Settings im Reading rate minute 18 Decimal and separator Cancel Jw Stop on error for debugging 1 234 abcd Drop unidentified values fa Remove comment lines from DataConnect file Disable Head position data loading Save Head position data to main machine process automatically v Load process identifiers check process definitions by samples I Load process identifiers Ccheck process definitions by files Decoder puffer size number of identified processes by loading E4 Type or browse the path to DataConnect files and configure the decoder Figure 233 HNS DataConnection settings The loading of the DataConnect files can be enabled with the Enable loading switch When the data loading is enabled the path of the directory has to be given where the DataConnect files are placed by the external programs Five DataConnect directories can be selected at the most but optional number of DataConnect files can be placed in a directory The DataConnect files are loaded with the frequency given in the Reading rate minute field The program monitors with the given frequency whether there are new data in the selected DataConnect directories If there are new files they are processed they are identified and stored i
80. items are under each other can be selected only in order from up to down consistently Accordingly the order is by machine Workgroup gt gt Machine gt gt Interventions and by product Product gt gt Measured parameters Failure groups attributed parameters Measured Attributed processes can be selected if also Machine and Measured parameters Failure groups attributed parameters are selected together In case of copying the Sampling Control Events the relations between the sampling control events and the process are copied only if Measured processes Attributed processes are also selected After the copying the new factory will be the actual selected The highlighted factory s password and database terminology settings can be changed by the Password and the Terminology buttons See also the Password and the Database terminology menu items of the Settings menu Note The Delete Copy Password and Terminology buttons are enabled if the user has already logged in to the highlighted factory A factory s data can be modified by rewriting this data in the table The changing will be valid if the window is closed by pressing the Change Ok button The changing will be rejected if the window is closed by pressing the Change Cancef button Note The data of a factory can be changed if the user has al
81. level ria Operator Figure 208 Adding a new user x Name User ID Factory Level E mail address Blask Katalin zblasko katalint hns eu Blasko Katalin lt blasko katalin hns eu gt M meth Zoltan neme thi hnz eu M meth Zoltan neme thi hnz eu Varga Istvan i vargalihns eu gt Varga Istvan i vargalihns eut Copy i Skip multiple user definitions view first occurrence only Figure 209 Registered users The data of the registered users can be changed by pressing the Modify button and the users can be deleted by the Remove button HNS SPC User Manual 146 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO It is recommended to register also the e mail addresses because it can be used in case of configuring the services of the program which has e mail sending function The e mail addresses do not have to be typed the recipients can be selected from a list The highlighted user can be deleted from all the e mail address lists belonging to the e mail sending services in the actual factory be pressing the lt gt Remove button after the Remove user from E mail address lists label The users removed from the password list are deleted from all the e mail lists belonging to the e mail sending services automatically In case of modifying the e mail address of a user it will be modified in all e mail lists belonging to the e mail sending services automatically Note Creating a user list does not mean tha
82. machine table code and names of the factory code and names of the workgroups code and names of the machines IDP product table code and names of the factory code and names of the products HNS SPC User Manual 22 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO fj 1f Jegyzettomb OF XI 1f Jegyzett mb Ioj X F jl Szerkeszt s Keres s S g F jl Szerkeszt s Keres s S g i 1f Jegyzettomb Iof x F jl Szerkeszt s Keres s S g HF 1T 1F 1PRODUCT 1F 1PRODUCT 1F 2T 51F 2PRODUCT 1F 2PRODUCT HHH HHH KH HHH IE IE FE IE FEJE FEJE FE JEFE JEFE JEJEJE FEIE IE IEF 4F 1S 1F 1 WORKGROUP 1F 1UORKGROUP 1S 1G 1F 1WORKGROUP 4 x HNS SPC IDConnect Tables V1 0 x 1 MACHINE 1F 1WORKGROUP 1MACHINE Exported 2886 03 38 x 1F 1S 1F 1UORKGROUP 1F 1UORKGROUP 18 26 1F 1WORKGROUP 1F 1F Factory 1F Factory Figure 27 Exported IDConnect tables 2 2 10 Printer The printer to be used can be selected in the Printer menu item of the File menu The selection is done in the usual way by the printer s name x Name nzp4 HP LaserJet 1626 Path Wed default cu vens Select printer to use Figure 28 Printer selection 2 2 11 Print settings Every analysis is made in the HNS SPC can be printed in graphical or text format These prints can be configured in the Print settings menu item of the Settings menu xl Header lt lt english Print condensed lists Ive Print Wor
83. n 30 P IOVS WOOT OU MERC 30 eom VV OTE TON P 30 A MNS a lactate UE 31 E M uen 32 VARI IGS Macnee E907 RP T 32 ERO BAN VI MI sl go 611 PENNE MT ee 33 23 44 22 Changeint rventiON PET EeE 9 34 2972 25 FREMOVE MCT VCIMUON ME dedadeseesseaerouteed 35 2 3 4 2 4 Erici ceesE Pteosgeiiuoe T 35 FROM Eod REMOVE MACHINE ores rea E ER EE E S EEE 39 2 344 Machine table essiri eaa E aE RENE EAEE E Er R ENTA 35 Bis FOU EN E E X PS 37 P WOW DO O aara E E E A E E I IE CM E ELE 3r ARC ow Ae GNaNge Product OIA MIT EEE AAEE R EE R rT 38 VC NOE Remove PDodUC ENERO E EIE EE EEEE Er ANE PNE EE E EEEE eee eee 39 2 LIAO AIDE asa R EE E E EE TEER EEE E EE EEEE EEE 39 236 Measured Pamele oann OT T TOO TE D ETE 40 2 95021 New INMCASUICO paramet r RI 40 2 3 6 2 Change measured parameter Mata cccccccsccccccnsecccccnsenseccnsucecensansecensenseceusenseceususeeceusuusseusauseesensauasesnsausessssauesssnaauess 42 2 3 0 9 REMOVE measured DAFaliBIBl sensismo anani SEXE ASI euo Q9 Puta asuma dde passa data nd EU divinus E tus uU NT MS n s
84. n esse suain nnns essa sans sss sa annes sss aan nnns 99 Figure 133 Exporting the interventions of the selected samples isses eese ee annees nnna nnne ns sna asi rris sna a sans ss sssa ans s essaie saris aa snas 100 Figure 134 Text file with the exported interventions ND rrera 100 Figure 135 Excel file with the exported interventions sees esses sees essen nane ees nnnna nnns sssa ass rris sna 22 rris seas arse ss ss sa assess sse Enrere eren 101 Figure 136 Capability index diagram SGUINGS 101 Figure 137 Gapability GX GI AGA t T i 102 Fi g r 138 List f the capability data rsisi nu EIU LEM REE rere ey Rete EAEE E EREE ERE REEE ee 103 Figure 139 Select attribu t d Samples m unnandi ugeni iar Ouna EENE Oe Eeri Tra UONE EEEa Auer APENE Ea Eier NENE EESAN E NA EPONE EEEN ie NENE ESAN 103 Figure 140 Save attributed process settings Lui e eren tart ER en ERR ERE Ser XRREREAR Rak e EN RAEEMEAAE Frank nds bags ERak ucc MATE MEaA S Fares REIS aes eee 104 Figure 141 Control chart for attributed parameter seii ssesee esses seen nnaa anh n ss snasa isses essa aisi essi sus a saris sss EE sisse sensa a sss s issus EEEE nerne 105 Figure 142 SINS n the contrel Get euo oda ele ome aS Eti eet ae lee HDI LR eee ee MM EM NI
85. of the GPI directory have to be given in the GPI path field This directory can be searched also with the button Last selected directory can be set back by pressing the Restore button Note GPI directory can be the same as the database directory or can be a sub directory of the database directory but it can be also another directory without reference to database directory It is recommended to place the picture files of the several factories in several directories In this case GPI directory has to be changed at the changing a factory It is not recommended to use GPI file because program enables direct displaying of different picture files In earlier versions of the program the picture files have to be converted into GPI format by the GPI converter module of the program The present program version supports using of GPI files because the GPI files used in the earlier program versions may be used in the present program version 2 2 5 Create xBase database In the Create xBase database menu item of the File menu a new empty database can be created Create xBase dbf cdx fpt Database X Path F Browse C HNS SPC DATABASE_TEST Type or choose path for new xBase database em Cas J Figure 20 Create xBase database A directory where database is wanted to place should be given or chosen with the button If a non existent directory is given the program will create it automatically
86. oia tenertdeti added edtusin eu tesceqtas en E a nee sdet i aan 18 2 2 7 Copy xBase to SOL dalaD856 comsoeeituot oreet in oca e ent eec rx puc usn OO OLEI P Pax eE beim AG Odds seccus Eas aUa dn d Od Unc ERES NUS OScde 19 ZEN Willen gr M E 20 22 0 EXPON HCO MIG e MCI TT ICT 22 CALCE XM CR 23 2 2 1 1 P HOCSEUIIS TE A gee ce ec nce eects AT E MM UM Esc CUM rece 23 2 2 12 Logout from access level cc seececcseececceeeecceeeecceseecseueeeceusecseueeecsadeeessueeessageeecsueeeessaeeeeessageeesseeeessegeeeees 24 23 DataDase Men eee suum 25 co Database SC d MORET t 25 PAS EA OY PRENNE TD TEES 25 VACUIS cioe p RINT E T ints 25 23 22 SI qd olio RER 26 URS IOV ACO V MET cavans 27 VS Nacion dio RN c ts inn inate ata ce athe ates amnceaiecteoeettawnied etna seg een selec ig I N 27 ZO eo NOOU TC nee ee ee ee eee 29 ao Eo NEU auus oie E 29 2 9 9 2 Gauge WOFKOFOUD TIBEQsssssexia n kh eria tatu a eEVR EE I P RUS EE fius E ER bs due Ed a REV va RR RR o RRU Del RAE vot o Rr Rd Rut
87. ranged between 0 135 and 99 865 The probability values displayed in this window will be printed in the report of the distribution analysis if the Print values on printed page switch is on 2 6 8 Density function The density function also can be seen severally in the Analysis Density menu item of the Analysis menu The displayed histogram and density function is the same as in the distribution analysis but the picture is rotated with 90 Ed Density Diagram TEST Data 1 Test DB 1 TEST TEST mi xi Mormal I anii 18 8545 18 8870 18 8785 18 8820 20 0045 20 0170 20 0285 20 0420 20 0545 18 8608 19 9733 18 8858 19 9983 20 0108 20 0233 20 0358 20 0483 Distribution is NOT matched Be e uv R alli H ah s O Eel Figure 111 Density function Possible settings and queries are the same as in the distribution analysis see the Distribution analysis 2 6 9 Distribution function The distribution function also can be seen severally in the Analysis Probability menu item of the Analysis menu The displayed linearized distribution function is the same as in the distribution analysis but the picture is rotated with 90 HNS SPC User Manual 85 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Hf Probability Study TEST Data 1 Test DB 1 TEST TEST ml x 33 337 Mu SESS SElag SIS oS aa 35 au 20 TO BO 30 20 O1S5s 3s 13 36 13 37 13 38 13 33 20 00 20 01 20 0
88. selected factory but the Automatic Export service is not enabled on either SPC workstations in the given factory Comment It is enabled the checking of the Automatic Export service Suggestion You should enable the service if it is required HNS SPC User Manual 174 JS MUS TECNICAL DEVELOPMENT C0 LID Reference Automatic exports menu item of the Settings menu 3 2 11 Confirmation of the exit Message ES Exit E xj ATTENTION The program is running one or more automatic SPC services like DataConnect DoC Alert so database changing is not suggested O Services will shut down when you closing this database and there are not other SPC service provider on the network fire you sure exiting the database x ATTENTION The program is running one or more automatic SPC services like DataConnect lot Alert so factory changing is not suggested O Services will shut down when you changing factory and there are not other SPC service provider on the network Are you sure exiting the factory x ATTENTION The program is running one or more automatic SPC services like DataConnect DoC Alert etc so exiting is not suggested D Services will shut down when you exiting the program and there are not other SPC service provider on the network Are you sure exiting the program Exit Figure 250 Warning message Confirmation of the exit Reason Aut
89. serari e E ea eatin Pact pi EE ie a Patan EE E EEE cde E E E AEE a es 148 Figure 212 Warning to an outstanding VAIO Gis scssnncs aeky sana tad vaed saan sects tale van ebotpaadnaas neue atch ced dailies eutheie vali adda RN IUUD LE FU dun tEM x PM E EEEE EE EEEE EUN dM ERE 149 PIQUE 21 3 eon iuc uU UM 149 Figure 214 Displaying the sample data on the control chart s essssssssssissssesiissssise seen n nnne nh nh ss nn rrtt ssa si sien insi sai sisi sinn resa sirena nnn snas 150 Figure 215 Default index minimum VAIO T a 151 Figure 216 MPG settings Input Measuring PEE 151 Figure 217 Warning message in case of OOS measurement uecesesuo taies bepeusascosiiui doe ee EU ae LEX EE Ua Sa REOR LU SUP Re EEoDu ee LR E VeUu Se pepA MG EUPPeesFPUe DAN Poe woe EEUU sees 152 Figure 218 MPG settings Sample data DE 153 Figure 219 MPG s ttings Log Tp m pe i E ea E e a aE a r aa S 154 e EAA AEE EO E EEE E E NE E S 155 Figure 221 Marker data Is r guired m 156 Figure 222 Warning message at changing the process capability study state automatically esses seen 157 Figure 223 Setting of the operator s right and accessing these functio
90. so Hao Xn i e Me Figure 116 Further display modes of the measurements diagram The displayed range of the diagram can be changed by the 48 button according to the specification limits or to the maximum and minimum measured values The status of the measured values can be set on the measurements diagram directly The outstanding status of the highlighted measured value can be set by the xo button but the damaged status by the Map button The outstanding measurements are marked with grey coloured bar and the measured values are grey coloured and are in brackets Damaged values are marked with x sign on the diagram and with damaged text in the measured value field These outstanding and damaged buttons are enabled only for the second and third access level Attention When a status is set it will be saved in the database immediately Interventions and remarks can be entered to the several samples and earlier entered interventions and i remarks can be modified by the I button HNS SPC User Manual 89 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO The product measured parameter and machine data of the selected process are displayed by pressing the e button The measurements diagram can be printed by pressing the button to the printer selected in the Printer menu item of the File menu according to the settings in the Print settings menu item The measurements diagram can be closed by press
91. the view alf switch is on an intervention whereto another parameter is connected can be recorded to a sample of the given process There is displayed an f sign before the name of the intervention on the control chart The meaning of the intervention marked with an f sign another product parameter is connected to this intervention as default Note The intervention marked with an sign is managed by the same way as the interventions without this sign The interventions with marking are displayed after the default interventions of the given process in the drop down list If a sample is appointed whereto an intervention or a comment has been already entered these data will be displayed and can be modified or removed in the Marker Data window An intervention can be deleted by choosing the first none item of the intervention list A comment can be deleted by deleting the text of the comment HNS SPC User Manual 96 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT 0 It is possible to give the intervention s primary cause the measured parameter of failure group which necessitates the intervention after entering the intervention The measured parameter or the failure group can be selected from the list of the measured parameters failure groups inside the given product by pressing the gt gt or the E gt button The earlier given measured parameter or failure group can be removed by pressing the X button
92. the selected events is occurred the program sends an alert to the given e mail addresses The alert settings can be given on the Alerf sheet of the MPG Editor window Header nsnm g Hu A AS A1 A2 Bu E E2 Alert Send alert R s chart 4 Attr chart O Change to keyboard input O Re measuring Base Re attributing OoS measurement LEL under ucL upper RUN lower RUN upper TREND down TREND up Middle Third LEL under ucL upper RUN lower RUN upper TREND down TREND up Middle Thied Data input is aborted Damaged measuring Ff Dropping the data Violated distribution TT Low capability Unacknowledged chart E Intervention E Comment E Log alerts gt Figure 176 MPG alert settings The following events can be selected for alert e events related to the data input e change to keyboard input e damaged measurement e data input is aborted e measured value is out of the specification e re measuring re attributing e exit without saving dropping the data e events related to the control chart displayed in the measuring program e Out of Control case HNS SPC User Manual 126 PANG TELA DEVELOPMENT GO e chart is not acknowledged there is not any acknowledged sample on the last control chart e entering intervention and comment Note The events related to the control chart OoC ca
93. the validation marked with a green or red rectangle It is possible to do the gauge validation also in the Gauge Settings window by pressing the Measure for validation now gt gt button Es Gauge Control HNS Digimatic SMUX 4 USEMUZ 4 Validate gauge measuring specified checking presetting piece Figure 227 Gauge validation HNS SPC User Manual 160 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD EET H Ualue 89 Validate gauge measuring specified checking presetting piece Validate gauge measuring specified checking presetting piece Figure 228 Result of the gauge validation is good not good In case of repeating the gauge validation Re measure the result of the last measurement will be valid The window can be closed after accepting the measurement with the Next gt gt gt button but the result of the measurement can be dropped with the Cancef button If the validation is done before the data input at starting the measuring program or at individual data input in the Data menu the Next gt gt gt button is enabled only if the result of the measurement is good 2 10 11 4 Communication parameter settings of the serial port The communication settings of the serial line gauges include the parameters of the data transmission The setting window can be opened by pressing the Settings button in the Gauge Settings window Protocol Mone C ON OFF
94. u Independent charts for all failures of group Cfailure charts Show next IDs and codes in sample data area user ID Configure your control chart Figure 213 Control chart settings The settings are the following Center line of SPC Control chart is on specification middle The centre line of the SPC chart used in Control mode see the Process settings menu item related to the measured parameters of the Database menu can be the middle of the specification field if this switch is on or the process mean if this switch is off HNS SPC User Manual 149 A MAS TEHICILDEIEUPHENT CO 1 e Control range must be in specification range If the calculated control limits of the SPC chart are outside the specification limits they are equated with the tolerance limits namely the control range cannot be outside the specification range If the process mean is out of the specification range both control limits are equal to the specification limit nearest to the process mean The switch is not taken into account if the control limits are entered manually not calculated e Display capability index for all analysed samples The capability indices for all the samples selected for analysis are also displayed in the grey field on the right side of the chart if this switch is on Otherwise only the capability indices for the current displayed sample range can be seen in the white field on the chart
95. 0 00453 PIN ST 83 oa TS 98600 Pa SUL Sfpesj N UL 1 000 Fe a2 pes 0 400 6 PE 1 06 Comment Figure 114 Capability study report QDAS format Capability study reports can be made also in Hungarian see the Print settings menu item of the File menu 2 6 11 Measurements diagram The measured values of the selected sample range can be displayed in a bar chart in the Analysis Measurements diagram menu item of the Analysis menu Zac Measurements Diagram TEST Data 1 Test DB41 TEST TEST Bj x 20 06 20 05 USL iud 20 040 E d 20 01 e Re 20 00453 bs 19 98 19 97 13 56 13 35 Sample 3154 59 Value ZH H4bi Time 6 9 2606 7 26 a m Hazk 1234 55 intern dune Figure 115 Measurements diagram The diagram contains the measured values of the selected samples Several measured values can be appointed by the cursor The data of the appointed measured value are displayed in the field under the diagram HNS SPC User Manual 68 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD Sample sample number within the sample range measured value number within the sample Value measured value IMDB EE sampling date and time Mask mask ID of the sample Intervention intervention recorded to the sample Remark text comment recorded to the sample
96. 19 995 Ne d NN as Comment 19 995 1 2 3 19 997 El 5 19 999 is Add nro S cose You can list stored measured samples and you can modify them or add new ones Figure 85 Measured samples The data of several samples are displayed by rows in the list that can be found in the window s left top corner as follows HO hosel AAEE the number of the given sample in the process Sample data the calculated statistical parameters of the given sample mean individual value moving mean and range standard deviation moving range moving standard deviation according to the kind of the selected process s chart mask the mask ID entered to the given sample JP 0 PP the acknowledged sample status See the chapter Control chart acknowledgement in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu INL E an intervention entered to the given sample See the chapter Recording a marker in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu Com a comment entered to the given sample See the chapter Recording a marker in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu All the displayed data in the window are always applied to the highlighted sample All these data and statuses can be input modified or deleted in this window except the data which have an extra marking
97. 1PROUDUC T 1F 1T1 m r se File Create MPG for displaying control charts without data inputs Cancel Save MPO file Strategy Attributes A Product Plarsnetee Data input by pieces by samples before measurements after measurements Di A machine Display control charts automatically Open MPG Editor gt gt E head Ci position Workgroup Machine 1F 15 1F 1HO0RKGRDUP 15 16 1F 1H0RKGROUP 1MACHINE 1F 15 1F 1HO0RKGRDUP 15 26 1F 1H0RKGROUP 2MACHINE 1F 15 1F 1HORKGRDUP 15 36 1F 1HO0RKGRDUP 3HRCHINE Select source of pieces Select source of pieces produced bu 0000000000000 by Figure 179 MPG Wizard In this menu item such a measuring program can be created which contains all the measured and attributed parameters of a product All of the measured data input is made by keyboard In the Name field the name of the given measuring program has to be entered A measuring program contains the measured and attributed parameters of only one product hence this product has to be selected from the database in the drop down list in the Product field The data input can be made in this measuring program by Product or Parameter strategy See the meaning of the strategies in the MPG Measuring Program document In the machine list at the bottom of the window the machine s have to be selected whose processes is wanted to occur in the measuring program It is possible to select p
98. 2 20 03 20 04 20 05 20 06 Distribution is NOT matched pee uv R all ah s fill lt Fe ic Figure 112 Distribution function Possible settings and queries are the same as in the distribution analysis see the Distribution analysis 2 6 10 Capability study Results of the capability study machine capability study preliminary process capability study on going process capability study can be displayed in the Analysis Capability study menu item of the Analysis menu The results can be displayed in a report in two formats The report format can be set in the Print settings menu item of the File menu HNS report contains the identifiers and the settings of the selected process range and the analyses results as follows e date and time of the evaluating and the ID of the user who made it e identifier data of the product the measured parameter and the machine e selected time period number of the samples and measured values e distribution type calculated skewness and flatness values e specification limits e statistical data for the good and rejected parts calculated statistical parameters e probability values and capability indices In additional the measured values can be listed in this report by switching on the List measurements on sheet switch in the Print settings menu item of the File menu The report can be printed by pressing the Print button to the printe
99. 7 Increasing the number of the heads positions Interventions related to a machine can be created changed or removed in case of modifying a machine The intervention s buttons are not enabled in case of creating a new machine 2 3 4 2 1 New intervention It is recommended to create and use an intervention list because this makes it possible to analyse the frequency of the intervention and to create an intervention pareto HNS SPC User Manual 33 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO New interventions can be created in the Machine window after selecting the Machine Change menu item of the Database menu by pressing the Add button in the Interventions field An interventions name can be given in two languages recommended in English and in Hungarian Managing of bilingual names is done as usual in the program EA Intervention Data X Name Product dependent Product e Parameter dependent Parameter fs Cancel 2i Failure group dependent e Cancel Set the names of intervention and its dependences Figure 48 New intervention By pressing the amp button next to the Name field the list of previously defined intervention names in the given factory can be listed and an intervention s data can be copied into the fields of this window Interventions can be related to a product or a measured parameter failure group of this product These relations can be
100. 8 Figure 66 Setting the K value for warning limits calculation iecore sas d annor phna deo pin r ear tea e suse dux su tuu kaa ERO E FEL PRERR KY nS dun 0o agoRad ea e EF Eu PENA RH MSS da RE RE tUEe Od pen 49 Figure 07 Basic Qut OF Control S ttiNJS NE Sa 49 Figure 68 Extended Out of Control S UINQS ccicccccccsssecccerstcsieeedssecunseidedsvisnesecessbecussurdsncceudeiecdnedensiateessbonssundsnccsudelecdnrscnenecessbedstunssnecsieedecdneccnenceesstenstens 50 Figure 69 Other Out of Control SONI RENTE o Ceca ao ares ae data ial es resus ie dash nana Soe esa e cd alee te cede E EEEren 51 igure 70 MEASUICO process table sas t sce cacecnsxa5pespaitardonavacadsnetnoebencnboegneninod donecawnnentieiaact a R a a AEA aE EE D ar sear A ENSE Ea 52 Figure 71 Checking the process setting s DOICOSS cccccseseececccnssuesecessanunseeessnnaaseeeeesnaaeeeeeeseaaeneeeeesansaaeeeesnaauaseeessaauaaaeessanaaaaeesessaauaeeessauaaaaesssanaaansees 53 aio Vg TZ a P scRolgo jeter C 54 Figure T3 Fail r group table cT ENS 55 Figure 74 Copying a Faure QUOUD Mm 56 Figure 75 Creating an attributed process by parameter cccccccssseececcnsseesececsansnsseessnauuseeeeesnaaeeeeeseaaueuseeeseasuaaaeesessaa
101. Analysis menu The interventions can be exported into a simple text file or into an Excel file In the setting window the name and path of the text file have to be given By exporting the data into Excel table the decimal point and the date format have to be chosen too according to the operation system After the necessary settings the export can be started by pressing the Export button and can be stopped by pressing the Abort button HNS SPC User Manual 99 S VIN TECNICAL DEVELOPMENT C0 LTD Export Data Selected for Analysis File text Export into Excel table Decimal point 1 234 Date format uyyu mm dd x ser A Boer Configure export mode and export target 8 1 Figure 133 Exporting the interventions of the selected samples Into the given file the process identifiers the several interventions ordered by the sampling time and the following data related to the samples whereto an intervention is recorded will be saved e sampling date and time e name of the intervention e name of the measured parameter which causes the intervention if it is recorded e code of the failure group which causes the intervention if it is recorded e user ID e Shift ID e team ID e tool ID e mask ID e sample mean sample range sample standard deviation and outstanding status Example for the text file with the interventions P Interventions txt Jegyzett mb ioj
102. C V5 5 14 SPC Statistical Process and Quality Control Copyright cC 1995 2668 HNS Technical Development Co Ltd httpz wwuwu HMHS Buar Hu ftpi ftp HMS nuor Hu E mail SPCEHNS Gyor Hu Jan 16 2008 Figure 4 Program data HNS SPC User Manual 2 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Program configuration data of the current release Cv ES Program Configuration Data Database W111 MPG Inbuilt Parser V257 1 1 Gauge Engine 1 62 48 HNS SPC DataConnect U1 11 HNS SPC IDConnect 1 4 Sound Engine U1 H Print Engine 11 9 E mail Engine U1 z Alert Engine u1 5 Heport Engine 11 8 Export Engine Wis eee 1 version of currently used database Figure 5 Program configuration data On Line Help iojxi HNS SPC On line Help HHS SPC Statistical Process and Quality Control Program Show Index Figure 6 On Line Help ell The workplace is assigned for all functions or limited to data input only see the Special program settings E ees Setting the clock of the running HNS SPC application to the SQL server s clock T Status of the Automatic Export AExp engine O Status of the DataConnect DC engine i 1 Status of the Sampling Control SC engine Ed eos Status of the Automatic Alert AE engine de Es Status matrix of the Automatic Alert function can be displayed directly by clicking this status icon after loggin
103. Change and Toolwear processes Control chart settings e Type Can be e SPC Default chart type Control limits are calculated by the process mean and process deviation which is estimated by the range or standard deviation of the samples so the calculated control limits are determined by the the process s quality e Acceptance Control limits are calculated by the specification limits tolerance field is reduced with a given value e Mode Mode of the control chart s usage it can be as follows e Control The control chart s center line is the middle of the tolerance field marked with Xg calculated control limits are simmetric by this center line See also the Center line of SPC Control chart is on specification middle switch in the Control chart menu item of the Settings menu e Monitoring Default control chart mode The monitoring chart s center line is the process mean marked with x calculated control limits are simmetric by this line e Size Number of points displayed on a control chart together e Kind Two statistic parameters are displayed on a control chart of a variables one to monitor the mean and one to monitor the deviation of the measured parameter Control chart can be after the displyed statistic parameters e X R median range chart e X R mean range chart e x Ss mean standard deviation chart e Xi mR individual value moving range chart e X ms individual value mo
104. Data window The interventions in the drop down list are displayed after the following possibilities if the view all switch is off e all the interventions occur in the intervention list of the current machine without dependence e all the interventions occur in the intervention list of the current machine whereto the product displayed on the given control chart is connected but any measured parameter or failure group is not connected e all the interventions occur in the intervention list of the current machine whereto the measured parameter failure group displayed on the given control chart is connected if the view all switch is on e all the interventions occur in the intervention list of the current machine without reference to the dependences Example reference table to the meaning of the dependences if the view all switch is off parameter group Parameter1 Failure gr 1 ParameterX Failure gr X Parameter1 ParameterX T Temperature setting i DE Bl Tool setting roduct1 Param 1 D Material change Producti __ Fallure or Machine seting Produci2 Param2 Shirsat Pro Faure r2 Where El the intervention is displayed in the intervention list the intervention is not displayed in the intervention list P P ERE i If
105. E all 1 Ed Marker Data The intervention caused by measured parameter H gt gt S failure group E x Cancel F k Save this marker data for all samples of the MPG HARNING Process is Out of Control Check and set process making the appropriate intervention Enter marker data to save with sample Figure 221 Marker data is required e Save marker data for all samples If the control chart is displayed after running the measuring program directly the marker data can be saved for all parameters of the given sample If this switch in on this marker extension is always made the Save this marker data for all samples of MPG switch in the Marker Data window is always on e Automatically displayed charts can be selected using process list All the processes occur in the measuring program are listed in the measuring program window in the list of the processes to be displayed as default If this switch is on a process is listed here if automatic chart displaying is set related to it Therefore the operator can display only the control charts and measurements diagram of these processes e Refresh control chart automatically This function means the automatic refreshing of the opened control charts displayed in the measuring program It is recommended to enable this function in case of using a database by more users or in case of automatic data collecting DataConnect If this function is ena
106. ENT GO LTD 3 2 5 There are no samples to analyse Message ATTENTION There are not samples ta analyse The process has not samples in the date range set for analusis Check the date range settings Figure 244 Warning message There are no samples to analyse Reason Any samples were not saved related to the given process during the selected time range Suggestion Select another process or another time range to analyse Reference Date range for analysis menu item of the Analysis menu Analysis menu items of the Analysis menu 3 2 6 Invalid distribution parameter Message Invalid distribution parameters Parameters a and b can not be equal to O andthe Off set value can not be lower or equal to 0 Figure 245 Warning message Invalid distribution parameter Reason Incorrect distribution parameters have been entered Commenrt The parameters of the several distributions have to be given with considering some conditions in view of the given distribution function Suggestion Other parameters have to be given Reference Analysis menu item related to the measured samples of the Analysis menu 3 2 7 Fitting test cannot be performed Message Humber of data less than 10 or more than SO the best fit test can mot be performed Use appropriate test Figur
107. ERREUR 172 3 2 5 There are no samples to analyse esses seen nne nnn sne nnns se nnns na enne nns 173 3 2 6 Invalid distribution parameter llsssessesssssessseeeeene nennen nnnm nnn nnne nnn nsns nnn n nnn nsn na nnn nnn 173 3 2 7 Fitting test cannot be performed ccseeeccccceeseeeeeeeeeeceeccueeeceeeseeseceeeseeueeeeseeaaeeeesseaaeceesssueaasecesseaaeeeeeaas 173 3 2 8 The Sampling Control service is not running eeeeeesssssssssesseeeeeeenennnen nnne nnne nnne nnn nnne nnns 174 3 2 9 The Automatic Alert service is not running ccccccsseeecccceeseeeeccseeeeeeecueaeceeecaeaueeeesaeaeeesssaaeeeseeseaaeseeeeaas 174 3 2 10 The Automatic Export service is not running sseeeesssssessseseeeeee nennen nnnm nnn nnn 174 32 11 Confirmation of the Exit MM 175 ETO ICS SA SS ie E ut con eden ius E Sep essa ec du Dies TED cd risus 176 33 1 SQL database CM Ol ELE T Tr 176 232 Database SOT RR RR 176 Be AU e Ee A r E E E E E E E E E E A N 177 3 3 4 Measuring program error cccccseeccceescecceeseccceueeecseseeeceuseeeseseecsaueeessueeeesaaeceesageessaueeeseueeeeeesaneeessaeeessegeees 177 HNS SPC User Manual 3 PANG TELA DEVELOPMENT GO Figures Figure 1 Waring message in case of multiple INSTANCES cccccsscecececcnneeseeeccnnsaeeecessaauseeeessaaeuseeeeesnaaeeeeeseaaeaeeessaaaaaaee
108. Ec uni HG ccc aes 78 Figure 100 Ir Se ETT 79 Fi g r 101 Filt rnng iS enabled ED 79 Figure 102 Save measured process settings eese eese n nahen nn nnn rss enaa ans s ss rAr asses issus sisi issu sa sais ss sess assis essa ass rr isse sa sa sr sinn EEEE EEEn 80 Figure 103 The ways of saving the measured process settings isses sees eene nennen ns nnnha hh nns ss sar n ness sse rrr Arrr Erran nns ssa rans ssa nones 80 Figure 104 Change specification TOF aialVSEIS acseescs sects deeds ee oe vet ae elect hal resis E UM T ERI CER MR Le RE pNM ID RU UID ILI CLA S RP MRMDMN IL L M LI M s LI DEI LO RS MM QNI dea DA EErEE 81 mi EIU Freguency ARV mr E 81 Figure TOG Histogram settings gta tes wciectissssdase ad eh isu auie lida stents ntveieiiidy nin akesueu ated abe bsaiccbda est adunnncteedaivadsinmcnuuiiatstessadnoonsensisssviedubeauetsdassedsdanniteastaueetadnmsiedsasee dv Abn 82 Fi ure 1907 Bod ieu 63 Figure 108 Distribution SOTTO S eserse ririri ri aAa dax MR Ro dM anand AREARE RE HE ean ha yond inte dea MDC Tuc EERE EEEE EA eR RENE Ru AA EAEEREN EE 83 PIQUE TOD PISO OU ON Qala eR e 84 Figure 110 Signifi
109. MENT CO OOS Lo number of parts under the lower specification limit and their rate compared to the total number of the selected parts DPM Hi number of parts above the upper specification limit in DPM part million DPM Lo number of parts under the lower specification limit in DPM part million DPMtotal number of parts out of the specification limits in DPM part million X Leste grand mean of the selected sample range process mean R S eee mean of the sample ranges or sample standard deviations depending on the kind of the chart Ri CER estimated or empirical standard deviation of the selected sample range depending on the method of the capability index calculation Pp Ppk or Cp Cpk calculated capability indices of the selected sample range according to the process capability study set for the process displaying this data is enabled disabled in the Control chart menu item of the Settings menu 2 6 12 2 Appointing a sample on the control chart The number of the displayed samples on a control chart is not the same as the number of the selected samples as usual It can be selected more samples than the displayed maximum 255 samples If the selected sample range cannot be displayed on a control chart together it will be necessary to turn over the control chart The several samples with
110. MENT CO X Ed Certificate Main and sub title Certificate amp for a product Header extension Inspection certificate 3 1 B DIM EN 1HzH4 amp amp Certified product gt gt 2B PP 22 22 2 Production ID NEN E Serial E Your order ID PO Article E roe o gt B 3da dpC 3 o FE Buyer FP Shipper o E Quantity NEN Production 20881216 H BB BH from 3 FO C 908 1216 paaa H to j PO E Statistical data F aas 1216 H T Critical Comment Signifikant Failures data Normal Subprocess results Head Position Special summary Quality W suitable not suitable using of mask i mgB Create mask list Language Packaging i carton box plastic box E C Hungarian metal box lattice container i English Hide capability indices Date 2008 12 16 Signature Cappointment gt gt Print Cancel Ok Enter data used on certificate and print the certificate PO Figure 162 Certificate settings for product The general identifier data can be given at the top of the window The name of many fields can also be modified these fields are marked with white background e g Production ID Article These names are saved and are offered at the making of the certificate next time The values of the several data have to be written in the fields after the name s fields after the colon
111. MM IL DIM MENTI AMA LIP D ME DD UM he M IT MU DIM DR LEID 105 Figure 143 Information of the appointed sample TR m T 106 Figure 144 Displaying the failure data on the control CHALME cscccccccccnssseeecensannsseeseanunsueeseanaaeeeeesnaaauassesessaaensueessaaaaaeesessaauaseeessaauaaseessanaaueessssnaaantees 107 Figure 145 Displaying the control chart between the control limits eese eese sese sees ese nnne h ness naar esses sese usas eres a sare sa ares nnns 107 Figure 146 Displaying the control chart between the extended control limits seesssssesisssisssssisssesse eese nnn r nnns n sehn nnns nnns 107 Figure 147 Displaying the control chart between the minimum and maximum values sssssssisssssisssssssiss esee n nnns n nsn se nn rns ssa sire n narrans 108 Figure 148 Displaying the center line the control and the warning limits in fix position seessessssssesesesisssseee eene nnns 108 Figure 149 Control chart settings all failures CHArt cccccccccccsseeseeeccnnsseneecennaneseeessaaueseeeeesnaaasueeeeessaaneeeeessaauuaeessanaaaueesessaauasecessaaaaaaeessaaaauaessssnaaannees 109 Figure 150 Control chart settings category chatt e re rtt t eap RE cH Fon wpal doen RR HE ERR Ue ELO sa Y ns da RAUS S Ua Rreuub ocu Ge vaa da Rn eon eae 109 Figure 151 Control chart settings failure chatt m E de nee e EEn 109 Figure 152 Control char
112. NG OON ION NO HNS SPC MPG file rmm XEXEXE XE TENE XE XX XEXE XE XE XE XE QE XE XE XE XE XE XEXE Print HNS SPC MPG Go 9 10 2008 12 13 a m File NONAME Save MPG naHeadTracking T MS M MAID Sito AULT B BSIi15 Bd B2 i0 AMIO ET E2 i05 HONRHE HPG Figure 177 Saving the MPG file The text of the measuring program can be seen in this sheet and it can be printed with the Prinf button In the File field the name of the measuring program file has to be given the required mpg extension is appended to the file name automatically The measuring program is saved into the selected MPG directory see the Select MPG directory menu item of the File menu by pressing the Save MPG button The MPG Editor window can be closed with the Close button If the measuring program has not been saved a warning message is displayed x You did not save modified MPG Do you really want to quit O without saving e e Press button Mo to go back Figure 178 Warning message when closing the measuring program without saving HNS SPC User Manual 127 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT 0 Measuring programs with limited content type of items and settings can be created in a simplified entry window in the Create MPG Wizard menu item of the MPG menu ES Create MPG x Code Hame Drawing number Product 1F 1T l 1F 1PRODUCT jiF 1T a08 Mame 1F
113. NS SPC User Manual 156 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO X Ej setting Back of Process ATTENTION O Process is Out of Control so capability study 5tate must be set back State will be set from On going to Preliminary Figure 222 Warning message at changing the process capability study state automatically It is placed an exclamation mark next to the P Py indices on the control chart if the process has been set into preliminary process capability state automatically e Change control limit settings automatically when capability study changed It is possible to change the control limits together with changing the capability study state automatically If the preliminary process capability study is changed into on going process capability study the actual calculated control limits are fixed Otherwise if the on going process capability study is changed into preliminary process capability study calculated control limits will be set automatically e Appearance mode of OoS values The measured values out of the specification limits can be marked by different ways The measured value is written with red coloured digits 2 28 as default In addition it can be marked with red coloured background yo ao j or with a red status mark i ei B Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy for the measuring programs are running on the given workstation 2 10 10 Opera
114. NS SPC program is able to store the data of more factories in a xBase or SQL database Data from any number of factories can be stored in a database It is recommended to create more individual databases in case of xBase database according to the data access speed Further functions of the program use the data of one given factory which have to be selected in the Select factory menu item of the File menu The name of the menu item changes according to database terminology of the given factory 2 3 2 1 New factory A new factory can be created in the Factory Add menu item of the Database menu Firstly the code of the factory should be given which identifiers the factory in the database so is not allowed to have more factories the same code The name of the factory can be given in two different languages recommended in English and in Hungarian If only one name is given it is automatically copied in the other language s field so the given factory will have one name in both languages x Code x Mame Type or modify code and name Figure 31 Factory data HNS SPC User Manual 25 AAG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO By pressing the button next to the Code field the list of previously defined factories codes can be listed These codes are already in use and cannot be used for defining a new factory EA Reserved IDs Figure 32 Reserved ID s By pressing the Copy button in the
115. PG Editor X Header HS M MYX S MU AAS 81 82 Bu E1 E2 Alert File Assemble and store a measured sample Item n fi T Chart automatically m PSL zi Add x Product mem lt x Remove Parameter TEST 1 Sample Code Name Select i 66 81 _ Horkgroup IET 1F 1 WORKGROUP 2 682 681 _ Machine fis 16 LF 1HORKGROUP 1MACHINE z nmx BBi _ head p position p 4 aa4 001 E HeadTracking function enabled Sample size E HONRHE HPG Figure 169 Editing the S item of the measuring program Items can be created appointed and removed the same way as on the MS M MX sheet It is possible to create a sample to another product not to the product selected on the Header sheet with the button which can be found next to the Add button The product has been already selected can be change with the button In the fields under the Sample legend the coordinates of the measured values can be entered The references of the measured values entered in the M MS and MX items can be given by typing the number of the item and the number of the measured value within the item for example 001 002 means the second measured value of the first M MS MX item Naturally the number of the item cannot be bigger than the total number of the V MS MX items and the number of the measured value cannot be bigger than the sample size related to the given item
116. Reserved IDs window the data of the selected factory in this case the factory names can be copied into the appropriate fields of the new factory entry window This simplifies the entry of a new factory This function can be found in the entry window of all new database items and is most useful where entering a new database element means typing in more data and the database items on a given level show only slight variations Attention When a new factory is created the program asks automatically the name of the database items wanted to use in the given factory see the Database terminology menu item of the Settings menu and the password settings related to the given factory see the Password menu item of the Settings menu In the Database terminology window is offered the database terminology of the factory which was selected before the creating the new factory or the default names if there was any selected factory When a new factory is created the program selects it automatically as actual factory The type code and name of actual factory can be seen in the left under corner of the main window IxBase C 0 Factory C Figure 33 Actual selected factory 2 3 2 2 Change factory data The data of a factory can be changed in the Factory Change menu item of the Database menu Firstly the factory to be changed has to be selected in the Factory window as follows x n BB Name Selected the
117. The items are not created singly so it is possible that the number of the selected processes is bigger than the maximum number of the processes in one measuring program In this case the program informs HNS SPC User Manual 128 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO the user in a warning message that the created measuring program will not contain all of the selected processes Comment In one measuring program maximum 64 pieces of MS items and MV items and 32 pieces of AS items A17A2 items and AV items can be added ATTENTION ATTENT I OH Humber of selected processes is to much the MPG can mot contain all selected processes Limited number of processes will be contained in thiz MPG Figure 180 Warning message about the exceeding the maximum number of selected process 2 3 Modifying the measuring program The first step is the selecting of the measuring program which is wanted to modify When opening the Modify menu item of the MPG menu the Select MPG window is displayed MPG name Product 1F 4T 3 Machine 12 code aF 1T HHS SPC MPG S RraPR uCcT Measurement of the 1F 1T product description HESTPBODENSE Measurement of the 1F ZT HZ product dr aw num fiF 1T 888 Strategy Al Product List of the measuring Comment programs can be selected Set the gauge before measurement Selecting the highlighted measuring program Informat
118. U DE ue iu ec aA EL MM NEM MR C MER LM EM EM NA d RU EN MEE 92 Figure 122 Data of the whole selected Sample FaritgBesesscoa oa oidn tear Feu Re dueP usto Faboa Sa ddp paupe npe vds f daxRu a bn sa Rd edp rx Re diac decia apnd sa c pon P edP EM sS deni PabnE s dUdqdcs 92 Figure 123 Displaying the measured values on the control chart sssssssissssissssesiissssss esee nnne nnns sna sh seen rns ss aa sisi enirn sss na sies enin resa nsns nens nna 94 Figure 124 Displaying the X X Xi mx diagram between the control IIIS caes ooa ie trat ceti e pint bles oe e P DUO LE epe ads 94 Figure 125 Displaying the X x x mx diagram between the specification limits essent ntn 95 Figure 126 Displaying the X X x mx diagram between the maximum and minimum values s ttt 95 Figure 127 Displaying the center line the specification the control and the warning limits in fix position sess 95 gis PI 128 Markor data ee T ge mcer 96 Figure 129 COMMON e SOUS PPRRRRTE P 97 Figure 1 302 uPEco erEr MEE 98 Figure 131 Intervention pareto analysis ciccsessunsesbseedsdsucsnnadsacendsenissahsdeaseha RE NE AK MEE AEKKKRAP KK YER EEXKERERKRK RUE FEREKEEE Rn rbnk ape rb Adr pau KRERREA CE d RRR ERA KE ERR ANAK RT EFE RRNA 99 Figure 132 Exporting the measuerd values of the selected samples sss essen ns na rh
119. a the sample size N of the given sample and the number of the rejected parts np the rate of the rejected parts p the number of the failures c the rate of the failures u according to the selected process s chart type The rejected samples are grey coloured Date sampling date and time as default The sample data displayed in this column can be selected in the drop down list in the header User ID shift ID team ID tool ID or mask ID can be displayed instead of the sampling time NOR ient the acknowledged sample status see the Analysis Control chart menu item SEP ie ene a sign in this column means the changing of a process setting A sample range with different process settings cannot be selected only samples with the same settings can be analysed together The sample data of the highlighted sample can be seen above the list and the major process settings which were valid during the sampling can be seen on the right side of the window The selection of the samples to be analysed have to be done by the same way as in case of measured samples see the description about the Select measured samples menu item 2 6 19 Save process settings attributed process The settings changed during the analysis of the selected sample range can be saved in the database on the third access level The control chart settings can be m
120. a product for changing saos o erts Rite neat p bra th exa acu Ak ence deeds Rea bh xx ax p Gu ERN exe ical gu bre BEY URMER V BOUU REY xFa VENE EEEE AEAEE EEEren 38 Figure 56 Product table ciate ec Uu uU c 39 PIQUE O1 CODVINO 81101810 E v 39 Figure 58 Measuered parameter data eise e eee eiii i sea ease ka a aa ak aa Ra ERR R ER ARRRRAA SERE RRRENRRRAANRRRRRSMRRRANARERERRRNRRRORENKAREARRRER RSEN REBEAERRARR NR EAM RRKROA MAKE RRARARARAR A Ku Rua 40 Figure 59 List of measured parameters Names xu rp ses sche ae RIVE SU FREE es deka ween ences x FFEEEPE ARI NU E cie NU HEN SEP aed MEUS Rus cdd ee E HERI EFL ees 41 Figure 60 Measured parameter table ETT o o TU 43 Figure 61 Copying a measured parameter P m 43 Figure 62 Creating a measured process by parameter sisse esee sena snu ann n rss nuaa sin esssssssa asses issu ass sisi EE sa sanis sss aa sans rris sa sans rris naa nnns 44 Figure 63 Selecting processes and sub processes to be created sessi essen enses nnne ss nn aa nn nnns essa rr ns snas sar EErEE EErEE EErEE erreen 45 Figure 64 Measured DIOCESS S SCHINGS BERE m u 46 Figure 65 Special settings of Tool Change and Toolwear processes ssccccccsseesececennuneeeecennauueeecessaaunseeeseasaaeeesessaaueseeessaauasseessaauaueeessssaaasssessaaunsseeses 4
121. aP M EUM EE EDS 42 2 3 0 4 Measured parameter table 43 rales A Measured 9118 9 TS NND ENTE koiaa E 44 2 3 7 1 Measured process by parameter issssiiisseeissesese seas eene nua n ka aa RR RR RR R RR AR RR REN RR ARN RAN NR RIA RR DA RETE NR EARN RA Aa Ra aa dada 2a 44 2 9 7 2 Measured process DV DIOQUDI i e meten tttteta ttt tir E on aea eto s ERROR Ta S aaa rat EEEE EEEE EE EEEREN EENE EEEE RM RO RUE 45 2 3 8 Process settings for measured processes cccceeecccseeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeeessaeeeessueeeeseeeeesseeeeeesaeeeeeas 45 Dp UI 45 29 02 MECGSUICO DIOCESS VAIS a Ee 52 2 303 Ghecking the process seling S DOGOS cesetini or aE VIX TRE RAE D2RuREME S O IEE REE RU RRE RE a REDE 53 2 3 9 Attributed parameter failure group esssssesseeseseeee nennen nennen nennen nnn nnn enirn nnns nna nnn nnn 59 PAROI TAI IEoo soe c 53 Loud CHARGES Tale QlOUD Ole m 54 2393 IIo ES TAI QUOD E 55 PRAS E a Oe lOO 1a Ole T i N 55 2 3 10 Attributed process EM 56 2 3 10 1 Attributed process by DaramelQF L1 erret rr era tat eno ves Fr rtu s Exe aeu Fu agr e ek k ax pus Umka d o
122. actory and the information related to the given workstation Ef Programs and Users E X 47 gt NZPA H HH U 5 51HI0ct 15 z667 lt gt ORACLE A AA UsS 51BHID0ct 15 2667 DC AE lt SC gt lt AExp gt bk VE n HBH VW5 5 1800ct 15 zBB71 Running SPC programs and logged in users 1 Refresh Figure 238 Programs and users The data in the window are the following in order e UserID The identifier of the user who has logged in into the given program copy If there has not been given any user ID a lt gt question mark is displayed in this field e Identifier of the workstation computer e Version number date of release of the HNS SPC program e Automatic services The automatic services which are running of the given workstation DC DataConnection AE automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert AlertEngine SC sampling control AExp automatic export 2 12 2 About See the chapter Using the program 2 12 3 Configuration The public configuration data of the current version x Database W112 Uti2 MPG Built in Parser W274 UL 2 Gauge Engine U1 54 1 HNS SPC DataConnect W112 HNS SPC IDConnect c p io C Print Engine c n El E mail Engine c an m SUL Alert Engine riam in PSI i Report Engine Export Engine c e Sample Control Engine X version of currently used database Figure 239 Program configurat
123. alculated with the estimated standard deviation 6 Otherwise the process capability indices are calculated by the Ford standard namely the preliminary Pp Pox and the on going Cp Cy capability indices are also calculated with the estimated standard deviation Number of decimals for calculated values like measurements 4 It can be set the resolution of the calculated parameters compared to the number of decimals defined for the given measured parameter O is given in this field the resolution of the calculated parameters is the same as the number of decimals of the given measured parameter 2 is the default value which means that the calculated parameters have two further decimals compared to the measured values This setting is valid only for the displaying of the calculated values it has no influence for the accuracy of the calculations The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy 2 10 7 Control chart settings The control chart settings can be given and modified in the Control chart menu item of the Settings menu Ed Control Chart Settings X i Center line of SPC Control chart is on specification middle Control range must be in specification range Display capability index for all analysed samples W Display statistical data C Display DPM data pcs Cancel Use Z index not the capability indexes nm CL s by samples when sample size is changing charts p
124. alerts The Automatic alerts menu item of the Settings menu contains the settings related to the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert service See a description about this function and about this menu item in the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert document Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy 2 10 17 Sampling control The Sampling control menu item of the Settings menu contains the settings related to the Sampling control service See a description about this function and about this menu item in the Sampling control document Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy 2 10 18 Automatic exports The Automatic exports menu item of the Settings menu contains the settings related to the Automatic export service See a description about this function and about this menu item in the Automatic export document HNS SPC User Manual 166 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD The Automatic export function is not enabled in case of xBase database so this menu item is not enabled Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy 2 10 19 Reset window positions and sizes The earlier modified window sizes and positions can be deleted with the Reset window positions and sizes menu item of the Settings menu The settings o
125. ally If this measuring program is wanted to run by given operators the user IDs of these operators has to be listed in the Dedicate to field The measuring programs without appointed operators are available for every operator If an operator on the 1 access level logs in to the program and gives his her user ID only the measuring programs are dedicated to him her and the measuring programs without appointed operator are displayed in the MPG selection window whereby the MPG selection can be eased The Last used field is filled in and upgraded automatically The ID and name of the user who creates the measuring program are entered into the Created by field automatically if they have been given at the login otherwise they can be typed by the user At the bottom of the window the MPG file name and the describing part of the control section of the measuring program are displayed Attention It is obligatory to give the name of the measuring program the mpg file cannot be saved without giving the name The measuring program can be edited only after selecting a product Measurements can be prescribed namely the MS M MX items can be created modified or removed on the MS M MX sheet of the MPG Editor Ed MPG Editor E X Header HS H Hx Ss HL AS Al AZ Al Ei E2 Alert File Heasure these parameters and store measurements Item z d ii Executing order aft Gauge name selection Add
126. am By clicking the Start Log in button a window for user identification will be displayed Here will be requested the ID name and password of the user according to current password system When using common passwords the program only verifies the password and chooses the access level by the password without reference to the user User name and ID can be requested according to other settings optional or obligatory aioi Password R User ID Hame Factory gt gt 7 n BB Factory A Figure 8 Logging in with simple common password When using personal password the user is identified by the given user ID and only that user s password is accepted Access level is selected by the user registration list ox User D Tee o Password po f User ID gt gt 071 h BB Factory A Figure 9 Logging in with personal password Note It is recommended to use the personal passwords in case of normal using of databases because they provide greater security and easier user identification When password protection is disabled user is always logged in onto the highest access level without password Note This mode should be used carefully It is recommended to use this mode only with standalone not on a network xBase databases for example while building the database HNS SPC User Manual 4 JS UG TECNICAL DEVELOPMENT CO LTD 15 x ES HNS SPC Password Password mm R User ID
127. am Measurements diagram of the measured values within the measured samples selected for analysis Control chart Control chart of the measured samples selected for analysis calculated results related to displayed sample range and to the complete selected sample range and automatic OoC analysis Intervention pareto Pareto analysis by interventions related to the measured samples selected for analysis Export Measurements Exporting the measured values within the measured samples selected for analysis into text file or Excel file Interventions Exporting the interventions of the measured samples selected for analysis into text file or Excel file Reset selection Deleting the selection of the measured samples selected for analysis Capability index diagram Displaying capability indices calculated for defined time intervals related to a selected period Select attributed samples Selecting the range of the attributed samples wanted to analyse Save process settings Saving the process settings modified during the analysis of the attributed samples in the database Analysis Control chart Control chart of the attributed samples selected for analysis with automatic OoC analysis Pareto diagram Pareto analysis by failure occurrences related to attributed samples selected for analysis Intervention pareto Pareto analysis by interventions related to attributed samples selected for analysis Export Samples data
128. am with diagram sssssissssssisssessisssssi esee n hn hh enhn rns s saa sh sse n rnr snas n sss n nnn snas 134 Figure 191 Attributed data input DY pieces P 134 Figure 192 Summarized attributed data input by samples sessi sees nene nahen nhanh nn nsn ss sa inh sess sn aisi sess ssaa rtrt sess sara sns sensn rnnr reren ases 135 Fig re 193 Enty Of TIN OY lD acta nace E E AREE alate E E E E E E 135 Figure 194 Aborting the measuring DIOOFEBELUL asapeus see nies aud qeu RA OE Ru S CIE pad tine rar Rara ev RR Edad ainsi cd xa se Miopatna ARRA LUPA UR C GaU eX ADU E CO dU da du ME e 136 Figure 195 Starting the measurement in case Of Device strategy sssecccccssseesececsnnsseeecennaaeeecessnaausesesssaauauaeeessnaaaaeesessaauasscessaaaaseeessaaaaaeesessssaaaages 136 Figure 196 Displaying the gauge error in case of Device strategy sisse seen ss nna nh nnns seii arn n sins aa ar nnns na ann nenne aas 137 Figure 197 Warning message outstanding value is detected sessi sese esses nennen enhn s sna hes sn assesses h re sha sies nasa rese asesor nnns ns 137 Figure 198 Closing the data input in the measuring program sssisssssssessissssssee enne nena nnns nsns sa ainsi siena siis s sessi sain sies sara sss sans ann rns n aa sn nnns 137 Figure 199 Buttons in the measuring program WINCOW cccccccn
129. ameter and manufacturing equipments Figure 75 Creating an attributed process by parameter On the topside of the Process List Configuration window the identifiers of the selected product and failure group are displayed and the data of the highlighted machine on the right side In the Process HNS SPC User Manual 56 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO and subprocess to keep field are displayed the items machine head position whereby processes and sub processes are created related to the highlighted machine Creating a new measured process can be done with the Add button in this window After pressing this button the windows for selecting the workgroup and the machine appear After selecting the machine it has to be selected what processes and sub processes are wanted to create It is possible to create sub processes only by multihead multiposition machines see the Machine menu item of the Database menu x Process and subprocesses to keep W Machine Head Position Distinguished main and subprocesses Figure 76 Selecting processes and sub processes to be created After selecting the processes to be stored the process settings have to be given See the process settings in the Process settings Change menu item related to failure group of the Database menu If more database items machine head position are related with the given failure group
130. ange that can be seen on the screen 2 6 12 1 Meaning of the data on the control chart OoC Out of Control cases are displayed automatically in red colour and other nonconformities distribution is not matched number of rejected parts etc are also displayed in red The signs in the field between the two diagrams mark the interventions the comments the acknowledgement of the chart the alerted samples and acknowledged alerts See the meaning of the last two signs in the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert document Alerted sample acknowledged Chart acknowledgement LELI Alerted sample not acknowledged m oO Figure 118 Sings on the control chart Under the down diagram the information of the displayed sample range can be seen the number and the sampling date and time of the first and last sample 0 0037 CENE RU ER BNET TEST Ue crc LCL 6 9 2008 Fiz a m i 5 3 20 08 7 29 a m laa Ho r3 a Date 6 93 2008 Firs a m x 130 0330 Process is stable Figure 119 Information of the displayed sample range Several samples on the control chart can be appointed by the cursor In the left bottom corner of the control chart the data of the appointed sample are displayed NOn number of the sample inside the selected sample range Dale te sampling date and time DT geen ee ID of the user who has input the sample X Xx x mx sample mean median moving mean or individual value
131. ange the shift ID field which is filled in automatically if the Operator can not change the automatically filled shift code switch is on Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy 2 10 6 Calculation settings The settings related to the calculations can be given and modified in the Calculations menu item of the Settings menu HNS SPC User Manual 147 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Outstanding Value Ed Calculation Settings Histogram Classes Auto detection enabled Confidence level az5 x i Search for optimal settings Set value status automatically L Histogram by specification default for first appearance Auto detection enabled 5 Heibull Rauleigh Calculation use M L method C use Regression Analysis Confidence level psa A v Capability index calculations by GS9 standard Outstanding Sample Number of decimals for calculated values like measurements 2 a Select your settings to configure program calculations Figure 211 Calculation settings The settings are the following Histogram The number of classes the class width and the lower limit values of the histogram are specified automatically after the number of the measured values to be displayed The calculation of the number of classes can be selected out of the following methods where n is the number of the measured values to be displaye
132. as the summarized relative frequency values related to the histogram s classes Note Absolute frequency the number of the measured values within a class summarized absolute frequency the total number of the measured values within the current and the under classes Summarized absolute frequency of the last class is equal to the number of the analysed measured values Summarized relative frequency summarized absolute frequency values divided with the total number of the analysed measured values in percent The summarized relative frequency of the last class is 100 Ed Frequency Diagram TEST Data 1 Test DBZ1 TEST TEST mi x 20 0608 20 0423 i nm Absolute icis g f L 20 0358 20 0235 20 0233 20 0170 20 0108 20 0045 requency TES STM nee absolute E frequency m Du es sre EN Summarized relative frequency Figure 105 Frequency analysis The frequency analysis can be printed by pressing the Prinf button to the printer selected in the Printer menu item of the File menu according to the settings in the Print settings menu item Identifier data of the displayed process can be seen by pressing the Info button HNS SPC User Manual 81 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Before displaying the frequency analysis for the first time the ideal settings of the histogram are calculated automatically see Calculations menu item of the Settings menu T
133. ase Copying the definition structure or the whole content of a selected xBase database to the actual SQL database This function is enabled only in SQL database e Archiving Copying the content of the actual database into an xBase database e Export IDConnect Export into a text file the factory machine and product identifiers of the actual database e Printer Selecting the printer e Print settings Some settings related to the content and format of the reports generated by the program e Logout from access level Logging out from the highest access level program returns to the log in window HNS SPC User Manual 9 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Database e Factory e Add Creating a new factory e Change Modifying the data of a factory e Remove Deleting a factory from the database e Table Displaying the data of the factories in a table Here can be created modified copied or deleted a factory e Workgroup e Add Creating a new workgroup e Change Modifying the data of a workgroup e Remove Deleting a workgroup from the database e Table Displaying the data of the workgroups in a table Here can be created modified copied or deleted a workgroup e Machine e Add Creating a new machine e Change Modifying the data of a machine e Remove Deleting a machine from the database e Table Displaying the data of the machines in a table Here can be created modified copied or deleted a ma
134. atic SHUX 4 USBNUX 4 Channel PcL z115 CHN 8 C 228h C 32Bh C CHN 1 C 248h C 34Bh gt gt CHH 2 C 266h 366h C CHH 3 CHN p RS232C cori HNS Extender gt gt gt gt 41 28 42 x3 43 DOT 4 A D External Data Button DI Bits Vel A elo se sel dol aol Ett 4 1 2 3 5 Settings 4 TP Test Cancel ba d v Sound Controlled gauge gt gt Select gauge and configure the gauge connection Figure 225 Gauge settings The gauge to be set or used can be selected in the drop down list in the Gauge field which contains the gauges supported by the HNS SPC program The gauge selection can be simplified if the gauges installed at the given measuring workstation are enabled in the Gauges List menu item of the Settings menu In this case only the enabled gauges are displayed in this gauge selection list HNS SPC User Manual 158 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD Several interfaces can be used for connecting the gauges which have electronic output to the computer The gauges can be connected to a serial port of the computer or the signal given by the gauge can be received using A D card inserted in the computer The interface is always selected according to the gauge to be used only the fields of the interface are enabled which is used by this gauge In case of a gauge with serial data output the appropriate RS232C port but
135. auge can be checked with the Tesf button a test measurement measured value read out can be done Attention When installing a measuring workstation the gauges to be used on it are usually known When the program and the gauges have been installed and possibly the gauges have been re calibrated the required settings have to be done in order to use the gauges from the program directly It is possible to require sound when the program successfully reads out a gauge Switching on the sound means delay as well because the measured value is displayed in the measurement window and the measurement window is not closed immediately when reading the measured value out but only after the delayed displaying of the measured value The measured values given by the gauge can be converted see the Create menu item of the MPG menu The individual measurements can also be converted not only the measured values collected in the measuring program The conversion function used by the individual measurements and the constant values can be given in the window displayed after pressing the Conversion button Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy 2 10 11 3 Gauge control It is possible to control the continuous validation of the several gauges The elements of this function are the following the specifications have to be given related to the gauge validation the validity of the g
136. auge validation is monitored the program gets the user to make the validation related to the gauges of which validity is overdue The validity of the previous validation is controlled before each data input measuring program individual measurements related to the gauges to be used If the validity has already run out the data input is enabled after an accepted re validation Note This function is enabled only in case of the HNS Digimatic SMUX 2 the HNS Digimatic SMUX 4 USBMUX 4 the HNS Digimatic SMUX 10 USBMUX 10 and the OPTO RS232 Duplex gauges Firstly the Controlled gauge switch has to be on for using the gauge control function In this case the window is get larger where the further settings can be done related to the gauge control function HNS SPC User Manual 159 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Conversion i Controlled gauge gt gt Ok Period of validity h i Last validation Borders of validity Danae 18 7 2088 6 6 a m UL te gg gt gt Valid until LL 18 99 _ validati lw Invalidate gauge status on changing logged in user W Log validation measurements Select gauge and configure the gauge connection Figure 226 Gauge control settings e Period of validity in hours between 0 and 168 hours Note If the period of validity is O the validation is valid until the next gauge checking gauge is connected gauge is switched on validation is valid is done This
137. be queried as a text list by pressing the Data list button This list contains the important process identifiers and settings as well as the calculated values A list with more pages can be turned over by the Down and Up buttons This list can be also printed or saved by the Print and the Save buttons HNS SPC User Manual 102 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD Ef Capability Data B x Factorw LF Factory code 1F Workgroup 1F 1WOREGROUP code 1F 15 Machine 1F 1WUOREGROUF 1MACHIHE code 15 1G Product LF 1LPRODUCT code 1iF 1T draw n 1F 1T Parameter TEST 1 mm Normal Date 9 1 2008 11 36 a m Analysed by 9 22 1995 9 28 1995 On going Process Capability Specification 20 000 0 040 40 040 Bilateral Sample size ink b Measurementz S00 Grand average 8ga 20 00453 Sigma 0 00869 Distribution test Distribution is HOT matched Control chart SPC xbar z Monitoring Control limitzg Calculated rM 1 50 EB uve bee on ira eee 1 33 6 13 2008 6 19 2008 On going Process Capability Specification 20 000 0 040 4 0 040 Bilateral Sample size inb 5 m ef Down Up Close Print ii Save B Figure 138 List of the capability data 2 6 18 Select attributed samples Attributed samp
138. bled the data of the opened control charts is monitored and in case of changing data input removing or modifying a sample the opened control chart is refreshed Note In case of automatic data collecting the control charts can be displayed in the measuring program by MV and AV items see the Create menu item of the MPG menu and on line control chart displaying can be made with the automatic control chart refreshing together e Change process capability study state automatically use CFGM calculation This switch is active only if the Capability index calculations by QS9000 standard switch in the Calculations menu item of the Settings menu is on The process capability study state can be monitored and changed automatically in the course of the data collecting in the measuring programs In case of preliminary process capability study if the process is stable and meets the capability index requirements during a time of one chart at least the process will be set into on going process capability study automatically Otherwise in case of on going process capability study if the process is out of control during a time of one chart at least the process will be set into preliminary process capability study automatically The type of the calculated process capability indices P5 Py or Cp Cy are also changed with the settings together A warning message is displayed if the capability study state is changed H
139. bution settings The distribution settings can be modified in the Distribution Settings window during the distribution analysis The meaning of the distribution settings is the same as in the measured process settings see the Process settings Change menu item related to the measured processes of the Database menu The density parameter values can be re estimated by the program after the actual selected samples by pressing the EstimationT or Estimation2 button New density parameters will be written into the given entry fields automatically Estimation 1 Estimation of the density parameters by using the off set value The set off parameter of the distribution is set to the given off set value and the further distribution parameters are calculated according to this Estimation Z EH Estimation of the density parameters without changing the set off value dH Original density parameter values stored in the database can be set back by pressing this button When the settings are modified after pressing the OK button the program calculates the distribution with the new settings and displays the diagrams The calculated results of the displayed distribution analysis HNS SPC User Manual 83 2 INS TENA DEVELOPMENT CO MEJ can be seen by pressing the Ey R button The calculated results are displayed in the Distribution Data window after pressing this button H Distribution Data p x
140. button related to all tests When closing the window by pressing the Ok button the program checks the set values logically in case of an inconsenticy go back to the incorrect field e OoC H s By pressing this button Out of Control conditons can be set related tho the range standard deviation moving range moving standard deviation diagram of the control chart These tests and settings are the same as in case of the upper diagram of the control chart The only difference is that the Detect on critical control chart side only button always is active In case of enabling this switch only the Out of Control cases are monitored that are dangerous related to the upper control limit e Important process enable on line watching and alerting The given process can be selected to monitore by the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert service e Alert settings gt gt After switching on the Important porcess switch the alert conditions can be set in the displayed window by pressing this button See a detailed description about the Automatic Alert service in the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert document e Sampling control enabled The given process can be selected to monitore by the Sampling Control service HNS SPC User Manual 51 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD After switching on the Sampling control switch the sampling frequency can be set in the displayed window by p
141. cant probabilty points data of Weibull and Rayleigh OiStriDUtion sees sss eese eene nnns nhanh nnns nenas nnns 85 Figare A Density PRG IOI eee erp tenia ete scent en a senile en eae eae nee nee 85 Figure 112 Distribution TUNIC m 86 Figure 113 Capability study report HNS TOFITIGL sedes utet ee En Ret deo Ohi eost uu bach Uta iideseceud Rd een sade noted acu ME cule eatin ads Leek C MED MM dM epi tales 87 Figure 114 Capability study repo RESI I PM E 88 Figure 115 Measurements QIlAGQIAIN TRITT mm 88 Figure 116 Further display modes of the measurements CIAGIAIN csscececcccnseeseeccenaueeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaeeseeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeaaaeaeeeeeeaaaeeeeessaaaaseesessaaaeeesssaaenneeeees 89 Figure 117 Control eate tei ecole zii RET TT m 90 Figure 110 Sins on the control egi ge T me 91 Figure 119 Information of the displayed sample LANGE ccccccccnceeeeececeaneeeeeeeeaneeseeeee seen eeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeaaaaseeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeaaaaeeeesaaaaaeeesesaaaeesessesaaenneeeees 91 Figure 120 Information of the appointed sample sees sessi nhanh nnne nnna nan r rss esu sisi siis sesa isses essa AAEE isse sa sies sess sarei rris sa sans r nissan ann s 91 Figure 121 Data of the displayed sample fFarig8 i uuo RA EE M usec TU be d beo b ur RASEN Rx N
142. cation limit values have to be given HNS SPC User Manual 41 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD Attention In case of bilateral tolerances the upper and lower difference have to be given with the right positive or negative sign because it cannot mean the upper difference and the lower difference value automatically it can be that the nominal value is not between the specification limits Accordingly the calculation of the specification limits as follows upper specification limit nominal value upper difference lower specification limit nominal value lower difference e MINFO OoC data By switching on this switch the forwarding of the Out of Control data related to the given parameter is enabled to the MINFO system See also the MINFO OoC DataConnection menu item of the Settings menu e CIQ Labbeling the measured parameters by the weight of their influence on the end product It is recommended to take the mesured parameters of a product into the SPC system by their CTQ label This labelling can be used as a filter for example creating certificate or reports The CTQ s names can be changed see the Database terminology menu item in the Settings menu e Index minimum Expected minimum of the capability index values Cm Cmk Pp Ppk Cp Cpk and Zgoal related to the given measured parameter The real calculated values are compared to these minimums and the calculated indices a
143. cess what is a connection between a failure group and a machine e Process settings e Change Modifying the settings of an attributed process e Table Displaying the data of the attributed processes in a table Here can be created or deleted an attributed process and modified the process settings e Check Checking the setting limits of an attributed process removing unnecessary setting limits e Sampling Control Events defining the list of sampling control events connected with sampling control function According to the configured database terminology Data e Measured samples Listing and modifying the measured samples stored in the database input a new sample e Delete samples Removing measured samples from the database e Export Exporting measured samples into text file ASCII file or Excel file e Import Importing measured samples from text file e Attributed samples Listing and modifying the attributed samples stored in the database input a new sample e Delete samples Removing attributed samples from the database e Export Exporting measured samples into text file ASCII file or Excel file e Import Importing measured samples from text file e Delete samples by date Removing all measured and attributed samples recorded in a given time period This function is enabled only in SQL database e Sampling Control e Status Displaying the status matrix connected with the Sampling control func
144. checks the client s clock in the specified time intervals and adjusts it if necessary The frequency of the time adjusting can be given also in second if necessary by a Registry setting see the Special program settings It has to be taken into account that the time checking and adjustment involves network traffic hence the number of the computers and the importance of this function has to be considered before specifying this time interval It is recommended to set 1 minute as default This time adjustment function can be used only in case of SQL database Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy 2 10 3 Database terminology Different special database terminology designation system which is special and used only within the given factory can be defined for the several factories in the database in the Database terminology menu item of the Settings menu x Factory lm Factory Product Term k Product Horkgroup G psor Morkgroup field 5 Anyag Material Hachine b Machine field 6 y Heint head Megtog lead field 7 NENNEN position Poz ci Position n tool Szersz m Tool Default Shift MGszak 0 Shift CTO measured parameters TET Pau Team LLL loritical Kritikus Critical Hor Masek Mask z D de Szignifikans Significant 3 normal Normal Normal User ID pets
145. ched are displayed in the left bottom corner of the Distribution Diagram window H Distribution Diagram TEST Data 1 Test DB 1 TEST TEST Bl xl z0 060S Normal 20 0545 4 20 0463 20 0420 20 0258 USL 20 0295 20 03 20 02 20 01 08 p 20 01 20 00 15 9920 13 3858 13 3735 S 13 38 13 3733 15 5670 195 5608 13 3545 13 33 13 37 123 0 003 1 10 30 83 8397 D 1 5 r0 50 8 J Distribution is NOT matched HA B iv R i H ah s amp 3 E Figure 107 Distribution analysis Histogram settings can be changed by pressing the gii H button see the Frequency analysis The identifiers and the data of the displayed process can be get by pressing the e button The distribution analysis can be printed by pressing the c button to the printer selected in the Printer menu item of the File menu according to the settings in the Print settings menu item The following Distribution Settings window is displayed by pressing the ah S button Ed Distribution Settings X Distribution type normal Test method Khi square Johnson transformation Confidence level a a x 20 00453 le aa8e9 Uff set a aaaae0 Estimation 1 Estimation Z Cancel lo Select distribution type and test method set parameters gn Figure 108 Distribution settings The density and the linearized distribution function are displayed according to the earlier set distri
146. chine e Product e Add Creating a new product e Change Modifying the data of a product e Remove Deleting a product from the database e Table Displaying the data of the products in a table Here can be created modified copied or deleted a product e Measured parameter e Add Creating a new measured parameter e Change Modifying the data of a measured parameter e Remove Deleting a measured parameter from the database e Table Displaying the data of the measured parameters in a table Here can be created modified copied or deleted a measured parameter e Measured process Creating or deleting a measured process what is a connection between a measured parameter and a machine e Process settings e Change Modifying the settings of a measured process e Table Displaying the data of the measured processes in a table Here can be created and deleted a measured process and modified the process settings e Check Checking the setting limits of a measured process removing unnecessary setting limits e Failure group e Add Creating a new failure group e Change Modifying the data of a failure group HNS SPC User Manual 10 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO e Remove Deleting a failure group from the database e Table Displaying the data of the failure groups in a table Here can be created modified copied or deleted a failure group e Attributed process Creating or deleting an attributed pro
147. control enabled Control settings 7 Automatic export File TEST_Adat 1 teszt DB1 _TEST_TEST DAT Export from 2808 86 09 A728 Off set Test Khi square Lonfidence 35 87 Process Enter or change the measured process settings Figure 64 Measured process s settings In the window s header can be seen whether the settings in this window are related to machine to all head or to all position according to the previous process selection Attention The changes of the process settings and the modification time are stored so the new settings are applied to the samples that are entered after the changing See the applying of the settings to previous samples in the Save process settings menu item related to measured samples menu item of the Analysis menu Process settings are the following e Capability state Capability study type that can be e machine capability study calculated indices Cm Cmk there is no sampling every produced parts have to be taken in a time range gt gt gt there is no control chart gt gt gt sample size cannot be defined number of pieces have to be given in the measuring program e preliminary process capability study calculated indices Pp Pox e on going process capability study calculated indices C Cpx e Sample size Number of measured values are in a group number of pieces are taken out of the process together namely th
148. cted Flatness 0 0 Spec Bilateral sample range Leslee LSL 129 950 Units mm QoS IHil PRU ofSocs 100 0 QoS Lo 0pcs 0 0 OPM Hild Opes OPM Lal Opes DPHMtatal Opes E AC 130 0392 E 0 0313 See D O325 Pp 1 79 Ppk 1 42 Figure 122 Data of the whole selected sample range The data related to the complete selected sample range are the following GTO CTQ level of the measured parameter Process type of the measured process general Tool change Toolwear Distribution distribution type set for the process and the result of the fitting test Skewness skewness value used for continuous distributions Flatness flatness value used for continuous distributions LS eee specification type of the measured parameter on sided or bilateral USE ics eto upper specification limit in case of bilateral or upper bounded specification ESE neuen lower specification limit in case of bilateral or lower bounded specification Units eer eee unit of the measured parameter OOS Hi number of parts above the upper specification limit and their rate compared to the total number of the selected parts In Spec number of parts inside the specification limits and their rate compared to the total number of the selected parts HNS SPC User Manual 92 PANG TURA DEVELOP
149. culations menu item of the Settings menu 2 5 5 Attributed samples The attributed samples recorded in the database can be displayed or modified and new samples can be input related to a selected attributed process in the Attributed samples menu item of the Data menu First step is selecting the given process see in the chapter Process selection Than the Attributed Samples window will be displayed wherein the attributed samples stored in the database related to the selected process can be seen Attention The attributed samples are displayed according to the settings in the Date range for analysis menu item of the Analysis menu HNS SPC User Manual 71 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD Ed Attributed Samples X nn Sample data M npl mask fick Int Com hime 9 38 1995 UE User ID Shift Team Tool Mask Rejected sample E 1 4 Z 6 2 3H 3 1 3 1 4 H Intervention view all ene i Modify Comment e Info F List data of attributed samples add new samples and modify stored sample data Figure 93 Attributed samples Acknowledged sample The data of the several samples are displayed by rows in the list that can be found in the window s left top corner as follows 7 o PES the number of the given sample in the process Sample data the sample size of the given sample N and the number of the rejected parts np
150. d Mee ko n JOGTU pte A E k 3 5 logn V 10910 2 1 k a Search for optimal settings The program specifies the histogram with nearing to the number of classes from above whereby the distribution is matched if there is such a histogram Histogram by specification default for first appearance The histogram is displayed in the range of the measured values as default If this switch is on the histogram is displayed by the specification the position of the histogram can be seen compared to the specification limits as default This switch is valid for all the histograms displayed on the 3 access level in the Analysis menu and on the 1 access level in the measuring program Weibull Rayleigh Calculation It can be selected the calculation s method of the percentiles which are used to the capability index calculation in case of Weibull and Rayleigh distributions If the use M L method is selected the percentiles are calculated by the distribution function otherwise if the use Regression Analysis possibility is selected the percentiles are taken graphically by the linearized distribution function Outstanding value Outstanding values can be detected automatically by means of H test at the measured data input in the measuring program in the Measured samples menu item of the Data menu by importing or by DataConnection The detection can be enabled with the Auto detection
151. d signals are played through the computer s loud speaker Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy HNS SPC User Manual 163 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO 2 10 13 E mail There are some services in the program which have e mail sending function It is required to configure the e mail settings in the E maif menu item of the Settings menu in order to sending the e mails A E mail Settings X SMTP server mail hns eu Sender name HHS SPC i Send computer name appending to the sender name E mail address SPC_VirtualBox mail hns eu lt lt ATTENTION You should set a valid mail address to prevent sent mailes from the spam filtering Test lt lt Cancel Ok Mail to blasko katalin hns eu rest mail has been already sent Set mail configuration to use for mail sending by the program Figure 232 E mail settings It is required to have an SMTP server which is available by the program This server can be given with name or IP address The text given in the Sender name field will be displayed in the sender fields of the e mails It is possible to attach the sender computer s name to the sender name with the Send computer name appending to the sender name switch Optional e mail address can be displayed in the e mails as the e mail address of the sender Attention When giving the e mail address it has to be taken into account
152. d the date format have to be chosen too according to the operation system After the necessary settings the export can be started by pressing the Export button and can be stopped by pressing the Abort button Ef Export Data Selected for Analysis X File text Ea Export into Excel table Decimal point 1 234 y Date format uyuu mm dd x ser B Boer Configure export mode and export target ts Figure 156 Exporting the interventions of the selected samples Into the given file the process identifiers the several interventions ordered by the sampling time and the following data related to the samples whereto an intervention is recorded will be saved e sampling date and time e name of the intervention e name of the measured parameter which causes the intervention if it is recorded e code of the failure group which causes the intervention if it is recorded e user ID e Shift ID e team ID e tool ID e mask ID e sample size number of rejected parts np number of failures c and outstanding status Example for the text file with the interventions P Interventions txt Jegyzett mb Bl xj Fajl Szerkeszt s Formatum Wezet S g Product code name draw num 1F 1T 1F 1 PRODUCT 1F 1T 000 Failure group code name FG 1 1 fault group categories E 1 category li z 2 category failure x 1 fault 0 100005 xx l 2 fault 0 200005 x ii 3 3 faul
153. dgement The inspecting of the control chart can be marked by pressing the TE button This function is the same as on the control chart for measured parameters See the description about the Control chart acknowledgement function in the Analysis Control chart menu item related to measured samples in the Analysis menu 2 6 20 7 Rejecting a sample on the control chart A sample can be rejected or the rejected status of a sample can be deleted by pressing the button This function is the same as on the control chart for measured parameters See the description about the Rejecting a sample on the control chart function in the Analysis Control chart menu item related to measured samples in the Analysis menu 2 6 20 8 Control chart settings All control chart settings can be seen or modifying in the Control Chart Settings window by pressing E the BASS button HNS SPC User Manual 108 JS MUN TECNICAL DEVELOPMENT C0 ID Ed Control Chart Settings All failures Control Limits Harning Limits Chart type np m calculated i calculated 7 ize 25 zz Gee usi 2 UHL MELE 2 088 x4 st fa uo Dot common setting for all charts allecategories failures of this group H common settings for all failure charts of this group Set attributed control chart settings Figure 149 Control chart settings all
154. displayed preliminary or on going process capability indices related to the displayed chart range depending on the capability study setting If the calculated capability index values are lower than the index criteria for the given measured value in the Index minimum fields in the Measured parameter menu item of the Database menu than capability indices will be red coloured If the process is not stable in case of on going process capability study the capability index values will not be displayed If the process is not stable in case of on going process capability study and the automatic process capability study changing is enabled preliminary process capability study will be set to the process and P Py indices will be calculated marked with exclamation point See the Change process capability study state automatically switch on the Others sheet in the MPG menu item of the Settings menu x 20 00453 Process is NOT stable Ss 0 00835 Ppl 1 06 ez 0 01255 Ppk 0 34 Figure 121 Data of the displayed sample range The right bottom corner of the control chart the histogram of the complete selected sample range is displayed The settings and calculated values of the complete selected sample range are displayed under the histogram SPC x s Honitoring Control chart type kind and CTa Normal mode Process General Distribution Normal gt matched skewness 0 09 Data of the whole sele
155. dows of the selected sample ranges Any of the opened analysis windows can be set as current window with clicking the row of the given analysis All of the analysis windows of the given sample range can be minimized restored reset the HNS SPC User Manual 168 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD previous size and position and cascaded which means the staggered arrangement of the windows in the default size The functions related to the handling of the analysis windows can be used not only for the analysis windows of the selected sample range but also for any sample range displayed in the Window menu The Close all windows Minimize all windows Restore all windows and Cascade all windows menu items in the Window menu apply for all the opened analysis windows their meaning is the same as the meaning of the menu items related to the several analysis windows All the process identifiers product code measured parameter name failure group code workgroup code machine code head number position number are displayed in the header of the analysis windows if the selection is related to head position Comment In case of using the MDI windows it is recommended to use at least 1024x768 pixel resolution HNS SPC User Manual 169 O Am 2 12 Help menu 2 12 1 Active licences and users There are displayed the HNS SPC program copies workstations and users logged in into the current f
156. e MV or AV items The chart to be displayed can be selected in the window which is displayed after pressing the Charf button Ea HNS SPC Rivet measuring and qualification Presentations E X Parameter Failure group Horkgroup Hachine Head Position 2 Stalk length n 1H 1 es l Stalk diameter n 1H A 12 1 el Overall lenght n 1iH A 12 2 el Head lenght n 1H A 12 2 l Stalk length hn 1H A 12 Z el Head diameter A 16 A 12 Z el Stalk diameter n 1H A 12 Z e Overall lenght n 1H A 12 l Head lenght n 1iH A 12 e Stalk length n 1H A 12 41 Head diameter A 1A P712 I afk Measurements Control chart i Close Choose parameter or failure group to display chart Figure 200 List of the control charts in the measuring program Every line in this window means a process to be selected The processes whose control chart has been changed they occur in the MS S A AS AT or A2 items of the measuring program are marked with sing and the processes which s control chart could been changed thely occur in the MV or AV item of the measuring program are marked with sign The sign before the parameter failure group means the automatic chart displaying see the Chart automatically switches in the Create menu item of the MPG menu The Product column is not displayed in this window as default because the data are collected for
157. e Select measured samples menu item of the Analysis menu Attention The measured samples in the Select Measured Samples window are displayed according to the settings in the Date range for analysis menu item of the Analysis menu HNS SPC User Manual 67 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Settings Specification Bilateral 26 080 p 40 a 848 Capability On going Process C Process General Distribution Normal e aa80 pane p ann Control chart eo Pc fs Honitoring CL Calculated Calculated Calculated Calculated m Kijel lt mintatartomany FS it Sample Cancel F m DIL rom t ftg Sp um 5 lime To Select is TE Filter Ef select Measured Samples Sample data User ID Hask Shift Tool Team Rejected fckl Sample Measurement Date Ack Set 6 9 2008 7 28 am a b 3 zHH8 7 28 a m 1 6 9 2086 T Z8 a m lk Cp AR oC B o A E C 3 E Select first and last sample of sample range to use with analysing functions Figure 88 Selecting the measured samples to be deleted After selecting the sample range program asks for confirmation of deleting and deletes the selected sample range after confirmation Attention When removing a sample range all the measured samples in the given sample range are deleted included all measured values of this samples The time of re
158. e 246 Warning message Fitting test cannot be performed Reason The selected fitting test cannot be performed because of the number of the selected measured values Comment Some fitting test can be performed only if the number of the measured values is within the given limits Suggestion Select another fitting test Reference Analysis menu item related to the measured samples of the Analysis menu HNS SPC User Manual 173 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO 3 2 8 The Sampling Control service is not running Message ES Sampling Control Engine l X ATTENTION Ho SAMPLING CONTROL ENGINE service runs in the currently selected factory There are processes marked as monitored which have to be checked automatically but no service running in this factory Check Sampling Control Engine running computers SPC programs starterestart servicelz if needed Figure 247 Warning message The Sampling Control service is not running Reason There are processes appointed for Sampling Control in the actual selected factory but the Sampling Control service is not enabled on either SPC workstations in the given factory Comment It is enabled the checking of the Sampling Control service Suggestion You should enable the service if it is required Reference Sampling Control menu item of the
159. e created in the Measured parameter Add menu item of the Database menu As the measured parameters are registered under the products the product has to be selected before creating a new measured parameter The data of the measured parameter have to be given in the Measured Parameter Settings window which appears after selecting the product Firstly the primary and secondary names of the measured parameter should be given If only the primary name is given it is automatically copied in the other languages field so the given measured parameter will have one name in both languages Measured parameter does not have a code as other database items it is identified by the primary name Therefore it is not allowed to have more measured parameter the same primary name under a product x Mame CT 7 FO C Critical Unit MINFO OoC data C Significant Figure 5 Browse fe Mormal Decimals Specification Index minimum H 1 Tupe Bilateral Cm 1 67 Cmk 1 67 Ci 81 Nominal value la Pp 1 33 Ppk 1 33 2 2 6 41 Upper dift le Cp 1 33 Cpk 1 33 C3 6 661 Lower diff la a Z goal 4 50H C 4 60801 USL Imax 5 6 66081 LSL mink Define or modify the measured parameter enter its general settings Figure 58 Measuered parameter data By pressing the TEI button next to the Name field the reserved ID s names of the measured parameters defined
160. e has the given failure The qualification of the current piece can be closed with the Ok button and the measuring program goes on with next measurement or qualification In case of summarized data input all pieces in the sample have to be qualified and the results of each qualification have to be summarized and entered together in the Attributed Data Input window Sample size 4 zaj To check Missing circles TE Blennish Faulty pcs Dirty surface A NN i Cancel j Enter the attributed results of piece or of sample Figure 192 Summarized attributed data input by samples In this case the occurrences of the several failures related to the whole sample have to be given in the Occurrence fields In addition it is necessary to give the number of rejected parts in the Faulty pcs field because more failures can be occurred in a piece hence the number of rejected parts are not equal to the number of failures necessarily The sample size of the given failure group is displayed in the Sample size field which can be modified by the operator in case of not constant sample size The qualification of the current sample can be closed with the OK button if the entered data are consistent number of rejected pieces is not bigger than the sample size and not smaller than the number of failures Attention In case of summarized input of the attributed data the accepted data cannot be m
161. e identified by the gauge name the port and the channel The missing measurement can be done if the gauge has already been available The readout of the measured value can be tried again by the Gauge again button and if it is successful the measurements will go on It can happen that the piece has to be taken out of the measuring device in order to correct the error and all measurements on the given piece have to be repeated Re measuring of the piece can be started by the Piece again button Damaged status can be entered instead of the given measured value by the Damaged button By pressing the Cancel button the running measuring program is aborted and the measured values already collected are dropped When the outstanding value test is enabled see the Outstanding value Auto detection enabled switch in the Calculations menu item of the Settings menu the program makes the outstanding value test related to the given sample after the input of the last measured value of the given item The occurrent outstanding value found in the given sample is rejected automatically if the Set value status automatically switch is on otherwise a warning message is displayed where the given measured value can be excluded or included E outstanding Value Detection x ATTENTION There is an outstanding value in the sample 1 Include You can exclude this outstanding value from calculations pushing Exclude button
162. e in this case the number of rejected parts are equal to number of failures Failure chart 6 button This button is valid for all failures together so firstly the given failure whereby the settings wanted to give or modify have to be chosen in the drop down list above the button Most settings are the same as by all failures chart only different special information are written here Only c and u charts can be used in case of looking for all failures strategy because number and rate of rejected parts is not defined for failure category because more failures can be occurred by parts Any chart type can be used in case of most critical failure only strategy because in this case the number of rejected parts are equal to number of failures Note Control charts of several failures are taken only if the Independent charts for all failures of group failure charts switch is on int the Control chart menu item of the Settings menu Settings for failure charts can be given without reference to this but failure charts cannot be displayed Attention The settings which are marked with an sign in the Control Chart Settings window are valid for all control charts of the given failure group namely if these settings are changed in any settings window it will be changed also in each settings window The settings which are marked with an sign in the Control Chart Settings window are va
163. e of the database the state of the modification can be seen on the screen Stopping the program Ctrl Alt Del Reset turning the computer off while the modification is underway may result in damage to the database relations and loss of data 2 3 6 3 Remove measured parameter In the Measured parameter Remove menu item of the Database menu a measured parameter can be deleted from a selected product of the actual factory Selecting the measured parameter is accordingly done the same way as with the modification of a measured parameter selecting a product and a measured parameter After selecting the measured parameter the program asks for confirmation of the deleting and once confirmation is received it removes the measured parameter from the database Attention When removing a measured parameter all data belonging to the measured parameter is deleted the measured processes related to this measured parameter and all the measured data related to these processes The time of removing depends on the quantity of the data related to the given measured parameter In case of an SQL database the removing is made by defined methods so there is no direct marking about the status of the process HNS SPC User Manual 42 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO The measured parameter registration measured parameter data found in the actual factory can be displayed in a table in the Measured parameter Table menu item of the
164. e program calculates the sample parameters sample mean sample range by this number of measured values When individual value moving range moving standard deviation chart is applied one part has to be always taken out of the process without reference to the sample size given here and this value will be displayed on the control chart When moving mean moving range moving standard deviation chart is applied a sample is set out of the last measured value and the previous stored measured values When moving mean moving range moving standard deviation is calculated sample size is defined as follows HNS SPC User Manual 46 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Sample size N 5 E Lau Single parts Samples n N 1 The sample size means in this case the number of measured values are used to calculating the moving mean range standard deviation Distribution e Type Following distribution types are supported e normal e lognormal e Weibull e Rayleigh e folded normal e Johnson transformation Non normal data can be transformed into normal distribution e Distribution s parameters In case of parametric non normal distributions the distributions parameter have to be given according to the given distribution type e Off set Analysed data can be transformed with an off set value which can be given in this field If data are not wanted to transform the value in this field should be O e Tes
165. eaeeeessaanaseeessaaaaaueessssaauaeesessaauasseeses 56 Figure 76 Selecting processes and sub processes to be created sessi esee nnne nnn nnns ss sn ia sh sess essa eins ss ss saa sn snis sna sans sse aa ann nnns 57 Figure Wim notice qoe SV igo CERE 58 Figure 78 Control chart settings for i re E 59 Figure 79 Setting the K value for warning Imi s calculation oz sesccsiecessvesnresecedenxesteo2seniendecveaveuneesicedeceesianeanigederssvesznedsceussnesiaeesaweedecreaseuszedadedusneniareusoeedes 60 Figure 80 Attributed IOC CS SIGN G T nines 61 Figure 81 Checking the process setting s DOFCOSS cccccsscseeccccnnaseeseceseannseeeeennaaueeeeessaaueeeeeeeaaeseeeeesanaaaaeeeesnaauaseeessaauaaaeesssnaaaaessessaauanseessasaaaaesssssaaansees 62 Figure 82 The product selecti 0 RR ERU T UTI 63 Figure G3 Measured process SCO CHON ME 63 Figure 84 Attributed process selection eiie eeeee sese ei eeee sese n asses nu anne sua rrr sena saa s hasse sss sa ass essa aras saa ss se sa assa sss sa essa assa sus a sess suas essa esa sas a assa ssa san 64 Figure 85 I iE ge P 65 Figure 86 Data Ergo iM l
166. easuring program Also the Process Status Logging PSL enabled switch on the Log Alert sheet in the MPG menu item of the Settings menu has to be on to make the psl file The PSL switch is active only if the Chart automatically switch is on because the PSL file contains data which can be taken after loading the control chart The PSL switch is inactive in case of M and MX items See the content of the PSL file in the MPG Measuring Program document Note The PSL file is made upgraded when the user exits from the measuring program window with the Close button or starts a new sample input with the Start button The order of the measurements and qualifying can be given in the Executing order field The items are numbered in order of the time of their creating automatically but this order can be modified In case of modifying the order take care of the continuous numbering of the items otherwise an error message is sent and the measuring program cannot be saved New samples can be made by the measurements performed in the measuring program with the S item It is possible to save a measured value onto more processes in the database and a new sample item can be made from one or more measured values by different operations The S items can be created modified or removed on the S sheet of the MPG Editor window HNS SPC User Manual 122 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD Ed M
167. easuring program can be enabled See the alert criteria and the settings on the Alert sheet in the Create menu item of the MPG menu The subject of the alert e mail can be given in the Subject field and the name of the measuring program can also be displayed in the subject next to the given text with the Append MPG name after the subject text Process Status Logging PSL enabled If the process status logging function is enabled a status report is made automatically related to the appointed items after running the measuring program Besides the appointing of the measuring program s items the PSL function has to be enabled with this switch If the logging is HNS SPC User Manual 154 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Ed MPG Settings X The settings on the Others sheet are the following Input Heasur ing Sample data Log Hlert Others MPG List by name C creating time C time of last using Cancel Marker Gntervention comment window appears automatically on DoC Display automatic control charts when oC occurs only Operator has to set intervention or comment on ot Save marker data for all samples m Automatically displayed charts can be selected using process list Refresh control chart automatically Change process capability study state automatically use CFGM calculation m Change control limit settings automatically when capability study changed Appearance m
168. ed as a separate databases However the data in these databases for example several months cannot be managed together for example a capability index diagram cannot be made by more months In order to loose this problem can be used the Copy xBase to SQL database menu item of the File menu This function enables to copy several databases together in an SQL database 2 2 8 Archiving xBase databases can be archived in the Archiving menu item of the File menu x Destination E Simple Batch Archive all samples I keep samples of last control charts C firchive samples by time range ES ui Archive Beginning date 2087 81 01 Closing date 2087 12 31 i Close Archive full database archive all factory Remove archived samples from the current database gt gt Configure and start archiving of the current database Figure 23 Simple archiving HNS SPC User Manual 20 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD Destination fum Simple Batch Splanning into detached databases Archive By years l Close C By quarters By months year month year month Begining and closing date 2887 A j2ae7 fiz Archive full database Carhcive all factory Remove archived samples from the current database gt gt Configure and start archiving of the current database Figure 24 Batch archiving Actual selected database can be always archived data will
169. ed item Figure 182 Removing the measuring program 2 7 5 Running the measuring program The running of the measuring programs can be started in the Run menu item of the MPG menu In case of using the Input by gauge item the measured values have to be input by the gauges specified in the measuring program In case of using the Input by keyboard item all the measured values has to be typed trough the keyboard without reference to the specified gauges Firstly the Select MPG window is displayed which is the same as in the Modify menu item of the MPG menu If the measuring programs are sorted in groups one or more MPG Preselection windows are displayed before the Select MPG window See the chapter Measuring program preselection in the MPG Measuring Program document After selecting the measuring program the window of the given measuring program is displayed The name of the measuring program can be seen in the header of this window The data input MPG running can be started with the Star button It is possible to skip the Start button and starting the data input by the measuring program selection directly See the Data inputs started automatically when MPG selected switch on the Input Measuring sheet in the MPG menu item of the Settings menu HNS SPC User Manual 130 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD a HNS SPC Rivet measuring and quali
170. ed with an sign are valid for all control charts of the given failure group all failures chart all category charts all failure charts namely if this setting are changed in any settings window it will be changed in each settings window However the settings which are marked with an sign are valid for all failure charts of the given failure group namely if this setting are changed in any failure chart settings window it will be changed also in each failure chart settings window 2 6 20 9 Change the control charts of the failure group In addition to the chart for the failure group control charts are also taken for every failure category of the failure group and for every failure if it is enabled Failure charts are not taken as default but it can be HNS SPC User Manual 109 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO enabled in the Control chart menu item of the Settings menu by the Independent charts for all failures of group switch The control charts of a failure group can be changed by pressing the EEN button The order of the charts is the following all failures chart first category chart gt second category chart gt last maximum fifth category chart gt first failure chart second failure chart gt last maximum hundredth category chart gt all failures chart gt In the right upper corner of the window it can be se
171. ell as the intervention and the remark entered to the sample These data always apply to the appointed sample 2 6 20 1 Meaning of the data on the control chart OoC Out of Control cases are detected automatically and are marked with red colour The signs in the field under the control chart mark the interventions the comments the acknowledgement of the chart the alerted samples and acknowledged alerts See the meaning of the last two signs in the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert document Under the control chart information of the displayed sample range can be seen the number and the sampling date and time of the first and last sample Intervention Alerted sample not Alerted sample Sampling date and time of the acknowledged acknowledged first and last sample of the 0 00 o displayed sample range LI LI LI 1 9 30 1955 8 55 a m i 4 14 2008 11 43 a m mimo Chart acknowledgement Number of the first and last sample of the displayed sample Figure 142 Sings on the control chart range HNS SPC User Manual 105 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Several samples on the control chart can be appointed by the cursor In the left bottom corner of the control chart the data of the appointed sample are displayed Date 9 30 1995 8 2 a m Intervention Comment Figure 143 Information of the appointed sample o number of the sample inside the selected sample ra
172. emoved by pressing the Cancef button If the actual factory has been deleted then there is no selected factory in the database This should be checked after the deleting and another factory should be selected if necessary ixBase 7 752 1 vo factory salectad Figure 37 No factory selected Attention When removing a factory all data belonging to the factory is deleted the workgroups of the factory the machines of the workgroups the intervention lists of the machines all products the measured and attributed processes and all the measured and attributed data The time of removing depends on the quantity of the data in the given factory In case of an SQL database the removing is made by defined methods so there is no direct marking about the status of the process 2 3 2 4 Factory table The factory registration factory data found in the database can be displayed in a table in the Factory Table menu item of the Database menu In this table can be reached all functions creating changing copying removing related to factories HNS SPC User Manual 27 DANNS TECNICAL DEVELOPMENT C0 LID Code Hame by Language i Hame by Language 2 A Factory Add new Delete Copy Password Terminology Change Cancel Change Ok Figure 38 Factory table If there is not defined any factory in the given database then the no data text is written in the first row of the table The black
173. en switch should be switched on beside the set values HNS SPC User Manual 49 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD TREND means successive increasing or decreasing points on either diagram of the control chart In the first field the number of samples to be checked should be set The set value in the second field means the number of the points which are increasing or decreasing in case of a TREND In the first field can not be set smaller value than in the second field More conditions can be set together related to the TREND test these conditions are in an OR relations In case of setting further test conditons also the given switch should be switched on beside the set values e Middle Third Program monitors the number of the points in the middle third of the field inside the control limits The test can be done only if enough number of points which is set in the Checked samples min field are in the control chart In case of a Middle Third case the number of points in the middle third of the control field is out of the Samples in zone min and Samples in zone max set values This value is expressed as the percentage of the points in the middle third field in the ratio of the total points on the control chart Extended OoC s 4 out of Control Settings X Base DoC z Extended DaC s Others x xil E HE1 14 points in a row alternating up and down I HEZ 2 of 3 points out more than 2 s
174. en what chart all failures chart either category chart either failure chart is displayed actually PS sSSchs Se oso e a eee Soa See eae at ee Ja eee st 3 3 st Displaying the control chart of all Displaying the control chart of the 1 T Displaying the control chart of the 1 SE failure category E failure failures within the failure group eee eee Y e A Displaying the control chart of the 2 Displaying the control chart of the 2 failure category 3 failure Displaying the control chart of the last ly BEES UO maximum 5 failure category Displaying the control chart of the last z maximum 100 failure Figure 152 Control charts of a failure group 2 6 21 Pareto analysis In the Analysis Pareto diagram menu item of the Analysis menu Pareto analysis can be displayed by the failure occurrences in the selected sample range Zac Pareto analysis 1F 11 FG 1 1F 15 15 1G oO x All failures n code name 1 Z fault Zi 3 fault 3 1 fault failures 32 Length of analysed period 8 30 8 55 a m 4 14 11 43 a m analysed pcs TOO faulties pPosli 32 DPM Idbl Figure 153 Pareto analysis The pareto diagram is displayed in the left side of the window and the code and name of the failures ordered by the number of their occurrence can be seen on the right side Above the several ba
175. enabled switch and the Confidence level of the test has to be set In case of detecting an outstanding value a warning message is displayed where the user can decide for excluding or including the measured value This warning message is skipped and the measured value is excluded automatically if the Set value status automatically switch is on The outstanding values are grey coloured and are in brackets Comment The warning message of the outstanding value is not displayed in case of data input by DataConnection HNS SPC User Manual 148 Attention PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Ed Outstanding Value Detection X ATTENTION There is an outstanding value in sample 9 s 4 988 Dx of Include You can mark measurement as outstanding to skip it Figure 212 Warning to an outstanding value Outstanding sample Outstanding samples can be detected automatically by means of F test at displaying the control chart The detection can be enabled with the Auto detection enabled switch and the Confidence level of the test has to be set The points of the outstanding samples are in a red coloured frame on the control chart Capability index calculations by QS9000 standard The process capability indices are calculated by the QS9000 standard namely the preliminary Py Py process capability indices are calculated with the empirical standard deviation s but the on going Cp Cpk capability indices are c
176. ere In the certificate of a parameter the minimum and maximum measured value and the mean of the measured values are displayed in the Results field It is possible to qualify the parameter automatically by switching on the automatically switch in the Quality field In this case the minimum and maximum measured values are compared to the specification limits of the given parameter Specification limits are displayed in the Specification field automatically if there is not given another value in the Certificate window Certain data of the product can be used as identifiers in the certificate the use additional product identifiers switch has to be switched on before selecting the certified parameter In this case the given fields of the certificate are filled in with the certain identifiers data of the selected product as follows Buyer e the value in the 7 user defined field of the product Spec standard the value in the 5 user defined field of the product Specification the value in the 6 user defined field of the product Obviously if this function is used the user defined fields of the product have to be used to record these specified data See the Product menu item of the Database menu and the Database terminology menu item of the Settings menu HNS SPC User Manual 118 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO 2 MPG menu 2 1 Introduct
177. ere are not taken into account the rows which contain data of heads positions If the Save Head position data to main machine process automatically switch is on the data of the heads positions are also recorded on the given machine automatically One DataConnect file can contain samples of more processes the process identifiers are written in each row If one file contains data of one process or data of more processes but the several processes are placed one after another sequentially it is recommended to switch the Load process identifiers check process definitions by samples switch on If one file contains data of more processes and the several processes are not placed sequentially it is recommended to switch the Load process identifiers check process definitions by files switch on These two cases are detached because of the reducing the processing time but there is no other difference in the operation HNS SPC User Manual 165 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO The number in the Decoder puffer size number of identified processes by loading field means that the data of so many processes are loaded together and the data of the further processes are left in the DataConnect file and they are loaded at the time of the next processing Comment The outstanding values are also detected automatically while the measured samples are loaded from the DataConnect file if the Auto detection enabled switch is on in the
178. erid shift team tool mask sample sizwastes failures rejected 18 1995 09 30 6 56 19 1G 1INTERVENTION 50 19 1995 09 30 8 58 15 1G 2INTERVENTION 50 20 1995 09 30 9 02 15 1G 2INTERVENTION 50 21 1995 09 30 9 04 15 1G 4INTERVENTION 50 22 2008 04 14 11 48 1S 1G 3INTERVENTION 50 2 IM 4 gt gt Munkal J4 ol Rag ig Alakzatoky N w OJ 4i ee 8 d S w Ami gp oO x x x ND KJ N m KJ AJ m K sz NUM Lu Figure 158 Excel file with the exported interventions Note The text is entered in the Comment field maximum 250 character in the Marker Data window is not exported 2 6 25 Cancel the sample selection The selection of the analysed samples can be cancelled in the Reset selection menu item related to the attributed samples of the Analysis menu Some functions e g the Select database menu item of the File menu are disabled if an analysed sample range is selected because some data are saved in the database directly and some data are loaded from the database during the analysis Before using a disabled menu item the sample selection has to be cancelled When logging out of the program sample selection is cancelled automatically 2 6 26 Summarized pareto analyses Failure data of the several failure groups can be displayed in a summarized Pareto diagram Summarized pareto analyses can be displayed in the Summarized pareto analysis menu item of the Analyisis
179. eroio ui Tc Cer EN 66 HNS SPC User Manual 4 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Figure 87 Measured eMe CC lameadaseennas nite 67 Figure 88 Selecting the measured samples to be deleted sscccccccccsseeeececsacueseeecennuaueeecessaaseeecessaausuaeessasaaaeesessaaanseeessaauanecessaaaaaueessssaauesssessaaunseseses 68 Figure 89 ic cigceEcoi qcoq0a s DTE mE 68 Figure 90 Selecting a measured process to export ccccccssseececccnaseesscecsaausseeesecnuaneeeeeseaaueeeeeeeaaeesaeeeesanaaaaeeeeseaaaasseeseaauaaaeessanaaaaeesessaaaanseessaaaseessssnaaasees 69 Figure 91 Selecting all measured processes of a product to export sessi esee seen annees nnn nans sss ssa asseris suain essi Errr ass r sss naar rernm naa nnns 69 Sie Ig 92 Measured sample INDO CP 70 Figure 93 Attributed samples ETC TEE 72 Figure 94 Attributed sample input mH EEEE 73 Figure 95 Delete samples by der PME 74 Figure 96 Selection a time range for ralVSEeieu essunevaedusuze rubea ER Ret cap Es Ue v SDU nus E Fan SE ONERE o aPRRUR nicddsaxnteeetaedidadeoveabesnze VU SU xuHE FADUM I OR K E ORNPRMR EEEE UR EErEE EEEren 76 Figure 97 S lect meas red sample S zatre eea RSie 77 Figure 90 Search DY sample Neige s E P 78 Figure Be MESI EO
180. ervices of the earlier program versions Only a correct database should be copied 2 xBase database has to be converted into the present program version In order to this you should select the xBase database in the present program version and choose Upgrade option if the program requires it 3 After the successful conversion you should select the SQL database connect and make the copying with the given menu item If the data to be copied is one of a factory already in the SQL database the program will give a warning message since it is the danger of it exists that the previously copied data is copied again and the same data measured and attributed samples will be in the database twice or more The danger of this is not present only when the database definition are copied because the program checks the database definitions before copying and existing items will not be copied Attention In case of an Oracle database the copying is done in a single transaction hence if there is an error in the copying the database to be copied is faulty then the program scrolls back the copying already done up until the error In case of an MSSQL database the copying is done in multiple transactions hence data is transmitted to the SQL server even if there are errors but only consistent and otherwise correct data Note If an xBase database is archived for example by months than the several databases contains data of months can be us
181. ess 161 IUE POPIRES oc ars secede nce Ea ve pce ean ee ee 162 ZION PEDE ce E E S TE rio ee ET A A ee ee eee 163 NO MeN A TT recone eeeuce 164 2 10 14 HNS Data COmMe ilo MNT mE 164 2 10 15 MINFO OoC DataConne ction cccccceceeececccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseaeaeeeeeeeseesaaageess 166 2 WOO PACU MAG PEE TO OO Em 166 21017 Sampong CONTO PENNE REOR Emm 166 21018 215 6 ag ts leg el RIPE ter earner E EO DOE EN 166 2 10 19 Reset window positions and sizes essssssssssssssssseeeeeeene nennen nnne nennen nnn nnne nnn nennen rns nn 167 MEM nera mm 168 2 12 PICNIC IU e 170 2 12 1 Aclive licences and DBGLS s eeusideti meu dead c tue be edens onse Ea Ue Sa ois AEE Gen Lini EEEa ai HEU Oed 170 R e250 U Me P eee eee 170 VR Voc TG OMMMONN AU OMe ERR c 170 3 MESSAGES OF TNE PIOOT AN ase t 171 DRC e 171 3 2 Important warning MESSAGES ucc imi icitau tio x ra ERO xE aaa A essa aUo sS RR CUSRx M NI eSR EUER A DESEE 171 CA Mrs 16 DAS WO RR Ex 171 NINN MS ANG ENTE 171 SUE TSS TV MP ee a E E A eele vet A E E E E sanian cee E aecaeneeeeuee 172 32A MPG Saving GOl Pu
182. est DELI TS Machine THRE Head ale Position Select process or subprocess from manufacturing equipment relation registering Figure 84 Attributed process selection Firstly the measured parameter or the failure group has to be selected in this window when the list of the machines connected to the given parameter will be displayed Next step is the machine selection If a main process connected to a machine is wanted to select the process can be selected by pressing the Machine button If a multihead multiposition machine is selected and the selected measured parameter failure group is connected to heads positions too then the numbers of heads and or positions are displayed in the Head and or Position field A sub process related to a head position can be selected by pressing the Head Position button after appointing the given head position number Note Head and position levels always are under a machine but they are one level with each other so there is no dependent connection between head and position levels they are independent of each other A dependent connection between heads and positions can be made by the S item of the measuring program for example by saving the samples collected for more position that are in a common head actually also for the given head In the further windows opened after the process selection the main identifiers of actual process can be displayed by pressing
183. f beginning value 2 closing value 12 automatic increment 5 current value 2 the order of the head position numbers is the following 2 7 12 6 11 5 10 4 9 The number of the pieces to be measured can be seen in the Sample size field according to the sample size of the given process The sample size is got from the database when running the measuring program and it is not used the sample size saved in the mpg file This allows of using the same measuring program in case of changing the sample size or the kind of the control chart related to the process Note The mpg file contains the sample size of the process which was valid at the time of creation of the measuring program The sample size has to be given at the time of the mpg creation in case of a process with machine capability study However the number of the measured pieces can also be entered by the operator before the data input directly The input of the sample size by the operator can be enabled by pressing the button can be found next to the sample size field In addition the gauge to be used has to be selected in the measuring program In the upper out of the Gauge name selection fields the name of the gauge can be typed optionally it helos the operator by running the measuring program The gauge can be given with selecting the gauge port and channef The gauges have to be selected according to the
184. f all of the windows are deleted and the windows are displayed with the default settings in the middle next time Attention This command is valid for the given workstation program copy HNS SPC User Manual 167 2 11 Window menu The Window menu is displayed in the main window of the program if the Use MDI windows for analysis diagrams switch in the General program settings menu item of the Settings menu is on and at least one process is selected for analysis Ee 5 window Help Close fall windows Minimize Call windows Restore fall windows Cascade fall windows gt Head diameter 549548 T 10 A 11 k gt Headlenght 549548 T A 10 A 11 l gt Stalk diameter 549548 T A 10 A 11 Figure 235 Window menu S MUN TECNICAL DEVELOPMENT C0 ID In this case more maximum eight sample ranges can be selected for analysis together The selected sample ranges are displayed in the under rows of the Window menu marked with the following identifiers sequentially parameter name failure group code product code workgroup code machine code head number position number if the selection is related to head position The actual sample range set current is marked with a f exclamation mark before the sample range The not actual sample range is marked with a point The current sample range means that the following analysis e g control chart will be made for this sam
185. f the other samples because the process variation will not be looked in this diagram It is recommended to reject this sample advisedly because it may be failed measurement HNS SPC User Manual 107 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD 5 85 UCL 2 73 Rp 0 00 LEL Figure 147 Displaying the control chart between the minimum and maximum values The center line the control and the warning limit values and markings are displayed in the correct position next to the displayed lines It is possible that several legends cover each other so they are not fair To avoid this problem it is possible to display these legends in fix position Two display modes can be changed by clicking on the grey coloured field next to the diagrams by the right mouse button Grey coloured arrows above and under the values mark that the values are displayed not in the correct position 5 24 UCL 4 56 UHL 2 29 Rp 0 68 LHL 0 00 LEL i Figure 148 Displaying the center line the control and the warning limits in fix position 2 6 20 5 Recording a marker An intervention or comment can be entered to the appointed sample in the Marker data window by HP pressing the Wont button This function is the same as on the control chart for measured parameters See the description about the Recording a marker function in the Analysis Control chart menu item related to measured samples in the Analysis menu 2 6 20 6 Control chart acknowle
186. fication Product Parameter Unit gt YSN be Preliminary Process Capability Figure 183 The window of the measuring program While the measuring program is running the information necessary to operate the measurements and qualifications are displayed in the measuring program window 1 Identifier fields In the upper field the identifiers code name and drawing number of the product selected in the measuring program are displayed The name of the current parameter or the code and name of the current failure group are also displayed as well as the workgroup and the machine and its head or position wherefrom the given sample has to be collected 2 Parameter specifications The specification data and the unit of the current measured parameter 3 Sample data The sample data which are entered by the operator at the starting of the measuring program and are saved with the given sample together sampling date and time user ID shift team mask 4 Number of the current piece There is displayed in the Piece field if which piece inside the sample has to be measured or qualified in format sample size number of the current piece 5 Figure The figure selected to the current measured parameter is displayed in this field See the Measured parameter menu item of the Database
187. further steps in the chapter Remove factory The highlighted factory can be duplicated by pressing the Copy button Firstly the Factory window appears filled in with the data of the factory to be copied excepting the identifier code The fields are filled in can be changed It is need to set database terminology and password system too as by creating a new factory See also the chapter New factory Last step of the copying is choosing the database items wanted to copy and then pressing the Copy button User registration which can be found on the Personal sheet in the Password menu item of the Settings menu and the list of sampling control events which can be found in the Sampling Control Events menu item of the Database menu will be copied into the new factory if the Users and the Sample Control events switches are on Note The names in the Copy Database window are displayed according to the database terminology related to the new factory was given in the previous window HNS SPC User Manual 28 PANS IEBNOILIEELPIENT C Ed Copy Database Items to copy W Workgroup v Users Hachine v Sample Control events Interventions Product Heasured parameters Measured processes Failure groups attributed parameters Attributed processes Select database levels to be copied lt XI XI XI XI lt 1 xl Figure 39 Copying a factory Note The database
188. g in to the 3 access level Actual date and time this time is used by saving data so it is important that computer s clock should be correct By clicking the minimize button of the start up window a status icon is displayed on the system tray By moving the cursor above this icon a label is displayed This label shows the actual selected factory s code and the status of the automatic services DataConnect DC Automatic Alert AE Sampling control SC Automatic Export AExp This displaying mode is useful on the workplaces that ensure only the running of the automatic services because it is not necessary to log in to the program to run these services it is enough to open the start up window If more program copy is running in a workplace to manage more factories more icon will be displayed accordingly HNS SPC User Manual 3 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Figure 7 Status icon on the System Tray When starting the program the selected previous used database is opened If it is not possible for example the previous database has been already removed or cannot be connected another database can be selected The way of the database selection can be found in the Select database menu item of the File menu Start up window offers to possibility Start Log in logging in to the user s access level with the correct password p cr exit from the progr
189. g message about the exceeding the maximum number of selected process seessssssiisssseee eene nnne sns 129 Figure 181 The measuring program selection menu lisse eise sees esee shes nn anh s na sn assai a eset ua sape suas esses sas a sa assa seas assa suas ess s aa sas a suas sse s aa sas s sa asse esas 129 Figure 182 Removing the measuring program RN ne 130 Figure 183 The window of the measuring program cccccsssececccnssueeecessanunseeeeennaaeeeeesnaaeeeeeseaaenseeeeesnaaaeaeeeessaauasseeseaauaauessssnaauaeesessaauasecessauaaaeesssssaaaages 131 Figure 184 Marking the current position in the measuring program windOwW sssssssisssssssssseses seen enne nnn hne na nnns nn r nns san sies enr nsns insi sss n nnns nans 131 PIQGUIG 185 Gauge cheCkihg T EE R a 132 Figure 186 Giving IIR 030 0 a REPRE TT OT E 132 Figure 187 Giving the head position WUIMDG MT TEE 133 Figure 188 Giving the maximum head position number closing value sssessssissssesssiissss esee nn nnns eeaa rn nns sss aa rns n sss s snas n nnns snas 133 Figure 189 Measurement window in the measuring program isses eese esee es eene sees nunt nna saa e suisses ssa sa sss sa assa essa sa ssa ases essa sess sa ases essa sara ases enn sns 133 Figure 190 Measurement window in the measuring progr
190. ge Format GIF Tagged Image File Format TIF TIFF Portable Network Graphics PMG JPEG Network Graphics JM Truevision Targa Files TGA TARGA Multiple Network Graphics MN soft Paintbrush PL bitmap format PUE HNS GFI file gp Adobe Photoshop PSD kodak PhotaCD PCD DirectDraw Surface DDS High Dynamic Range HB Windows loon ICO Amiga IFF IFF LBM Commodore 64 Koala format EO Dr Halo CUT Portable Bitmap ASCII PBM Portable Bitmap BINARY PBM Portable Graymap ASCII PaM Portable Graymap BINAR Pal Portable Pitelmap ASCII PPM Portable Pitelmap BINAR PPR Sun Hasterfile R55 Wireless Bitmap WBMP A11 Bitmap Format SBM A11 Fismap Format Ph e Decimals Resolution of the gauge whereby the given parameter is measured that is the number of the displayed decimals e Specification Firstly the type of the specification tolerance has to be selected that can be lower bounded upper bounded or bilateral Specification limits have to be given according to selected specification type In case of bilateral tolerance the nominal value the upper difference and the lower difference have to be given Program checks wheter the upper specification limit is greater than the lower specification limit that are calculated by the user defined values In case of one sided tolerance the USL max upper specification limit or the LSL min lower specifi
191. ghted and selected by pressing the Select button or by double clicking on the selected row The number and the sampling date and time of this first sample are written into the Selected samples From field 2 One measured value of the last sample in the sample range has to be highlighted and selected by pressing the Selecf button again or by double clicking on the selected row The number and the sampling date and time of this last sample are written into the Selected samples To field When the first sample has been already selected by pressing the Lasf button the last sample of the sample range can be selected the last sample before the following process setting s change is found automatically Sample selection can be cancelled and another sample range can be selected by pressing the Resef button After selecting the samples the Ok button has to be pressed the selected samples are loaded from the database and the analysis can be started Samples can be searched by sample number by the Sample button When giving a number the given sample will be highlighted in the sample list Ed Sample number for search X z How number Ea Hui Figure 98 Search by sample number Samples can be searched by sampling date and time by the Time button When giving a date and time the sample nearest to the given time will be highlighted The actual date and time is displayed in this window as default
192. gram is re started the sample data entered at the first running are used e Sample completed sound The program will give a sound if all the measurements qualifications of the given sample have been performed e Data inputs started automatically when MPG selected The data input is started directly after selecting the measuring program pressing the Start button in the measuring program window is skipped It follows that the analysis measurement diagrams and control charts can be displayed after closing the data input e Automatically saving of data on closing data inputs If all the measurements qualifications have been performed in the measuring program the data input has to be closed If the operator presses the Yes button in the Closing Inputs window see the Run menu item of the MPG menu the data input will be closed and the data cannot be modified It is possible to be saved the data at closing the data input automatically and the pressing of the Save button is skipped e Warning window appears on OoS measurement A warning message will be displayed if the entered measured value is out of the specification limits The measured value can be accepted or the given parameter on the given piece can be re measured The re measuring can be done only if it is enabled for the operator see the Re measuring enabled switch Out of Specification Har ning Measured value is out of specif
193. gs menu if there are so settings 3 Check the connection of the gauge and the computer 4 Check whether the gauge and or the interface is switched on and it is operable it is recommended to re start the gauge in case of intelligent gauges Reference Gauge menu item of the Settings menu Create menu item of the MPG menu 3 3 4 Measuring program error Message ES HPG error fileirivet_measuring_and qualification_multihesd NPG 4131 Specified product is mot found in database 548548 T 4 Error code lee Additional code F F Ch Database error Figure 255 Error message Measuring program error Reason One or more measuring program in the selected MPG directory refers to a product which cannot be found in the database Comment The program checks before displaying the MPG list whether the products occur in the measuring programs can be found in the actual database Suggestion Firstly check the database and the MPG directory selection and change it if it is not correct If incorrect product code occurs in the measuring program change it by editing manually or delete and create the measuring program again If the given product has not been created in the database yet or it has been deleted create the product in the database If the product code has been modified in the database correct it in order that the same pr
194. h is on Product selection list ordered by name in the product selection windows the products are ordered by their code as default but it is possible to order them by their name Enabled characters in SQL identifiers enabling or disabling the using of the accentuated letters in the identifiers of the SQL database If a disabled character is typed in an identifier a warning message will be displayed and it will not be allowed to use the given character The ES 2 button This characters supported by the actual SQL server can be queried with the function is active only in case of SQL database Comma character can be used enabling or disabling the using of the comma in the identifiers of the SQL database Save windows position and size if a user moves or resizes the windows they will be displayed on the new place and with the new size next time Use MDI windows for analysis diagrams the analysis windows can be managed in MDI Multiple Document Interface mode This mode means that more analysis windows can be opened together and more several measured attributed sample ranges can be selected for analysis In case of using the MDI windows the Window menu is displayed in the main window See the managing of the MDI windows in the Window menu This switch is not active if one or more measured attributed sample range is selected for analysis It can be re activated with the Reset selection menu i
195. h weights failure occurrences by the given cost data Minimum Zgoafl value can be given that is expected related to given failure group Actual calculated values will be compared to this criteria and indices in the reports will be marked as good not good after this Note Z values are displayed as default only in the reports in the Reports menu this menu can be used only in SQL database See the further information in the Report document By switching on the MINFO OoC data switch the sending of the Out of Control data related to the given failure group into VINFO system can be enabled See also the MINFO OoC DataConnection menu item in the Settings menu 2 3 9 2 Change failure group data The data of a failure group can be changed in the Failure group Change menu item of the Database menu Firstly the product and then the failure group to be changed have to be selected After selecting the failure group the given data can be changed in the Failure Group Data window All the failure data code name category cost can be changed optionally also the previous recorded data always are evaluated after the actual last settings The name of the categories can be change optionally too New items can also be entered into the failure and failure category lists the new item has to be entered as the next item of the list Attention When an xBase database is used the failure group s code ide
196. he Database menu Firstly a product has to be selected from the actual factory s products Product X Code Hame Drawing number 1F 1PRODUCT 1F 1T HHH 1F 2T 1F ZPRODUCT 1F zT B8H8H8 Cancel EN Select required item from the list Figure 82 The product selection After selecting the product depending on whether it is a measured or attributed process the window appears displaying the measured parameters or the failure groups with the list of the machines connected to them Select Process X Product code Description Drawing number rir uF 1PRODUCT jur 1T e88 Parameter Horkgroup Hachine Head Position 1 P 2 a 3 5 6 YT w CTU Normal Stored samples Iv B o b Spec MU Bess Capability Prelimin Prelimin Prelimin ust Ub basa Merkgrou AF 1WORKGROUP oo LSL LD fess Machine IF 1HORKGROUP 3MACHINE TS Machine 1H Head JU Position Select process or subprocess from manufacturing equipment relation registering Figure 83 Measured process selection HNS SPC User Manual 63 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Ed Select Process X Product code Description po number TEST Product Test DB 11 Failure group Horkgroup Hachine G Position Name hm Stored samples TA NE mE Category 1 fo Changin Changin NEN Category 2 Ij Horkgroup Production Line Test DEII Category wf Machine Machine T
197. he control chart displayed in the measuring program is always calculated by the default settings See also the histogram settings in the Analysis Frequency menu item of the Analysis menu e Data for the selected sample range important settings and calculated values related to the selected sample range are displayed under the histogram on the right side of the control chart The chart data chart type mode and kind are displayed on the top of this field Important process settings and calculated results can be seen under the chart data There are more optional data here these can be enabled or disabled in the Control chart menu item of the Settings menu The statistical data for the parts inside and out of the specification DPM data and capability indices of the complete selected sample range can be displayed optionally e Sample data sample data are displayed in the white field on the under side of the control chart sampling date and time sample mean sample range sample standard deviation and the intervention and the remark entered to the sample These data always apply to the appointed sample e Chart data calculated values related to the actual displayed sample range are displayed in the right upper corner of the white field process mean standard deviation capability indices HNS SPC User Manual 90 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO and process stability These data are calculated by the actual displayed sample r
198. he control limits in this case 14 063538 UCL x 14 087323 14 066255 LCL Figure 124 Displaying the x x x mx diagram between the control limits USL LSL The samples are displayed between the lower and upper specification limits It is possible to compare the state and the width of the control range and the specification range to each other HNS SPC User Manual 94 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO 14 0750 14 069588 UCL 14 067923 MESES Ce RE d m 14 066258 LEL 14 0600 LSL Figure 125 Displaying the x x x mx diagram between the specification limits Max Min The samples are displayed between the minimum and maximum sample mean median individual value moving mean All the samples are displayed in the correct place in this case This range is recommended to use if many samples are out of the control limits However it is not recommended to use this range when one sample is out of the control limits and it is much bigger than the values of the other samples because the process variation will not be looked in this diagram It is recommended to reject this sample advisedly because it may be failed measurement 20 040 USL 20 01645 o Ao ape AN 19 99261 LEL xil 18 850 LSL Figure 126 Displaying the x x x mx diagram between the maximum and minimum values The center line the specification the control and the warning limit values and markings are displayed in the correct position next to the displayed l
199. he highlighted failure group can be removed from the database by pressing the Delete button See the further steps in the chapter Remove failure group The highlighted failure group can be duplicated by pressing the Copy button Firstly the Failure Group Data window appears filled in with the data of the failure group to be copied excepting the identifier code The fields are filled in can be changed See also the chapter New failure group Last step of the copying is choosing the database items wanted to copy and then the pressing the Copy button HNS SPC User Manual 55 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Ed Lopy Database X Items to copy Horkgroup B Users Machine Sample Control events Interventions Product Measured parameters Measured processes E Failure groups attributed parameters W Attributed processes Select database levels to be copied Figure 74 Copying a failure group Note Only the database items under the failure group can be selected Attributed processes In case of selecting Attributed processes the same machines will be related with the new failure group as the earlier failure group and process settings will be the same A failure group s data can be modified by rewriting this data in the table The changing will be valid if the window is closed by pressing the Change OK button The changing will be rejected if the window is closed by pressing the
200. he histogram is displayed with these ideal settings for the first time The histogram settings are determined by the number of the classes the class width and the lower limit Default settings can be modified in the Histogram Settings window after pressing the Histogram button EA Histogram do Classes by data Lower limit 9g3545HBHHH by spec Llass width ja ea625e00 iil th Bh E Sl df ifo ink Figure 106 Histogram settings The number of classes the lower limit and the class width values can be entered by the keyboard directly The range of the histogram can be changed by the button in the underside of the Histogram Settings window z iiti E Shifting the lower limit of the histogram lower by one class width 1 class EE Shifting the lower and higher limit of the histogram lower and upper by one class width each 2 classes Shifting the higher limit of the histogram higher by one class width 1 class Shifting the lower limit of the histogram higher by on class width 1 class Shifting the lower and higher limit of the histogram upper and lower by one class width each 2 classes eee Shifting the higher limit of the histogram lower by one class width 1 class i Increasing the histogram classes by one while the lower and higher limits of the histogram are not changed 1 class d REN Decreasing the histogra
201. he measured value This field is active only in case of a multiposition machine s process but without reference to being of sub processes by positions The given measured value is not recorded on the position s process but a several control chart is applied for this position See the chapter Change the control charts for machine head position in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu The given measured value can be modified by keyboard or by the selected gauge After pressing the Measure button a data input window will be displayed this window is also displayed by running a measuring program A whole sample can be input onto the given process by pressing the Add button HNS SPC User Manual 66 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Ej Measured Sample Input X Sample date and time 2008 88 19 laz53 a m Measurement Out Dmg ME Acknowledged Shift i Team Tool Hask Intervention view all v None Remark hus k ME Heasure e Info Cancel xk Enter data or measure pieces of the measured sample Figure 87 Measured sample input The number of the measured value s fields is determined after the process s sample size Measured values and their possible status can be entered in the list on the right side of the window but the sample data sample s statuses and markers can be entered in the fields on the left side of the window Sample date and ti
202. he program 1 1 2 Software access levels HNS SPC software has its own access protection with built in password registration The access levels of the software are the following 1 access level Operator This level allows doing the tasks at the measuring workplace These tasks means running the measuring programs data input displaying the control charts and the measurements diagrams related to current process range in the measuring program as default Further functions using data loggers creating certificate sampling control can be enabled for the first access level in the Operator s rights menu item of the Settings menu 2 access level Technician This is the intermediate level of access between the operator lowest and the engineer highest levels It gives wide scale data input modification and analysis opportunities without right to create change or remove the database items modify the database settings create change or remove the measuring programs and modify the critical program settings 3 access level QA engineer This level allows access to all functions of the program Common passwords can be given to each access levels and it is possible to define individual personal passwords Access to each level is only possible with passwords these passwords are given and modified by the person having the 3 access level See the password settings in the Password menu item of the
203. he screen Stopping the program Ctrl Alt Del Reset turning the computer off while the modification is underway may result in damage to the database relations and loss of data Because of this the modification of identification codes and names of measured parameters should be carried out with caution and in case of xBase databases the modification of individual identification should be avoided if possible 2 3 2 3 Remove factory In the Factory Remove menu item of the Database menu the factory selected from the factory list can be deleted from the database The factory can only be deleted by a user who has the highest access rights in a given factory The user has to log in the factory to be deleted if it is not the actual selected factory If the users rights are appropriate the program like in all deleting processes asks for confirmation before deleting the factory x ATTENTION You want to remove data from the database All related data of the selected database item will be removed Remove Press the button Delete if you really want to remove selected C l database elements dnce Do you really want to remove selected item Figure 36 Confirmatinon of the deleting If the factory is wanted to remove then the Remove button has to be pressed in the Remove Selected Data window In case of an xBase database the status of the process can be followed in the status field The factory will not be r
204. her The display order of the items is the following MS M MX items in the specified order and then the S items It is typical that in the MW and MX items are measured auxiliary parameters which are necessary to calculate an other parameter specified in the S item By these switches the displaying of the M and MX items can be disabled in order that the more important MS and S items can be displayed instead of these items The settings on the Log Alert sheet are the following x Input Measur ing Sample data Log Alert Others Logging enabled Logging directory fe MPG alert function enabled Sub ject Alert Iv Append MPG name after the subject text m Process Status Logging PSL enabled Process Status Logging PSL file e Check and set your MPG configurations Figure 219 MPG settings Log Alert Logging enabled The running of the measuring programs and the events connected with it can be logged If the logging is enabled the logging directory has to be typed or selected with the button The log file will be made in a text file format with the measuring program mpg file s name but with a log extension The log file can be displayed in the measuring program selection window see the Modify and the Run menu item of the MPG menu MPG alert function enabled The in built alert function of the m
205. ibuted samples in the Select Attributed Samples window are displayed according to the settings in the Date range for analysis menu item of the Analysis menu After selecting the sample range program asks for confirmation of deleting and deletes the selected sample range after confirmation Attention When removing a sample range all attributed samples in the given sample range are deleted included all attributed data in this samples The time of removing depends on the quantity of the samples related to the given sample range In case of an SQL database the removing is made by defined methods so there is no direct marking about the status of the process HNS SPC User Manual 73 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD 2 5 Export attributed samples All the attributed samples of a selected process can be exported into a file in the Exporf menu item related to attributed samples of the Data menu Process can be selected and settings can be given in the Attributed Sample Export window Export process is the same as in case of measured samples see the Export menu item related to measured samples of the Data menu 2 5 8 Import attributed samples Attributed samples can be imported from a text file into the program s database in the Imporf menu item related to attributed samples of the Data menu Process can be selected and setting can be given in the Attributed Sample Import window
206. ication You can accept the ualue or you can do re measuring Value 6 72 Specification uL 6 78 f LL 6 18 Possible measuring error Figure 217 Warning message in case of OoS measurement e Re measuring enabled The measuring program can be aborted by the operator on the 1 and the 2 access level and the entered data can be modified Otherwise all the measurements and qualifications can be made once and the data have to be saved It is possible to log the re measuring and the aborting the measuring program see the Logging enabled switch on the Other sheet e Operator can change measured values and states after closing inputs It is possible to modify the measured values after closing the data input but before saving the data by clicking the measured value with the left mouse button This function is enabled on the 2 technician and 3 engineer access level as default but is can be enabled for the 1 operator access level with this switch e Operator can change to manual input on gauge error It is possible to input the data by keyboard in case of a gauge failure gauge is not connected gauge is faulty HNS SPC User Manual 152 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT C0 In case of gauges connected to HNS Digimatic SMUX interface and OPTO RS gauges the port whereto the given gauge is connected is opened at the starting of the data input opening the measurement window and is closed directly after the da
207. ices the preliminary process capability indices the on going process capability indices and the Z index furthermore the Z goal value can be given also in case of failure groups The index minimum values can be given in the Measured parameter and in the Failure group menu item of the Database menu The actual calculated indices are compared to the index minimum values during the analysis and reporting and the program decides whether the index values meet the requirements The default index minimum values can be given in the Default goals menu item of the Settings menu These values are offered when a measured parameter or failure group is created and the default values can be changed for the several measured parameters or failure groups z cm 67 Cmk Le P 1 33 Pp 1 33 Ce 133 Cpk 1 330 __ Cancel Cancel It 40H Set default goal values Figure 215 Default index minimum values Note It is checked whether the index values have been given correctly Cm gt Cmk Cp gt Cy Pp gt Pox In case of faulty values the settings cannot be saved the window cannot be closed with the Ok button Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy 2 10 9 MPG settings The settings related to the MPG running can be given and modified in the MPG menu item of the Settings menu The information are related to the following
208. ich have been already closed by pressing the Yes or the N button EJ Measured Processes X ATTENTION You changed the number of head 146 312 of A 12 Machine AL2 machine Do you want to create new head processes for below parameter Product 549546 T Steel rivet 5 49546 T Parameter Head lenght Skip all next parameters No Yes Same settings for all next head processes Process registration Figure 53 Increasing the number of the heads positions 2 3 5 Product Product registration contains the data of the products defined in the actual factory and can be managed in the Product menu item of the Database menu Any number of products can be created in a factory The name of the menu item changes according to database terminology of the given factory 2 3 5 1 New product A new product can be created in the Product Add menu item of the Database menu Firstly the code of the product should be given which identifiers the product in the factory so is not allowed to have more product the same code in a factory The name of the product can be given in two different languages recommended in English and in Hungarian If only one name is given it is automatically copied in the other language s field so the given product will have one name in both languages HNS SPC User Manual 37 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Code a Hame Drawing num
209. id if the window is closed by pressing the Change OK button The changing will be rejected if the window is closed by pressing the Change Cancel button Reduction the number of the heads positions means removing sub processes and in particular case recorded samples So the program ask for confirmation of deleting before removing after pressing the Change OK button before closing the window In case of increasing the number of the heads positions the program ask after pressing the Change OK button before closing the window whether the user wants to create sub processes related to the new heads positions When new sub processes are wanted to create process settings have to set in the Process Settings window displayed automatically If more processes were registered to the earlier heads positions it is possible to set the same settings related to the all or more processes of the new heads positions This is possible by switching on the Same settings for all next head position processes switch and the Process Settings window will be displayed only once for also all the measured and all the attributed processes If Skip all next parameters button is pressed than no measured and attributed sub processes will be created related to the new heads positions The Same settings for all next head position processes switch and the Skip all next parameters buttons do not apply to the processes wh
210. identifier name The fields are filled in can be changed excepting the reducing of the decimal s number See also the chapter New measured parameter Last step of the copying is choosing the database items wanted to copy and then the pressing the Copy button x ltems to copy Workgroup El Users Machine Sample Control events Interventions Product Measured parameters W Measured processes m Failure groups attributed parameters Attributed processes Select database levels to be copied Figure 61 Copying a measured parameter HNS SPC User Manual 43 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Only the database items under the measured parameter can be selected Measured processes In case of selecting Measured processes the same machines will be related with the new measured parameter as the earlier measured parameter and process Settings will be the same A measured parameter s data can be modified by rewriting this data in the table The changing will be valid if the window is closed by pressing the Change Ok button The changing will be rejected if the window is closed by pressing the Change Cancef button Note It is not allowed to reducing the decimal s number for a measured parameter 2 3 7 Measured process After building the production system workgroup machine the products and their parameters the processes should be created A measured process means a relation be
211. ie uic itte hace eld gerne basent adem ME ua lesu terae easi ut eek EU Lofsep eue 73 2 5 7 Export attributed samples ces sees ec decies ns ceriiamocceessiasdcceintinsdecdoedcadekestetehlatieadccwieteesueied Rosse iuE dus NUN EUR de SUO 74 2 5 8 Import attributed samples lssssssssessssesseseeeeeeen nennen nennen nnns nna n nnn n nsns annes nna nnn nnne 74 2 5 9 Delete samples by Me ERR OD S LESS 74 25 10 Sampling COMMON MN TET mm 75 OVI EST T Tc 75 De ap VIE PE N 75 UU TIS TE H 75 2 6 PADI SUS PVCU E 76 2 6 1 Steps of sample analysis cade crcinasncannctwsch avececeusaceissnndacatesncaetianchacesiessuecaemiinsadaeeenanatsisechusieceeouedetesinesnececsuchodeuinsaenes 76 2 62 Selecung the trie TAN OS resipi ieee e EOE Ee aie P OET arn ea a Era r E bau nunca E eiie t 76 2 6 3 Select measured SAMPIES sareste Eiaa EEEE EAr Ae ean Ee Aidei 77 2 6 4 Save process settings measured process sssssssssssssssssssseee nne nnne nnn nnn nennen nnn nnn 79 25 9 Change speciicealOisserne id cadact C cba d canet inue uad assu aua sic Uds gases i aep Dadu cui Aqu Meri EE 80 2 6 6 aie I RIAEUEU RIS RRRRRRRERE 81 gb OFS UID UO N SITIO S IS eae sab etree edu
212. igma from center line same side HES 4 of 5 points out more than 1 sigma from center line same side E HE4 15 points in a row within 1 sigma of center line Ceither side WES 8 points in a row more than 1 sigma of center line either side Configure the automatic DoC detections for control charts Figure 68 Extended Out of Control settings e WET 14 points in a row alternating up and down 14 successive points alternate up and down around the center line e WE2 2 of 3 points out more than 2 sigma from center line same side 2 points of 3 successive points are outside the middle two third range of the control field on the same side of the center line e WES3 4of 5 points out more than 1 sigma from center line same side 4 points of 5 successive points are outside the middle third range of the control field on the same side of the center line e WE4 15 points in a row within 1 sigma of center line either side 15 successive points are within the middle third range of the control field on the either side of the center line e WE5 8 points in a row more than 1 sigma of center line either side 8 successive points are outside the middle third range of the control field on the either side of the center line HNS SPC User Manual 50 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Ef out of Control Settings X Others Ease Dot s Extended Oot s Others x xil Closed to Limits enabled fone si
213. ill in the shift ID automatically Calculations General settings for calculations made by the program Control chart General settings for displaying of control charts and for data displayed on control charts Default goals Default index criteria for capability indices and Z index MPG General settings for measuring programs Operator s right Enabling further functions for the operator lowest access level Gauges e List Enabling of the gauges installed on the given measuring workstation pre selection e Select and Settings Settings for the necessary gauges testing the gauges selecting the gauges wanted to use in the Data menu for data input Sound Selecting sound effects to different program functions E mail Necessary e mail settings for functions that contains e mail sending HNS DataConnection Setting the data exchange with external measuring programs MINFO OoC DataConnection Path of the files containing the data to be forwarded to the MINFO system Sampling control Settings of the Sampling Control function e Service Enabling the Sampling Control service and giving necessary settings e Checking service Checking the Sampling Control service Automatic alerts Settings of the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert function e Service Enabling the Automatic Alert service and giving necessary settings e Checking service Checking the Automatic Alert service A
214. in case of gauge with analogous output the A D card to receive the signal has to be selected When measuring analogous signals the basis address of the A D card to be used in the given channel has to be set too The program is able to manage more measuring cards placed in one computer If a gauge with more channels is wanted to use the appropriate channel has to be selected as well If the given gauge or multiplexer has more than four channels the required channel number has to be typed in the CHN field The channel numbers which are valid in case of the selected gauge can be seen in the underside of the Channef field An external data button can be connected to the computer which is independent of the gauges and interfaces to be used The external data button can be connected by using an Advantech PCI 1761 card The input bits of the digital input output card can be connected to the gauges used on the workstation For example it is possible to start the data input with one foot switch from each gauges on the given workstation With the Settings button the communications and other parameters can be set in case of the gauges which require some settings In case of a serial gauge the communications settings the baud rate the number of the data bits etc have to be given while in case of receiving analogous signal for example the calibrations values have to be set among others The communication with the connected and adjusted g
215. in the displayed sample range can be appointed by the cursor The appointed sample is the one over which the cursor is positioned The cursor can be moved and the control chart can be turned over by the following buttons in the left down corner of the control chart 59 EE skip to the first sample of the selected sample range v M turn a page forward skip a sample forward B skip a sample backward u EM turn a page backward ea N skip to the last sample of the selected sample range Apart from these buttons the cursor can be positioned with the mouse If the sample to be appointed can be seen on the displayed chart range the sample can be appointed by clicking on it with the left mouse button The control chart can be turned over with the mouse by clicking on the right or the left side of the diagrams If the left mouse button is hold down continuously the displayed control chart is turned over in the appropriate direction 2 6 12 3 Displaying the measured values on the control chart Points on the control chart mean the mean median individual value standard deviation range of the samples depending on the kind of the chart These values are calculated by the measured values in the sample The measured values of a sample can be displayed by clicking on the given point with the right mouse button The measured values of the sample are displayed in a single wind
216. ines It is possible that the several legends cover each other so they are not fair To avoid this problem it is possible to display these legends in fix position Two display modes can be changed by clicking on the grey coloured field next to the diagrams by the right mouse button Grey coloured arrows above and under the values mark that the values are displayed not in the correct position P 2D 040 USL 20 01 UCL me CIS hoses NEP pa Mei 1 i ar vim 19 560 LSL 0 01748 ase an i UCL 0 01518 s UHL 0 00825 0 00227 AUI Pe ads Uu Zam A E S inus 6 59 2008 7 av asm lt 2 6 9 2008 7 28 a m 100 Figure 127 Displaying the center line the specification the control and the warning limits in fix position 2 6 12 6 Recording a marker An intervention or comment can be entered to the appointed sample in the Marker data window by pressing the Id button HNS SPC User Manual 95 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD Ea Marker Data X D Intervention view all Mone The intervention caused by measured parameter H gt gt S failure group F gt gt amp amp A zm O Comment Cancel 5 Enter marker data to save with sample Figure 128 Marker data An intervention can be selected from the pre defined intervention list of the given machine see the Machine Change menu item of the Database menu or an optional text comment can be given in the Marker
217. ing date of the deleting have to be set After pressing the Delete button program asks for confirmation of deleting and deletes the selected sample range after confirmation The beginning and closing date fields in the Delete Samples by Date window contain as default setting the sampling date of the first and the last sample in the database Both dates mean the 00 00 hour on the given day HNS SPC User Manual 74 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD 2 5 10 Sampling control 2 5 10 1 Status The status matrix of the Sampling Control function can be displayed in this menu item See a description about this function and about the Sampling control Status menu item of the Data menu in the Sampling control document 2 5 10 2 Event Sampling events of the Sampling Control function can be entered in this menu item See a description about this function and about the Sampling control Event menu item of the Data menu in the Sampling control document 2 5 11 Alerts The status matrix of the Automatic Alert function can be displayed in this menu item See a description about this function and about the Alerts menu item of the Data menu in the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert document HNS SPC User Manual 75 aig 2 6 Analysis menu 2 6 1 Steps of sample analysis Measured and attributed samples can be evaluated in the Anal
218. ing the sc button 2 6 12 Control chart for measured parameters The control chart of the selected sample range can be displayed in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu ES Control Chart TEST Data 3 Test DB 1 TEST TEST E E x 120 0761 UCL Sl 130 0392 130 0022 LCL 0 0555 UCL SPC x s Monitoring i CTA Normal Process General I Distribution Hormal 0 0313 Wil OS ag Bilateral 6 9 2008 TIZ a m amp 5 3 z 008 7 28 a m 1255 i Mone v Date 6 9 2008 7 28 a m 130 0390 Process is stable st 130 0179 User 0 0317 Pp 1 77 hits mm DoS Hil Opes 0 0 D DiGD Mask z 0 0330 Ppk 1 40 doc Eg Gece ara Intervention 5b B Er g Figure 117 Control chart for measured parameter Important data and figures of the control chart are the following e X x x mx diagram on the upper diagram of the control chart the mean the median the moving mean values of the measured samples or the individual values are displayed according to the kind of the chart e H s mH ms diagram on the under diagram of the control chart the range the standard deviation the moving range or the moving standard deviation values of the measured samples are displayed according to the kind of the chart e Histogram the histogram of the measured values within the selected samples is displayed in the right bottom corner of the control chart The histogram on t
219. int e Point Z2 A D the A D value of the lower calibration point e Point Z2 scale the scale value of the lower calibration point The calibration parameters can be specified by the auxiliary program enclosed to the A D card or directly by pressing the Calibration button in the A D settings window The second possibility can be used only if the given A D card has been already installed in the computer The program is able to detect the peak values of the analogous values in the modes of peak of slowly changed process and peak of quickly changed process The peak value can be specified in two ways The absolute peak value is detected as default in this case the highest is taken as measured value from more peak values It is also possible to take the first peak value as measured value by switching on the Detect first peak switch To measure the peak values a measurement starting and a stopping value defined in the scale value have to be given depending on the measurement mode e Start the measuring is started when the measured value exceeds this threshold value namely the change of the signal to be measured starts e Stop the measuring is stopped when the measured value decreases under this threshold value The stopping value has to be smaller than the starting value consistently This value is not used in the mode of peak of quickly changed process because the measuring is stopped automatically after detecting the first
220. interventions are displayed together If more interventions are recorded during the analysed time diagram can be turned over by the lt Leff and Right buttons 2 6 14 Export Measurements The measured data of the selected sample range can be exported into a text file or Excel file in the Export Measurements menu item of the Analysis menu In the setting window the name and path of the text file have to be given and the format of the export file has to be set By exporting the data into Excel table the decimal point and the date format have to be chosen too according to the operation system Export Data Selected for Analysis X File text Ea Export into Excel table Decimal point 1 234 Date format uyyy mm dd Settings HNS SPC V5 x format L4 Export E Identifiers Shift team x Abort Date time Tool poma User ID T Mask LOXECECEICLII MN N Configure export format and enter the file name Figure 132 Exporting the measuerd values of the selected samples The export file format is the same as in the Export menu item of the Data menu see the description about the Export menu item related to the measured samples of the Data menu 2 6 15 Export Interventions It is possible to display the interventions recorded to the selected sample range as a list in an export file This export can be made in the Export Interventions menu item of the
221. ion Measuring programs can be created modified removed or run in the MGP menu These functions excepting the running can be done only by the highest access level Attention It is necessary to know the measuring program in detail toward the understanding the following menu items The conception of the measuring program is not delineated in this document so it is recommended to survey the MPG Measuring Program document before using these menu items Measuring programs are always stored in the current measuring program directory hence firstly this directory has to be selected in the Select MPG directory menu item of the File menu It is practical to use several measuring program directories for the several factories In the case of numerous measuring programs it is useful to place the measuring programs several sub directories ordered in logical groups see the chapter Measuring program pre selection in the MPG Measuring Program document The access of the measuring programs are managed by the current access level and by the user ID s given in the measuring program All the measuring programs placed in the selected measuring program directory are listed on the second and third access level without reference to the user ID However on the first access level the operator can perform only the measuring programs which have been assigned to his her identifier or which have not been assigned to any user ID 2 7 2 Crea
222. ion about the Last using time ZBHB H3 88 highlighted measuring Sampling rate 4 hourly program Created by N meth Zolt n NZ J J t t 2aa8 a9 09 pesa il Close Figure 181 The measuring program selection menu The list in the selection window contains the name of the available measuring programs A measuring program can be selected with a double clicking on its name or with pressing the Modify button when the name of the given measuring program is highlighted Note If the first characters of the measuring program s name are started to type the cursor will skip to the wanted measuring program In the fields of the selection window the data of the highlighted measuring program are displayed PFOQUCL mn A measuring program contains measured and attributed parameters of one product The identifiers of this product are dispalyed in the right top section of the window Strategy The selected strategy of the measuring program Comment The optional text comment entered to the given measuring program It is recommended to given in this field information to help the measuring program selection or other instructions for the operator Last using time The running time of the measuring program is always upgraded automatically after every running The next required running of the measuring program can be calculated by the last running time and the samp
223. ion data HNS SPC User Manual 170 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO 3 Messages of the program 3 1 Review While the program is running different messages which contain some information for the users can be displayed on the screen These messages are displayed in special windows two types of these messages can be differed e Warning messages e Error messages A warning message is displayed if the operation required by the user cannot be performed or it is not suitable to the requirements conditions The warning message includes the description of the incorrect operation asking setting etc and usually gives suggestion to solve the problem An error message is displayed if the conditions necessary to the running of the program are not ensured the database or any other program field has been damaged If the error message gives suggestion what to do it is recommended to accept and perform this suggestion 3 2 Important warning messages 3 2 1 Invalid password Message Ed Password Login Error X Invalid password access disabled Enter the correct password Figure 240 Warning message Invalid password Reason The password is incorrect Suggestion If the correct password is known only the typing was wrong the correct password has to be given again Otherwise you should ask the user who controls the user register of the given factory Reference Pa
224. it is recommended to use the second way because it takes much less time 2 2 7 Copy xBase to SQL database If an SQL database is selected the content of an xBase database can be copied into this SQL database This function can be found in the Copy xBase to SQL database menu item of the File menu Ed Base SQL Database Copy X xBase database to copy E Browse L7HNS5 5PE DR TRBRSE Copy M Copy measured samples WW Copy attributed samples Sees Select path of xBase database to copy and start copying Figure 22 Copy xBase to SQL database In the xBase database to copy field should be given the path of the xBase database that is wanted to copy The database directory can be selected with the button too HNS SPC User Manual 19 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT GO Copying of the samples can be enabled by the Copy measured samples and the Copy attributed samples switches If both of these switches are off only database definitions and settings is copied onto the SQL server Copying can be started by pressing the Copy button The time of the copying depends on the size of the database to be copied and on the data access speed Database copying function can be used for transferring data from a previous xBase database to SQL server Data transfer should be made as follows 1 You should make sure of original database s logical and physical correctness by appropriate checking and correction s
225. ker in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu these data cannot be modified posterior The measured values of the highlighted samples are displayed in the list in the left under corner of the window A measured value or its status can be modified in the Measurement window which can be displayed by double clicking with the left mouse button on the given measured value x Measured value Head o Position 2 mm an Damaged Cancel Outstanding Outstanding outstanding status of the measured value Outstanding values will be skipped by all calculations Outstanding values are displayed grey coloured and are displayed in brackets in the list of the measured values Damaged damaged status of the measured value Instead of these values are displayed a grey coloured damaged sign in brackets in the list of the measured values Head a head number can be entered to the measured value This field is active only in case of a multihead machine s process but without reference to being of sub processes by heads The given measured value is not recorded on the head s process but a several control chart is applied for this head See the chapter Change the control charts for machine head position in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu Position a position number can be entered to t
226. kgroup identifiers Ho capability index on W Print Machine identifiers Frequency analysis Capability Study List English HNS Certificate for product Distribution index v Send certificate to the printer Density analysis Hungarian C ODAS E List measurements on sheel Print marker data interventions and comments with control charts Value chart analysis E Probability analysis p List certificate data on the screen E ODAS type capability analysis Control chart analysis Logo 156x65 BMPI ES No picture assigned ance Type text to print page header and configure other print formats Figure 29 Print settings The text written in the Header field is displayed in the header of every prints made by the program This field can be used for example giving the name address and other data of the manufacturer Lists can be printed by condensed way by switching on the Print condensed list switch Identifiers and other data of the current process are always displayed in the header of the prints made by the program Displaying of workgroup and machine identifiers can be disabled by switching off the Print Workgroup identifiers and the Print Machine identifiers switches Capability study list can be print also in English and in Hungarian Capability study report can be printed in two formats HNS is the default that is in text format and can also be disp
227. l sheets in case of multiple export The order of the sheets is the same as the process s order in the database Note In order to export into Excel file the program has to start Excel Excel DDE server so this function can be used on a computer whereon an Excel program has been installed The sample data which are wanted to export can be selected in the Settings field by switching on the appropriate switches Firstly the HNS SPC V5 x format switch has to be on in case of a text file Selected sample data will be recorded in the export file in order after the measured values All the measured samples of the selected process are exported as default but it is possible to export by a selected time range Firstly the by date switch has to be on and then the starting and closing date of the sample range to export has to be given Export can be started by pressing the Export button the number of the exported samples can be seen on the right side of the status row Export can be stopped by pressing the Abort button Note In case of exporting into Excel file the TMO Time Out maximum awaiting time for reply value can be bigger than 1 minute see the Special program settings Export can take longer time depending on the quantity of the data The state of the process can be seen in the status row in the right down corner of the window Meaning of the text in the status row process number sample number measured value nu
228. layed in the screen In case of choosing QDAS format a graphic report will be printed that contains also control chart and HNS SPC User Manual 23 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO distribution analysis beside the calculated statistical parameters this report format cannot be displayed on the screen See also the Analysis Capability Study menu item of the Analysis menu If the List measurements on sheet switch is on than the selected measured values used for the calculation will be displayed in the HNS capability study report beside the calculated parameters and capability indices Printing can be disabled related to the certificate Program prints the certificate if the Send certificate to the printer switch is on as default but the List certificate data on the screen switch should be switched on in order to display data on the screen Either of printing or displaying on the screen or both of them has to be switched on this is checked by the program automatically See also the Certificate menu item of the Analysis menu Marker data interventions and comments can be printed on the measured and attributed control charts by switching on the Print marker data interventions and comments with control charts switch Capability indices are always printed on every analysis report as default If capability indices are not wanted to print the switches in the No capability index on field should
229. les can be selected for analysis in the Select attributed samples menu item of the Analysis menu First step is to select the given process whose samples wanted to be analysed see the chapter Process selection After the process selection the Select Attributed Samples window is displayed This window contains the attributed samples stored in the database related to the given process S Select Attributed Samples sample data of the Sample data highlighted sample User ID Shift Team Sample Data N np Date fick Set Settings Sample size process settings related to the highlighted sampl g 38 1995 Jm Fixed igniigntea sample 9 38 1995 9 38 1995 Sample mode all failures Lontrol chart 0 samples stored in the database Tupe np related to the selected time range CL Calculate Calculate 6 18 2666 8 49 a m aes Selected samples From ep 4 ex MT actual selected sample range m sampling date and time of the first and last sample cos C CD amp i DJ hs Select first and last sample of sample range to Figure 139 Select attributed samples The attributed data displayed on the control chart can be seen in this window The columns of the list contain the following information Sample number of the sample within the given process HNS SPC User Manual 103 a Li Dat
230. lid for all failure charts of the given failure group namely if this setting are changed in any failure chart settings window it will be changed also in every failure chart settings window e Important process enable on line watching and alerting The given process can be selected to monitore by the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert service HNS SPC User Manual 60 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD After switching on the Important porcess switch the alert conditions can be set in the displayed window by pressing this button oee a detailed description about the Automatic Alert service in the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert document e Sampling control enabled The given process can be selected to monitore by the Sampling Control service e Control settings gt gt After switching on the Sampling control switch the sampling frequency can be set in the displayed window by pressing this button See a detailed description about the Sampling Control service in the Sampling control document e Automatic export The given process can be selected to the Automatic Export service The function is not defined in case of using an xBase database so this switch is not active in this case e File The name of the export file in case of enabling the Automatic Export function e Export from Date and time of the last export in case of enabling the Automatic Export fu
231. lied a diagram can be displayed by clicking the gt gt sign next to the Measured value field This diagram shows the actual displayed value of the gauge compared to the specification limits The displayed value of the gauge is being read out and being displayed continually HNS SPC User Manual 133 AAG TERRA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD while the measurement window is opened The diagram can be removed by clicking the lt lt sign If a conversion function is set to the given gauge the diagram shows the calculated value HI HNS Digimatic SMUX 4 USBMUX 4 xj lt lt Lpamaged LI Cancel caliper caliper Measuring DATA n Measuring DATA n Figure 190 Measurement window in the measuring program with diagram Attention The gauges usually need settings for example the parameters of the data transfer in case of serial gauges or the parameters of the calibration and the other measurements in case of analogues gauges These parameters have to be checked and set at the time of installation of the gauges at the several workstations see the Gauges menu item of the Settings menu The measured value can be input with the Measure button of the measurement window with the own data input switch of the gauge or of the interface Data Print Send etc button or foot switch or by the keyboard with the Enter button The readout of the measured value depends on the t
232. ling rate HNS SPC User Manual 129 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Sampling rate The required sampling frequency Created by The name and ID of the user who has created the measuring program The time of the measuring program s creation BE x p p After selecting the measuring program the MPG Editor window is displayed filled in with the data of the given measuring program The measuring program can be modified the same way as has been created see the Create menu item of the MPG menu The modified measuring program has to be saved If the MPG file name is not modified the previous modified file will be upgraded If a new MPG file name is entered the original and the modified measuring programs will exist too Displaying or deleting the MPG Log T EEE Displaying or deleting the MPG Alert Log 2 7 4 Removing the measuring program A measuring program can be deleted in the Remove menu item of the MPG menu After selecting the measuring program the program asks for confirmation of the deleting and if the confirmation is received the measuring program will be removed x ATTENTION You want to remove data from the database All related data of the selected database item will be removed Remove Press the button Delete if you really want to remove selected C l database elements Once Do you really want to remove select
233. losing the Machine window In case of increasing the number of the heads positions the program ask whether the user wants to create sub processes related to the new heads positions When new sub processes are wanted to create process settings have to set in the Process Settings window displayed automatically If more processes have been registered to the earlier heads positions it is possible to set the same settings related to all or more processes of the new heads positions This is possible by switching on the Same settings for all next head position processes switch and the Process Settings window will be displayed only once for also all the measured and all the attributed processes If Skip all next parameters button is pressed than no measured and attributed sub processes will be created related to the new heads positions The Same settings for all next head position processes switch and the Skip all next parameters buttons do not apply to the processes which have been already closed by pressing the Yes or the No button Ed Measured Processes X ATTENTION You changed the number of head 8 318 of A 12 Machine A124 machine Do you want to create new head processes for below parameter Product 549546 T Steel rivet 5 49546 T Parameter Overall lenght Skip all next parameters No Same settings for all next head processes Process registration Figure 4
234. m classes by one while leaving the lower and higher limits of the histogram are not changed 1 class It is possible to use two settings Ideal histogram settings estimated by the number of measured values can be displayed by pressing the by data button These default settings can be modified by rating the histogram to the specification limits by pressing the by spec button Default settings can be change in the Calculations menu item of the Settings menu Note Several analyses use the same histogram settings For example if the histogram settings are changed in the frequency analysis window the histogram with these changed settings will be displayed also on the control chart 2 6 7 Distribution analysis Distribution analysis of the measured values within the selected sample range can be displayed in the Analysis Distribution menu item of the Analysis menu The displayed window contains the histogram of the selected samples the density function calculated by the histogram and the linearized distribution function The actual density function calculated by the measured values is displayed with a fat turquoise coloured line In addition the ideal density function Cy Cpk 1 33 is displayed in case of normal distribution with HNS SPC User Manual 82 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO a thin green coloured line The result of the fitting test Distribution is matched or Distribution is NOT mat
235. m is displayed after performing the calculations EJ Capability Index Diagram 1F 1T TEST 1 1F 15 15 1G ioj x Sia SSS mim E 3 8 a 3 28 4 amp 4 27 2 16 2007 5 4 2007 Cmm PpePp CpeCpk Print Data list i Info Figure 137 Capability index diagram The calculated capability indices falling between the start and the end date are displayed on the diagram marked after the index criteria defined for the given measured parameter The indices which do not meet the requirements lower than the minimum value are red coloured but the acceptable indices equal or higher than the minimum value are green coloured The indices of the different capability studies are displayed in one diagram Machine capability indices are marked with triangle preliminary process capability indices with quadrate and the on going capability indices with circle see the legend in the left under corner of the window Attention The time between the displayed capability indices are not always equal to the selected time interval If any sampling was not performed during the given time interval the given capability index cannot be calculated and this value is missed on the diagram The chart can be printed by pressing the Print button to the printer selected in the Printer menu item of the File menu according to the settings in the Print settings menu item The data displayed on the capability index diagram can
236. mber 2 5 4 Import measured samples Measured samples can be imported from a text file into the program s database in the Import menu item related to measured samples of the Data menu Process can be selected and setting can be given in the Measured Sample Import window HNS SPC User Manual 69 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD All the measured samples of a selected process can be exported into a file in the Exporf menu item related to the measured samples of the Data menu The process can be selected and the settings can be given in the Measured Sample Import window Ej Measured Sample Import X Mame Code Product Parameter Llorkgroup Machine File P Browse Sampling time 2008 09 09 a7 a m User ID Shift EM import data Team b Tool x Abort reading Mask Decimal and separator 1 234 abcd ei Close Select identifiers and type file name Ty Figure 92 Measured sample import The process can be selected by pressing the Select button see the chapter Process selection Identifiers of the selected process are displayed in the topside of the window The name and the path of the text file have to be given in the File field or can be selected by the 1E button More file formats can be applied program indentifies the file format automatically Requirements for text file s format are as follows It contains measured value
237. me is filled in automatically after the computers clock as the user ID after the login information Measured values can be input by keyboard by typing the value into the given field In case of pressing the Measure button the program manages measuring of all pieces by the actual selected gauge Measured values also can be input as several measurements by pressing the button marked with the measured value number Sample input is closed by pressing the Ok button when the sample is saved in the database Program returns into the Measured Samples window where the new sample is also displayed in the sample list Before pressing the Ok button the sample data and the measured values can be modified or re measure optionally Attention Individual measurements made not by running a measuring program but in this menu item can be done with the actual selected gauge A gauge can be selected in the Gauges Select and Settings menu item of the Settings menu In addition the possible set conversion function is used 2 5 2 Delete measured samples Measured samples can be deleted in the Delete samples menu item related to measured samples of the Data menu First step is to select the given process whose samples wanted to be deleted see the chapter Process selection The Select Measured Samples window is displayed after this wherein the given sample range have to be selected Working with this window see in th
238. means in practice that the validation has to be done before each running of the measuring program e Borders of validity range The validation measurement is accepted if the measured value is between these values Note It is checked whether the borders are given correctly LL lt UL In case of faulty data entry it is not allowed to save the settings close the window with the Ok button change the gauge change the port or change the channel e tis possible to reset the validation of all the gauges automatically at logging in a new user so the gauges have to be validated again This function can be enabled with the Invalidate gauge status on changing logged in user switch The user change means giving another user ID compared to the previous logging in but the user name is not checked severally e he gauge validations and their result can be logged by switching on the Log validation measurements switch The log file is placed in the program directory with the name GaugeChk log The content of the rows in the log file date of the validation time of the validation user ID gauge port channel measured value status OK NOK LL UL time of the valid status All the validations are recorded in the log file not only the validations made in the measuring programs It is displayed in the Gauge Settings window the date and time of the last validation the end of the valid status furthermore the status of
239. measuring program Reference MPG menu Select database menu item of the File menu Measured parameter Failure group menu item of the Database menu Message MPG error file SAMPLE MPG 171 Specified machine is not found in database Q5 715 164 Error code lee Additional code F F Ch Database error Figure 257 Error message Measuring program error Reason The selected measuring program refers to a machine which cannot be found in the database Comment The program checks before opening the MPG whether the machines occur in the measuring program can be found in the actual database Suggestion Firstly check the database selection and change it if it is not correct If incorrect workgroup or machine code occurs in the measuring program change it by editing manually or delete and create the measuring program again If the given machine has not been created in the database yet or it has been deleted create the machine in the database If the workgroup or machine identifier has been modified in the database correct it in order that the same workgroup and machine code occurs in the database and in the measuring program Reference MPG menu Select database menu item of the File menu HNS SPC User Manual 178 2 INS TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Workgroup and Machine menu item of the Database menu
240. more times according to the sample size of the given failure group The attributed data input by pieces can be done by two ways entering the occurrence of the given failure or entering the OK NOK status of the piece in the regard of the given failure The Attributed Data Input window varies only in the data input column by these two data input mode B a BP a To check Missing circles To check Missing circles j Blennish ft Blennish Faulty pcs Dirty surface Faulty pcs Dirty surface _ p 2 Abort Abort T ii Enter the attributed results of piece or of sample Enter the attributed results of piece or of sample Figure 191 Attributed data input by pieces HNS SPC User Manual 134 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO The sample size of the given failure group is displayed in the Sample size field which can be modified by the operator in case of not constant sample size The number of the current piece within the sample is displayed in the To check field and the number of rejected pieces in the Faulty pcs field The number of rejected pieces is counted automatically In the case of the first data input mode the failure occurrence can be given by switching on the Occurrence switch next to the given failure In the second case the OK or NOK switch has to be switched on for each failure OK means that the piece is good regard of the given failure and NOK means that the piec
241. moving depends on the quantity of the samples related to the given sample range In case of an SQL database the removing is made by defined methods so there is no direct marking about the status of the process 2 5 3 Export measured samples All the measured samples of a selected process can be exported into a file in the Exporf menu item related to measured samples of the Data menu Process can be selected and settings can be given in the Measured Sample Export window EA Measured Sample Export P X Hame Code Product Parameter lt lt all Select Horkgroup Machine Export into Excel table Decimal point 1234 Date format uuuu mm dd File text s Settings HNS SPC V5 x format Identifiers Shift team E Export Date time Tool X Abort User ID Hask I 3 Cl by date 2008 88 19 aeo 2008 08 19 ES Choose identifiers and type file name H Figure 89 Measured sample export The process can be selected by pressing the Select button see the chapter Process selection Identifiers of the selected process are displayed in the topside of the window HNS SPC User Manual 68 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Name Code Product Product Test DEH1 TEST Parameter Data 2 Test DBIH T i Horkgroup Production Line Test DB 1 TEST Machine Machine Test DBH1 TEST Figure 90 Selecting a measured process to export If the
242. mple within the given process and the number of the measured value within the sample Measurements of a machine capability study are displayed as a sample measured values are numbered singly Measurement the measured values within the sample The measured values of a rejected sample and the outstanding values are grey coloured Damaged measurements are marked with a grey coloured damaged text instead of the measured value The values out of specification are red coloured Date sampling date and time as default The sample data displayed in this column can be selected in the drop down list in the header User ID shift ID team ID tool ID or mask ID can be displayed instead of the sampling time BACK ves svviaiesiisianaianssains the acknowledged sample status See the chapter Control chart acknowledgement in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu o Q a sign in this column means the changing of a process setting A sample range with different process settings cannot be selected only samples with the same settings can be analysed together The sample data of the highlighted sample can be seen above the list and the major process settings which were valid during the sampling can be seen on the right side of the window Sample range can be selected in two steps 1 One measured value of the first sample in the sample range has to be highli
243. mples from 09 17 2005 to 10 17 2005 Actual selected time range is always displayed in the Beginning date and the Closing date fields An optional time range also can be given in these fields after clicking the Specified time range It is possible to select samples by a given mask ID After clicking the List data by mask a mask ID can be given In case of this only the measured and attributed samples with this mask ID will be listed in the sample selection windows Attention The time range selected in this menu item is valid also for measured and attributed sample lists in the Measured samples Attributed samples and Delete samples menu items of the Data menu This setting is not valid for special analyses where beginning and closing date have to be given originally for example Capability Index Diagram Certificate Load previous measured values by Xi mx mR ms processes In case of the xi mx mR ms charts program includes the possible previous measured values stored in the database into the first samples to calculate moving mean range standard deviation The previous measured values are not considered by switching off this switch Calculated parameters control limits capability indices might be different in case of calculation by two methods 2 6 3 Select measured samples Measured samples can be selected for analysis in the Select measured samples menu item of the
244. n 140 PESE REPONS MENU isisisi aa EE Na E Ee ENa EEEa aE EEE 141 2 10 SUNN Ss TIN sara c X UH 142 2 10 1 General program SettiNGS ccccceeccccccccccesesseceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesssaeeseeeeeesseaaesaeseeeeeesessaageess 142 2 10 2 Supported database types c ccccccceccsssecceccceeeceesceeeeeescseecceccasaeceeccaseeeesscaseeeeeccaseeeessesecseseeeseoeseseeses 143 2 10 3 Database terminology NN EE 143 210 Fr AS SW ONS NRBIS LL EM 144 2404 My BOT 78 DOSsWONIS aoe a een eee a ae me ne nee eee Pere ee natu Ada SR a Id Oe nn ee eee ae ene a cU ere 145 V LUE RAN ur eerie q CPP HM 145 Be WO S TI TEE ooo tow 147 2 10 6 Calculation SOUS sacii ett EitUauu sane EU SUM caue dioi E EEEE EAEE ARANES RNE 147 210 7 C Om CE Se MNS seiersen E E Plon A dkaesth eios E eU e Dona EI 149 MOP Cr OS a a a e a E E N 151 WO S MPE SEIN ei E E Ge atibataeeindcncen seconds 151 21010 Operador S Tigh sssr E EAE E EE 157 20T O UE ee a ne E O E E E ene ee 158 PTE G AUE S ae E E E E E S 158 2 10 11 2 Gauge selectlon and SCMIAOS avesse uiua raton SY Er a Uia PaT E Edu UU RE EETA RERET ERE Ra Mea PNER 158 A WF MAUS COON T 159 2 10 11 4 Communication parameter settings Of the serial POME cccccscccccseeccsseecesececsuecesseeeesaeeeesuecesseseessaeesssesesaesessae
245. n out of the process together namely the program calculates the sample parameters by this number of pieces It can be as follows e changing is disabled e can be changed The default sample size have to be given which can be changed at the data input Chart Settings Attributed control charts are taken for more levels so also single chart settings have to be given for these levels HNS SPC User Manual 58 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO 4 Control Chart Settings X All failures chart 0 button All failures Control Limits Warning Limits Chart type np g calculated not used ize 25 zz size E USL Beo UML E E K CL 2 000 H w LSL le DoC common setting for all charts allecategories failures af this group H common settings for all failure charts of this group Set attributed control chart settings Figure 78 Control chart settings for failure group e Chart type Attributed control chart types are marked after the displayed parameter which can be as follows e np reject chart Displayed parameter number of the rejected parts in the given sample e p reject rate chart Displayed parameter number of the rejected parts in the given sample in portion to the sample size np las p e failure chart Displayed parameter number of the failures in the given sample e U failure rate chart Dis
246. n the database In the DataConnect file can occur such identifiers which cannot be found in the HNS SPC database so this data cannot be received These cases happen mainly because of the incorrect settings of the external measuring programs or incorrect measuring program references The program supports to find these errors by stopping on the errors and displaying the incorrect identifiers At the time of the configuring and testing the external measurement system the Stop on error for debugging switch has to be on to displaying the incorrect references The incorrect references are skipped if this switch is off The data with incorrect references are left in the DataConnect file as default so an error massage is displayed again at the next data loading If the Drop unidentified values switch is on during the data loading the data with incorrect references are removed from the DataConnect file and they are dropped The data format of the DataConnect file can be selected in the Decimal and separator field If incorrect decimal is set the numeric values are recorded incorrectly The DataConnect file can contain comment rows which start with or character These rows are not considered during the processing These comment rows are left in the DataConnect file as default but they are removed from the file if the Hemove comment lines from DataConnect file switch is on If the Disable Head position data loading switch is on th
247. narrow before the Code column shows the highlighted factory The colour of the icon in the beginning of the rows shows whether the user is logged in to the given factory By clicking the red coloured qi icon the Password window will be displayed where the user can log in the given factory The icon becomes green coloured i after the logging in The actual selected factory is green by opening the table because the user has logged in to this factory A function related to a factory can be done only after the logging in to it Attention The logging in to a factory is not the same as the selecting the factory see also the Select factory menu item of the File menu The code and the name of the actual selected factory are always displayed in the left under corner of the main window Selected factory can be only one but the user here can log in to more factories The logging in is valid only in this table after closing this window the logging in will be deleted At the opening this table the actual selected factory will be green again Note The logging in to a factory is done according to the password settings related to the given factory See also Password menu item of the Settings menu Creating a new factory can be done with the Add new button in this window See the further steps in the chapter New factory The highlighted factory can be removed from the database by pressing the Delete button See the
248. ncel Sample size pe Cancel raw pieces E Omre o Enter data of the attributed sample Figure 94 Attributed sample input The failure occurrence in the sample can be given in the list on the right side of the window but the sample data sample s statuses and markers can be entered in the fields on the left side of the window In case of looking all failures strategy the number of the faulty pieces and in case of not constant sample size the sample size have to also be given Sample input is closed by pressing the Ok button when the sample is saved in the database Program returns into the Attributed Samples window where also the new sample is displayed in the sample list Before pressing the Ok button the attributed samples can be modified optionally It is possible to modify a sample stored in the database by sample by pressing the Modify button or by pieces by pressing the button 2 5 6 Delete attributed samples Attributed samples can be deleted in the Delete samples menu item related to attributed samples of the Data menu First step is to select the given process whose samples wanted to be deleted see the chapter Process selection The Select Attributed Samples window is displayed after this wherein the given sample range have to be selected Working with this window see in the Select attributed samples menu item of the Analysis menu Attention Attr
249. nction See a detailed description about the Automatic Export service in the Automatic export document 2 3 11 2 Attributed process table The attributed process registration attributed process settings found in the actual factory can be displayed in a table in the Process settings Table menu item of the Database menu In this table can be reached all functions creating changing removing related to the attributed processes _iolx Product xaliy m Horkgroup kan Machine lt all gt T Head Position Sample Settings Product Failure group Workgroup Machine Sample Sample Sample size Size mode mode pcs Chart type E 5 m o a 1F 1T FG 1 sara 15 26 Most cri Uariable ie8g Hju gt Delete machine assigning processes fidd new process gt gt by parameter Change Cancel Humber of processes 2 Add new process gt gt by product Change Ok Figure 80 Attributed process table In the table there are always displayed the attributed processes belonging to the product workgroup and machine which is selected in the drop down lists in the window s left top corner If the all item is selected in these lists all the attributed processes in the actual factory will be displayed By switching on the Head Position switch the sub processes related to heads positions will also be displayed If there is not defined any attributed process belonging to the selected p
250. nfhns eu gt N meth zolt n EERE J znemethi hnz eu 3 yi Varga Istvan mx3statatatae3C3GES 1 Zwvargalhns eu gt fidd user Modify Remove Remove user from E mail address lists lt gt Remove Configure the password system and login modes Figure 207 Personal passwords To be able to use the personal password system firstly the user register has to be created on the Personal sheet Attention The user register has to contain at least one user on the highest 3 access level a system administrator otherwise the personal password system cannot be used This is checked automatically when the personal password system is selected and it is not allowed to use the personal password system if any person on the highest access level does not occur in the user register A new user can be entered by pressing the Add user button Each user has a personal identifier so a user ID can occur only once in the register The user register of the factories in the database can be displayed by pressing the button next to the User ID field It is possible to copy a user into the actual factory by pressing the Copy button If the Skip multiple user definitions view first occurrence only switch is on each user is listed only once even if he she is registered in more factories x User ID a Hame eee E mail o Cancel passwor SS Set user data and granted access level Access
251. nge Date sampling date and time 11 C ID of the user who has input the sample Mask mask ID entered to the sample ee eee sample size DB D eee een number of the rejected parts in the sample and their rate compared to the sample size Intervention intervention entered to the sample Comment comment entered to the sample In addition the comment that refers to the automatic acknowledgement of an alert is displayed in this field See the Automatic Out of Control monitoring and alert document 2 6 20 2 Appointing a sample on the control chart Number of displayed samples on a control chart is not the same as the number of the selected samples as usual It can be selected more samples than the displayed maximum 255 samples If the selected sample range cannot be displayed on a control chart together it will be necessary to turn over the control chart The several samples within the displayed sample range can be appointed by the cursor The appointed sample is the one over which the cursor is positioned The cursor can be moved and the control chart can be turned over by the following buttons in the left down corner of the control chart 2 skip to the first sample of the selected sample range v turn a page forward EN een skip a sample forward BR skip a sample backward uU
252. nly capital letters in the mask ID the upper case letters can be entered switch is on e Tool If a changeable tool is defined see the Machine menu item of the Database menu the tool ID entry window is displayed after the last measurement qualification of a measured parameter failure group It is possible to get the user to enter the tool ID compulsory by the required switch and it is possible to get the previous entered tool ID offered automatically e Sampling time can not be modified by the operator The sampling date and time offered in the Sample Codes window automatically cannot be modified by the operator if this switch is on e Show M type measurement between MPG s value lists It is possible to set whether the list of the measured values input in the M items they are not stored in the database are displayed in the measuring program window e Show MX type measurement between MPG s value lists It is possible to set whether the list of the measured values input in the MX items measuring of a not identified parameter are displayed in the measuring program window If these switches are off the next measurement window of the given M MX item will be displayed but the measured values that have been already entered cannot be seen HNS SPC User Manual 153 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD In the measuring program window it is displayed the list of the measured values of 14 items toget
253. not defined any machine under the selected workgroup then the no data text is written in the first row of the table The black narrow before the Code column shows the highlighted machine Creating a new machine can be done with the Add new button in this window See the further steps in the chapter New machine A new machine is created under the workgroup which is selected in the drop down list in the window s right top corner The highlighted machine can be removed from the database by pressing the Delete button See further steps in the chapter Remove machine The highlighted machine can be duplicated by pressing the Copy button Firstly the Machine window appears filled in with the data of the machine to be copied excepting the identifier code The fields are filled in can be changed excepting the number of the heads positions and the intervention s list See also the chapter New machine Last step of the copying is choosing the database items wanted to copy and then the pressing the Copy button x Items to copy Workgroup B Users Machine Sample Control events Iv Interventions Product Measured parameters W Measured processes m Failure groups attributed parameters iv Attributed processes Select database levels to be copied Figure 52 Copying a machine Note The database items are under each other can be selected only in order from up to down consiste
254. ns Of a failure GrOUP riobainnean eaaa E ORE EE uhr E OOE T E OADE EuS D TOTES E E OaE EEE S OORTE S 110 Fig re 153 ETATE EEUU memm m 110 Figure 154 Pareto analysis Dy failure COSE eie pta bac evita Oan M ps cana bx blu e uev a BORA aia aside Rc bie dea Dew sRUES RENT entum ede eee ara aaa dana deg RD bur s a n ee 111 Figure 155 Exporting the attributed samples of the selected sample range sss essen enne nnn nna nnns nns aa annes sena n reren ananas 111 Figure 156 Exporting the interventions of the selected samples essei ees see nahen enn nna nnne nessuna ss rris sus a sans ss sssa aane sss sa aas r nisse aan 112 Figure 157 Text file with the exported interventions eei sees nnnnnnnnnu nnne rss nnaa ah nn ss susa asses essa aisi rris suas sans EEEE ass resina saris nsa snas 112 Figure 158 Excel file with the exported interventions s sessi sessi eese nn nhan nnns essai ass r rss se aa rr rris essa sais sss ssa asser senes sar r sse nnee ns 113 Figure 159 Settings of the summarized Pareto analysis by product 0 cccccccccssseesscecennseseeccennauseecessaauasseeesaaauasaeessnsaaueessessaasasscessaaaasueessanaasesessnaaansees 114 Figure 160 Settings of the summarized Pareto analysis by machine isses esee na nee na nnns nns snh aa se snis essa ares ss sssa asseris saa rr rris naa ann ns 114 Figure 161 Settings of the summarized Pare
255. ns in the start up windOw sss sees 157 Figure 224 The list of the installed Gauges ira par Fou tan Fa RR ERR pnd lela o CHR RR v Fee ORE a ae ese ga ea Van deed ase gna ee e Orat M Pales xpo EU EPA E 158 Fig r 225 aO SOUS todos ue LO MM Lm ME lE i ME e IE EE 158 PIQUE 220 Gauge CONMMO SOUS M 160 Fig re 227 Ga g Validation Mm P nee oe 160 Figure 228 Result of the gauge validation is good not good ssssssssisissssesssssss essen enne nenne nns na ann s ess sn aisi sess ss aa sr nnns essa rans sss s snas n aa nnns 161 Figure 229 Communication parameter settings of the serial port eise enean nnne nna nne n sehn aa sh sr ss sn aa aas n sies sare seres sanare nsns aant 161 Figure 2 90 AID SOMINGS T P ee 162 Figure 231 So0ou und settings TREO ee ee ETC DET nc A mmuLI m 163 gio PI EP A mr SOUS ee dates cc noe sts erate LUTTE 164 Fig r 233 ANS DataConnecti n SOMOS usc centu osetia crt cies oc eaaa see RUM cu E MER EL MELDE I MMC PM LI Ip RC LM MUI ema 165 Figure 234 Selecting the MINFO DataConnect Cire CtOIy cccccscceeccccnscceeescennscuseescesscceescessansuseecensaaussseescsaaedsuescessacuaessessaausessnsaaasesscsssacuesseessacuasess 166 Figure 235 Window Menu MENT T Oo a
256. nt n CEeratdienteai sta CU mqiesebei ist scio Diar te uad Duis Be e tto Opel ide cuu Er te e pude iac ed 82 20o BS TUCO qM RE UN T ERERERRSCRRN 85 20 9 PrcuiePie BiU sec RR ETE Dem 85 2010 Cae VA Pep A cem 86 2 6 11 Measurements diagram EE ms 88 2 6 12 Control chart for measured parameters sssesssssssssssssseeee esee nnne nnns nnn nnns ness nnns na nnns 90 2 0 12 1 Meaning of the data on the control CHAN scissors inert adsutx de auan E EeaEvu bbxp An Pax bak ruber Ad SAPE xc ORE DRM SIR RARE RRFER fada Rea FRU D RR dw Edd oda 91 2 6 12 2 Appointing a sample on the control chart eei sseeei isses esee esee esas ska saa a a IER EIER ERE RENE NR RAE NR RA Raga gana 2a 93 2 6 12 3 Displaying the measured values on the control CHAME ccccccsseececeeeeeececneeecsanseeeeeseeeessaseaeesssaeaeeeesaneeeessaneneessananes 93 2 6 12 4 Change the control charts for machine head position eeissssessisssessissssesee essen nnne nnne nna nnne nnns 94 2 6 12 5 Change the display range of the control CHAPE ccccccssccccssesscccnsesssccusecsceusnssccusunsecusansssensassescesausescssausessssausesensaaess 94 2 0 TAO Recording a MAKO NITET T TET c me 95 20 12 7 Gohtrol chart acknoWIBdOgel Tellus adeseeuuteteev2z ako asian races ta ad nkt ec cna Fo F0 DH ax DR PELA du aM tetas tear EIN EEE EEIEIEE NEER 97 2 6 12 8 Rejecting a sample on the control chart ee
257. ntifiers the database items so when modified all database elements in the relations have to be modified according to the database relations Hence the modification of the code takes time depending on the size of the database the state of the modification can be seen on the screen Stopping the program Ctrl Alt Del Reset turning the computer off while the modification is underway may result in damage to the database relations and loss of data HNS SPC User Manual 54 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD In the Failure group Remove menu item of the Database menu a failure group can be deleted from a selected product of the actual factory Selecting the failure group is accordingly done the same way as with the modification of a failure group selecting a product and a failure group After selecting the failure group the program asks for confirmation of the deleting and once confirmation is received it removes the failure group from the database 2 3 9 3 Remove failure group Attention When removing a failure group all data belonging to the failure group is deleted the attributed processes related to this failure group and all the attributed data related to these processes The time of removing depends on the quantity of the data related to the given failure group In case of an SQL database the removing is made by defined methods so there is no direct marking about the status of the process 2 3 9 4 Failure g
258. ntly and only the items under the machine can be selected Interventions Measured Attributed processes In case of selecting Measured Attributed processes the new machine will be related with the same measured parameters and failure groups as the earlier machine and process settings will be the same The intervention list of the highlighted machine is displayed on the underside of the window HNS SPC User Manual 36 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO If there is not defined any intervention related to the selected machine then the no data text is written in the first row of the intervention s list The black narrow before the Name column shows the highlighted intervention Creating a new intervention can be done with the Add new button in this window See the further steps in the chapter New intervention A new intervention is created under the machine which is highlighted in the list on the window s topside The highlighted intervention can be removed from the database by pressing the Delete button See the further steps in the chapter Remove intervention The intervention list of the highlighted machine can be exported by pressing the Export button and an intervention list can be imported to the highlighted machine by pressing the Import button See also the chapter Intervention export and import A machine s data can be modified by rewriting this data in the table The changing will be val
259. nu 2 10 1 General program settings Settings related to the whole program can be found in the General program settings menu item of the Settings menu ES General Program Settings X nm Support text input fields with list Drop down list with data given earliers in the field List length d Selection menus used in loop Product selection list ordered by name Enabled characters in identifiers SGL MakwM e Mirko hihi l l 2 a a a on a an Fra Ce a4 MAMERMIWVMORnROROMURUPO Comma character can be used W Save window position and size T Use HDI windows for analysis diagrams Set general program settings Figure 202 General program settings The settings are the following Support text input field with list the previously typed data are listed in the given input field for example in the xBase database selection or in the sample codes windows as a drop down list The list length can also be set Selection menus used in loop here can be set whether in case of closing a window the program returns into the main window or into the previous window If this switch is on the program goes back into the previous window otherwise into the main window Example After closing the Measured Parameter Settings window when a measured parameter has been modified the program steps into the Select Measured Parameter window and than into the Product window if this switc
260. ode is valid for all name field of the Failure Group Data window By pressing the LEI button next to the Code field the reserved ID s codes of the failure groups defined in the given factory can be listed as usual and a failure group s data can be copied into the fields of this window This function simplifies the creation of the failure groups that are the same or similar to each other HNS SPC User Manual 53 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD Ef Failure Group Data i X Code mE Language gt 1 lt Mame Categories I I dE Currency Z goal 45H MINFO OoC data Set failure group data enter failure codes names costs and category names Figure 72 Failure group data Maximum 100 failures can be defined inside a failure group by giving the failure code and name It is possible to sort the failures by predefined categories Firstly the maximum five categories should be recorded A failure can be sorted in a category by switching on the appropriate switch which can be found after the failure name field in the columns marked with numbers T 5 Tittles of the columns mark the number of the category One failure can be sorted in more categories It is possible to give cost data for the several failures in the cosf column and the currency can also be given In case of giving the cost data also Pareto analysis by cost can be done whic
261. ode of OoS values 2 de nn Simple traditional Check and set your MPG configurations Figure 220 MPG Settings Others e MPG List by The measuring programs can be ordered in the MPG selection widow by the following ways e displaying by the name in alphabetical order default e displaying by the creating time first is the measuring program which was created at the oldest time e displaying by the time of last using first is the measuring program which was run at the oldest time e Display automatic control charts when OoC occurs only When a measuring program is created automatic chart displaying can be set for the several processes see the Create menu item of the MPG menu If this switch is on the given control chart is displayed automatically only if an Out of Control case occurs after saving the last sample e Marker intervention comment window appears automatically on OoC The Marker Data window is opened automatically on the control chart which is displayed automatically if an Out of Control case occurs on the chart after saving the last sample e Operator has to set intervention or comment on OoC A marker must be entered if the Marker Data window is displayed automatically because of an Out of Control The Marker Data window cannot be closed without entering an intervention or comment HNS SPC User Manual 155 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD X DO Intervention MEM
262. odified during the analysis The modified settings of the attributed processes can be saved in the Save process settings menu item related to the attributed samples of the Analysis menu The settings can be saved severally by the switches in the Save Settings window Appropriately only the enabled settings are stored in the database The settings can be saved related to the single control charts severally x Save l Base chart for all failures F 1 Failure category chart C 4 Failure category chart F 3 Failure category chart E 4 Failure category chart 5 Failure category chart Failure charts by failures Settings w Chart type Control Limit settings Warning Limit settings Out of Control settings a for Stored Samples agb for Next Samples Select items to save current settings parts Figure 140 Save attributed process settings Settings can be saved by two ways e Saving for Stored Samples Modified settings will be valid for the selected sample range the settings of the selected sample range are updated with the modified settings e Saving for Next Samples Modified settings will be valid for the samples which will be recorded after this See also the description about the Save process settings menu item related to the measured process HNS SPC User Manual 104 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Attention Program makes a sample border into the p
263. odified posterior after closing the Attributed Data Input window with the Ok button Accordingly when the measuring program is aborted the user cannot go back into the Attributed Data Input window and if the attributed data input is made at the end of the measuring program the Closing Inputs window is displayed before the Attributed Data Input window If changeable tool is specified for the given machine see the Machine menu item of the Database menu the ID of the applied tool has to be given at the running of the measuring program The tool ID has to be given for every measured and attributed parameter process separately after the last data input of the given process x Tool Enter tool code to assign sample Figure 193 Entry of the tool ID Maximum 16 characters can be entered in the Tool Code field In case of giving one tool ID again it is important to give it alike because of the later filtering HNS SPC User Manual 135 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO The name of the Toof field can change according to the database terminology of the actual factory see the Database terminology menu item of the Database menu Note It is not recommended to give a 16 character length number for the tool ID because in case of exporting this tool ID into Excel file the last character will be changed into 0 automatically In case of using complex identifiers it is recommended to se
264. odified process settings are the same as the settings of the previous or the following process period the given border can be removed This function can be reached in the Process settings Check menu item of the Database menu After selecting the process the checking starts and the unnecessary setting borders will be removed The checking s status can be seen in the Setting Border Checking window The process can be stopped by pressing the Cancef button Ef Setting Border Checking X Checking of setting borders is under processing Please wait Removed borders Figure 81 Checking the process setting s borders Attention The removed setting borders cannot be set back afterwards 2 3 12 Sampling control events The list of the sampling events connected to the Sampling Control function can be entered in this menu item See a description about this function and about the Sampling control events menu item of the Database menu in the Sampling control document HNS SPC User Manual 62 S MUN silk DEVELOPMENT C0 LTD 2 4 Process selection Before using many functions of the program firstly the given process has to be selected A process means a measured or attributed parameter of a product connected to a machine A parameter can also be connected to the machine s heads or positions these will be sub processes See also the Measured process and Attributed process menu items of t
265. oduct code occurs in the database and in the measuring program Reference MPG menu Select database menu item of the File menu HNS SPC User Manual 177 aa iia Select MPG directory menu item of the File menu Product menu item of the Database menu Message HNS SPC Error HPG error Dfile SAHPLE HPs 171 Specified parameter iz not found in database QD 2TEST 1 Error code ez Additional code F p Ch Database error Figure 256 Error message Measuring program error Reason The selected measuring program refers to a parameter which cannot be found in the database Comment The program checks before opening the MPG whether the parameters occur in the measuring program can be found in the actual database Suggestion Firstly check the database selection and change it if it is not correct If incorrect parameter identifier measured parameter name or failure group code occurs in the measuring program change it by editing manually or delete and create the measuring program again If the given parameter has not been created in the database yet or it has been deleted create the parameter in the database If the parameter identifier measured parameter name or failure group code has been modified in the database correct it in order that the same parameter identifier occurs in the database and in the
266. omatic services are running in the program in the actual selected database factory so it is not recommended to stop the program to change the database the factory because the automatic services will shut down Suggestion If the automatic services are not wanted to stop you should not exit from the program database factory HNS SPC User Manual 175 2S MUS TECNICAL DEVELOPMENT C0 LID 3 3 Error messages 3 3 1 SQL database error Message SQL Database Error Error Category 33 Error Code Unknown user name or password gt Alias SOQLZ000 DeyServer O00BC gt Server message Microsoft ODBC SQL Server Oris Figure 251 Error message SQL database error Reason see the text of the error message the error code and error message displayed by the database Comment see the text of the error message the error code and error message displayed by the database Suggestion generally these errors are database or network errors so you should ask the local system administrator of the database and the network Reference The chapter Starting the program 3 3 2 Database error The general error message window can be seen on the following figure HNS SPC Error Database can mot be opened Check database directory Error code 34 Additional code F Eb Database error Figure 252 The error message window
267. omatically or enables the manual starting of the measuring when the set value of the input bit occurs The error detection time of the program A D card cannot be accessed does not work or for example the started measurement does not finish has to be given in the TMO field in second Usually it is not necessary to change the default 3 seconds but as the program uses this TMO value to the measuring control the increasing of this value can be required The parameters above can be set by the documentation of the A D card perhaps more cards by the calibration data and by practical experiences In case of controlled measurements usually it is required to connect the control signal given by the gauge suitably perhaps signal level adjustment can also be necessary Depending on the measuring mode of the analogous signal the possible settings of the operating parameters of the A D cards are different but the settings of all the measuring modes are done in the window above The input fields and switches of the settings which are not defined in the given measuring mode are disabled The A D peak of quickly changed process measurement is hardware dependent so the time of the measurement can be modified with a Registry setting if necessary The time of the measurement can be defined with the number of the measurements optionally The measured value measuring time diagram can be displayed on the screen after the measurement The displaying of
268. on which can be found next to the Add button The information of the measured parameter and the machine have to be given in the displayed window An earlier defined not identified parameter can be modified by pressing the f Change button which is displayed instead of the Select button The measured values collected by the MX item can be set together into samples by means of the S item E Measuring of Not Identified Parameter MPG Mx X Parameter Horkugroup Machine Unit fo Head a H Sample size b m Position B Decimals HB 1 C1 Bi Specification Tupe Bilateral Y Nominal value p C 2 6 61 Upper difference m C3 6 661 Lower difference la C4 BABAL USL Cmax cz C5 6 90081 LSL min es ea U Set the database not defined parameter to measure sample Figure 167 Creation of a not identified parameter of an MX item The measured parameter has to be selected by pressing the Select button out of the parameter of the product selected on the Header sheet This means selecting a process namely a measured parameter and a machine and a head position inside the machine in case of a sub process If a sub process is selected the sample has to be taken from the selected head position as default The head position number can also be given by the operator at the running of the measuring program before the first measurement of the part
269. one product generally but it can be displayed by enlarging the window at the gt gt sign Firstly the process whose control chart is wanted to display has to be appointed in this list than the Control chart button has to be pressed The control chart can also be displayed by double clicking the given process in the list The control chart displayed in the measuring program contains also the last recorded sample It is also possible to record interventions and or comments on the operator s control chart HNS SPC User Manual 138 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO In case of measured processes it is also possible to display the measurements diagram Firstly the process has to be appointed in the list than the Measurements bution has to be pressed The measured values of the samples are displayed on the measurements diagram that samples are displayed on the control chart If machine capability study is selected for a process only the measurements diagram can be displayed ant the measurements diagram will be displayed if the Chart automatically switch in on in the measuring program After closing the displayed control chart or measurements diagram the program returns into the selection menu where another process can be selected If the MPG data input process can be re started without closing MPG window switch is on on the Input Measuring sheet in the MPG menu item of the Settings menu the measuring
270. ool ID fields are disabled See also the Machine menu item of the Database menu Mask the mask ID entered to the given sample Rejected sample the rejected status of the given sample These samples are skipped in all calculations Rejected samples are grey coloured in the sample list See the chapter Rejecting a sample on the control chart in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu Acknowledged sample the acknowledged status of the given sample See the chapter Control chart acknowledgement in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu Intervention the intervention entered to the given sample See the chapter Recording a marker in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu HNS SPC User Manual T2 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Comment the comments entered to the given sample See the chapter Recording a marker in the Analysis Control chart menu item of the Analysis menu these data cannot be modified posterior A whole sample can be input onto the given process by pressing the Add button Ed Attributed Sample Input Sample date and time 2008 08 19 p3 21 p m Failure Mame User ID Rejected 3 2 fault Shift Acknowledged au 3 fault Team Tool Hask Intervention view all None Remark Y k Ca
271. orrectly the correct ID has to be given If the user ID is correct and the operator has to run the given measuring program you should give right to run the measuring program for the operator on the Header sheet of the MPG Editor Reference Create menu item of the MPG menu If the message is displayed for a user on the 2 or 3 access level Reason here are no measuring programs in the selected MPG directory Comment Only the measuring programs placed in the selected MPG directory are displayed in the measuring program selection window Suggestion Select the correct MPG directory if the selection was not correct Reference Select MPG directory menu item of the File menu 3 2 4 MPG saving error Message The MPG file must be stored in the current MPG Directory Figure 243 Warning message MPG saving error Reason he measuring program is tried to save not into the selected MPG directory Comment Measuring programs can be saved only into the selected MPG directory Suggestion Save the measuring program into the selected MPG directory or another MPG directory has to be selected whereto the measuring program is wanted to save Reference Select MPG directory menu item in the File menu Create menu item in the MPG menu HNS SPC User Manual 172 PANG TENA DEVELOPM
272. ow HNS SPC User Manual 93 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO USL LSL USL m 6 9 2008 7 28 a m E BE xl Measurement Head Pos 20 060 2 20 035 3 20 055j 4 20 0430 E 20 0484 x 0 04080 Max 31 20 055 User ID 200 R 0 0320 Max 51 20 046 Shift s 0 01137 PRO 41 20 043 Team bar zXimx chart aCL 234 h s chart M T bud DPHtotal 14000pecs Figure 123 Displaying the measured values on the control chart The list in the left side of the window shows the measured values and the head position numbers possibly connected to the measured values Measured values are displayed graphically too compared to the sample mean By clicking on a point the program skips onto the given measured value in the list All the calculated and stored data of the sample are displayed in the underside of the window The left field contains the mean the range and the standard deviation of the sample The middle field contains the maximum and minimum values of the sample and the nearest measured values to the maximum and minimum values and to the mean as well as the number of these measured values inside the sample The sample data user shift team mask and tool ID are displayed in the right field Since the middle and the right fields contain more than three data so these lists can be turned over The OoC information can be seen at the bottom of the window related to the given sample 2 6 12 4 Change the cont
273. p are deleted the machines of the workgroup the intervention lists of the machines the measured and attributed processes related to this workgroup and all the measured and attributed data related to these processes The time of removing depends on the quantity of the data related to the given workgroup In case of an SQL database the removing is made by defined methods so there is no direct marking about the status of the process 2 3 3 4 Workgroup table The workgroup registration workgroup data found in the actual factory can be displayed in a table in the Workgroup Table menu item of the Database menu HNS SPC User Manual 30 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD In this table can be reached all functions creating changing copying removing related to workgroups ES Workgroup b x Code Mame by Language 1 Name by Language 2 gt SE Horkaroup Ate Workgroup R18 Horkgroup AZzA Horkgroup AZA Add new Delete Copy Change Cancel Change Ok Figure 42 Workgroup table If there is not defined any workgroup in the given factory then the no data text is written in the first row of the table The black narrow before the Code column shows the highlighted workgroup Creating a new workgroup can be done with the Add new button in this window See the further steps in the chapter New workgroup The highlighted workgroup can be removed from the database by pressing the Delete
274. parate the several parts of this It is possible to abort the running of the measuring program with the Cancef button in the measurement or in the attributed data input window x Do last APG input again Do last MPG input row again Abort MPG inputs E fibort Choose MPG abort mode E Figure 194 Aborting the measuring program The measuring program can be continued by three ways Do last MPG input again It is possible to repeat the last measurement qualification for example in case of a faulty measurement than the measuring program can be continued The last measured value wanted to re measure will be grey colour and the status marking arrow flickers in this field Do last MPG input row again It is possible to repeat the measurements qualifications of the last piece in case of product strategy or the last parameter in case of parameter strategy than the measuring program can be continued All the measured values wanted to re measure will be grey colour and the status marking arrow flickers in the first measured value of the last piece parameter F3 RE eee Abort MPG inputs The program exits from the running measuring program The measuring program cannot be continued and the measured and attributed data collected in the aborted measuring program are dropped The measuring program differs in case of device strategy In this case more parameters of one piece can be mea
275. path to MPG files Figure 18 Select MPG directory Path of the MPG directory have to be given in the MPG path field This directory can be searched also with the amp button Last selected directory can be set back by pressing the Restore bution Note Before displaying the measuring program list the database references and the identifiers are checked in every measuring program which can be found in the selected MPG directory If the identifiers cannot be found in the actual selected factory for example not the correct MPG directory is selected than the program give an error message MPG directory can be the same as the database directory or can be a sub directory of the database directory but it can be also another directory without reference to database directory It is recommended to place the measuring programs of the several factories in several directories In this case MPG directory has to be changed at the changing a factory HNS SPC User Manual 17 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO 2 2 4 Select GPI directory The program always searches for the picture files displayed in the measuring programs in a defined GPI directory This directory has to be selected in the Select GPI directory menu item of the File menu Ed Select GPI Directory X GPI path fes lH CMHNS SPC DATBRBARSE PICTURES Restore Cancel Enter the path to GPI and BHP files Figure 19 Select GPI directory Path
276. peak value or after running out the measuring time defined by the program this time can be changed with a special Registry setting within certain limits As the analogous signals can be disturbed by noise it is possible to filter the random noises and disturbing impulses The size of the value which typifies the noise to be filtered has to be given in A D value The measured value will not be taken into account which differs greater than the given noise value compared to the previous measured value the noise value to be set can be determined in empirical way If O is given in the Noise field the noise detection is switched off The A D cards supported by the program have digital inputs which can be used to control the A D measurements The settings of the measuring control by the input bit have to be given in the Measuring Control field of the window e Allowing the measuring control by the input bit can be enabled by switching on the Enabled switch this time the other settings which can be used in the given measuring mode are allowed e he number of the bit to be used has to be given in the Digital input bit field numbered from 0 HNS SPC User Manual 162 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO e The active value of the input bit the signal level used for the control can be given in the Bit value field that can be 0 or 1 e In the Bit function group it can be selected whether the program starts the measuring aut
277. played parameter number of the failures in the given sample in portion to the sample size u n Attention It is recommended to use p and w rate charts in case of a not constant sample size to be comperable several samples to each other np and charts should be used in case of smaller sample size deviation These chart types are marked with sign in case of a not constant sample Size e Size Number of points that are displayed together on a control chart e K CL Constant for control limit calculation that determines the width of the control range the value can be set from 2 to 3 e Control limits Control limits can be calculated by the program or entered by the user manually e Warning limits Warning limits can be calculated by the program entered by the user manually or not used A constant value have to be given in case of calculated warning limits by pressing the K button This constant is used for calculating the warning limits and it can range from 1 to 3396 This value means the difference of the warning range and control range in the percent of the control range Default values can be set by pressing the Default button HNS SPC User Manual 59 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD eT x ri n K HD ZE 13 E a K WD rzr f3 E Detail Set HL constants Figure 79 Setting the K value for warning limit s calculation Note Warning limits are only displayed on the cont
278. ple range i window Help Close fall windows Minimize Call windows Restore all windows Cascade fall windows gt Head diameter 549546 T 4 10 4 11 gt Head lenght 549548 T 4 10 4 11 Set current l gt Stalk diameter 549548 T A 10 A 11 Reset selection I M 549548 T 549548 T A 10 A 11 Figure 236 Set current and reset selection Each selected sample range displayed in this menu can be set as current sample range and the selection can be reset The opened analysis windows of the several selected sample ranges are displayed as the sub menu items of the given sample range The analysis windows are marked with the following identifiers sequentially name of the analysis product code measured parameter name failure group code workgroup code machine code head number position number if the selection is related to head position Is Window Help Close all windows Minimize Call windows Restore all windows Cascade all windows 7 Head diameter 549548 T14 10 4 11 gt Head lenght 549548 T 4 10 4 11 r 17 Stalk diameter 549548 T A 10 A 11 Seb current Reset selection 1x M 549548 T 549548 T A 10 4 11 Minimize Restore Cascade Frequency Diagram 549546 T Stalk diameter 4 10 4 11 Density Diagram 549545 T Stalk diameter 4 10 4 11 Control Chart 549549 T Stalk diameter 4 10 4 11 Figure 237 Opened anaysis win
279. process by the time graphically The diagram can be made in the Capability index diagram menu item of the Analysis menu Firstly the process has to be selected by the usual way than the Capability index diagram settings window is displayed Es Capability Index Diagram Start date 2088 06 16 End date 2088 03 83 Time interval 23239 C indexes by months 2 indexes by weeks de C daily indexes gt A days Set the time range and select index type Figure 136 Capability index diagram settings The analysed time has to be selected with giving the start and the end date and the time interval of the capability index calculation has to be changed The start date means the start time 00 00 but the end date means the end time 24 00 of the given day Capability indices can be calculated by the months by the weeks or by one or more days of the selected time range with choosing the appropriate switch HNS SPC User Manual 101 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Capability index diagram is independent from the other analyses so the analysed process has to be selected specially This selection does not have an effect on the possible analysed sample range selected previously After giving the settings the program makes the calculations for the selected time The calculation takes time depending on the quantity of the data the state of the process can be seen in the status line The capability index diagra
280. program can be started again with the Start button after saving the collected data If the re starting of the measuring program is disabled the measuring program can be run only once so the measuring program window has to be closed with the Close button after saving the data and displaying the control charts The measuring program can be run again only after a new selection If the measuring program is aborted the measurements and qualifications are not continued and the program returns into the main window of the measuring program In this case the measuring program can be re started with the Starf button independently whether the re starting is enabled The operator s control chart and measurements diagram can be managed by the same way as on the higher access levels see the Analysis Control chart Measurements diagram menu items of the Analysis menu but some functions are disabled for the operator In case of displaying the control chart after running the measuring program directly it is possible to save the recorded intervention or comment for the given sample of all the processes control charts occur in the measuring program This function can be enabled with the Save this marker data for all samples of the MPG switch in the Marker Data window Ed Marker Data X n Intervention view all None The intervention caused by measured parameter H gt gt S failure group E gt gt
281. ptional time range defined by a beginning and a closing date can be set Ef Date Range Settings X All data Range by C Data of entered days 1 E days Beginning date C Last week data Elapsed time C Last month data C Last quarter data 6 C Last year data Beginning date F E C Specified date range Closing date Special list of samples C List data by mask W Load previous measured values by AL mx mH ms processes Specify the date range and other settings of data selection for analysis Figure 96 Selection a time range for analysis In case of the times which are marked with a sign the way of the time calculation also have to be set out of the following two possibilities Range by beginning date First day of the selected time means the beginning date of the given time range For example In case of choosing the Last month data the beginning date is the first day of the actual month and the closing date is the current day of the month This setting means on 17 10 2005 the samples from 10 01 2005 to 10 17 2005 HNS SPC User Manual 76 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO The same day of the previous time means the beginning date of the given time range For example In case of choosing the Last month data the beginning date is the same day of the previous month and the closing date is the current day of the current month This setting means on 17 10 2005 the sa
282. r selected in the Printer menu item of the File menu This report can be saved as a text file firstly the file name and path has to be given in the white field or searched by the button and the Save button has to be pressed HNS SPC User Manual 86 PUNS inch DEVELOPMENT CO LID Ed On going Process Capability B x Date of appraising 8 22 2008 1 4 p m E Appraised byv Product TEST Product Test DB 1 drawing number Parameter name Data 1 Test DB Z1 CTO Normal epecification 20 000 0 040 0 040 units mm Manufactured Workgroup TEST Production Line Test DB 1 Machine TEST Machine Test DBfl Analysed date range 6 9 2008 7 28 a m 6 9 2006 7 28 a m Measurementz 50D Samplezg 100 Subgroup zize b Distribution Normal Skewness 0 06 Flatnezgz 2 03 Lower spec limit 19 960 Upper spec limit 20 040 Minimum valuse 19 955 Maximum value 20 055 DLPH total pieces 433 Out of DPM pieces 7 98 60 1 40 DPH lower pieces 2 DPH higher pieces b 0 40 1 00 verage xa 20 00453 Eange iR O 100 Dewiation isi 0 01255 Grant average i xgak 20 00453 Mean of range Ra 0 02052 LG oo ea eee s Fa 0 00882 Mean of dewv feat 0 00835 Sigma feat 0 00889 MIU 1354 522 1 19 95571 HM 39 865xX
283. r the creation of the new factory It is not recommended to disabled the password protection except at the most the using a local xBase database without accessing by others Without reference to the password system a workplace can be assigned for data input only In this case only the functions of the operator access level are available in the program without reference to the right of the logged user see the Special program settings 2 10 4 1 Simple passwords The passwords of the first second and third access levels can be given on the Simple gt gt sheet of the Password and Login Settings window It is not allowed to use the same password by the several access levels because at the logging in the access level is identified by the password Every user on the given access level uses the same password Password and Login Settings X Simple gt Personal Password Login 3 GA engineer Pca R 2 Technician Pcz 11 Operator Pc MARNING All access level has one password All users of the access level use a common password so the users personality are not identified automatically Configure the password system and login modes Figure 206 Simple passwords The default passwords are used after the installation of the program or the creation of a factory until they are modified The default passwords are also used if the configuration file is damaged In case of a configuration file failure the
284. re marked after these in the analysises and reports 2 3 6 2 Change measured parameter data The data of a measured parameter can be changed in the Measured parameter Change menu item of the Database menu Firstly the product and then the measured parameter to be changed have to be selected After selecting the measured parameter the given data can be changed in the Measured Parameter Settings window Apart from specification all the measured parameter data are global which means that the changing of one data is not stored by the program so the new setting will related to all previously measured values The number of decimals can be only increased but cannot be reduced Attention Specification limits cannot be changed retrospectively new specification limits are available related to the measured samples that are entered after the changing Accordingly the specification limits are stored chronologically each sample has the specification limits that are valid during the given sampling By a specification s modification the program makes a breakpoint in the process so a time range with the same specification limits can be selected for analysis When an xBase database is used the measured parameter s primary name identifiers the database items so when modified all database elements in the relations have to be modified according to the database relations Hence the modification of the name takes time depending on the siz
285. ready logged in to the highlighted factory 2 3 3 Workgroup Workgroup registration contains the data of the workgroups defined in the actual factory and can be managed in the Workgroup menu item of the Database menu Any number of workgroups can be created in a factory The name of the menu item changes according to database terminology of the given factory 2 3 3 1 New workgroup A new workgroup can be created in the Workgroup Add menu item of the Database menu Firstly the code of the workgroup should be given which identifiers the workgroup in the factory so is not allowed to have more workgroups the same code in a factory The name of the workgroup can be given in two different languages recommended in English and in Hungarian If only one name is given it is automatically copied in the other language s field so the given workgroup will have one name in both languages HNS SPC User Manual 29 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Ed Workgroup Code Name Type or modify code and name Figure 40 Workgroup data By pressing the button next to the Code field the list of previously defined workgroup codes in the given factory can be listed These codes are already in use and cannot be used for defining a new workgroup 2 3 3 2 Change workgroup data The data of a workgroup can be changed in the Workgroup Change menu item of the Database menu Fi
286. red A red blinker on the Filter button marks that the Enable filtering switch is on in the Filter Conditions window I ee NEELA 24 422 24 462 CL Calculated 19 956 M 6 9 2666 7 26 a m Calculated 19 982 nf Kijelilt mintatartomany n amp l M MNA es ex Iii Select Last Reset Filter Figure 101 Filtering is enabled If the filtering is enabled the measured values which are excluded from the analysis after the filter conditions are marked with a red coloured x sign in the sample list Note It is possible to use MDI Multiple Document Interface analysis windows see the General Program Settings menu item of the Settings menu In case of using this function it is possible to select more different sample range together 2 6 4 Save process settings measured process The settings changed during the analysis of the selected sample range can be saved in the database on the third access level The distribution settings the process settings and the control chart settings can be modified during the analysis The modified settings of the measured processes can be saved in the Save process settings menu item related to the measured samples of the Analysis menu The settings can be saved severally by the switches in the Save Settings window Appropriately only the enabled settings are stored in the database HNS SPC User Manual 79 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT
287. red process settings 2 6 5 Change specification During the analysis of measured samples the specification limits can be changed tentatively The specification related to the selected sample range can be modified in the Change specification menu item of the Analysis menu Specification data of the given measured parameter are displayed by opening this window HNS SPC User Manual 80 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD x Type Bilateral Mominal value Bee Upper difference ada Lower difference 5 848 USL maximum LSL minimum You can change specification Figure 104 Change specification for analysis Attention The modified specification limits are valid only for the selected sample range and only during the analysis Modified specification data cannot be saved in the database backwards Note Specification data can be modified in the database by the usual way see the Measured parameter Change menu item of the Database menu but the modified specification limits are valid only for the new entered samples 2 6 6 Frequency analysis Frequency analysis of the measured values within the selected sample range can be displayed in the Analysis Frequency menu item of the Analysis menu The displayed window contains the histogram of the selected samples and the histogram s data in a table The table contains the absolute and the summarized absolute frequency as well
288. ree times In the window s header can be seen whether the settings in this window are related to machine to all head or to all position 2 3 8 Process settings for measured processes 2 3 8 1 Change Actual process settings can be modified in the Process settings Change related to measured parameter menu item of the Database menu Firstly the process to be changed has to be selected with selecting a product a measured parameter inside the product a machine and a head or a position inside the machine if necessary See the chapter Process selection After selecting the process the given settings can be changed in the Process Settings window HNS SPC User Manual 45 PANS TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Ef Process Settings related to Machine EN X Capability state on gning process capability study Sample size 2 Distribution Type normal m Johnson transformation LI n Size 164 Control C Acceptance Monitoring Kind s s Control Limits Harning Limits calculated not used uct faaooo uu eeeeee uci oeeeee Luk faaan uct eeeeee uu a eeeee prae LEL fo eeeea La eeeee 3 genera gt DoC xxl Oo Rs Type general Tool change Toolwear i Info Cancel Important process Cenable on line watching and alerting Alert settings gt gt l Sampling
289. removing a machine all data belonging to the machine is deleted the intervention list of the machine the measured and attributed processes related to this machine and all the measured and attributed data related to these processes The time of removing depends on the quantity of the data related to the given machine In case of an SQL database the removing is made by defined methods so there is no direct marking about the status of the process 2 3 4 4 Machine table The machine registration machine data found in the actual factory can be displayed in a table in the Machine Table menu item of the Database menu In this table can be reached all functions creating changing copying removing related to machines In the table there are always displayed the machines of the workgroup which is selected in the drop down list in the window s right top corner HNS SPC User Manual 35 PANS TERRA DEVELOPMENT GO E Machine l xX Machine Horkgroup n 18 M Mame by Language 1 Mame by Language 2 Tool Head Position fcu Machine A11 Machine A11 Changeable zh TEE Machine nz Machine Az Mot changeable fia In Add new Delete Copy Change Cancel Change Ok Interventions Name by Language 1 Mame by Language 2 amp karbantart s maintenance F F n anyagv lt s material change szerszdmcsere tool change fidd new Delete Export Import Figure 51 Machine table If there is
290. ressing this button See a detailed description about the sampling control service in the Sampling Control document e Automatic export The given process can be selected to the Automatic Export service The function is not defined in case of using an xBase database so this switch is not active in this case e File The name of the export file in case of enabling the Automatic Export function e Export from Date and time of the last export in case of enabling the Automatic Export function See a detailed description about the Automatic Export service in the Automatic export document 2 3 8 2 Measured process table The measured process registration measured process settings found in the actual factory can be displayed in a table in the Process settings Table menu item of the Database menu In this table can be reached all functions creating changing removing related to the measured processes olx Product cai Horkgroup cai Machine lt all gt Head Position Measured parameter Hork Machi sp ARE orkgroup achine Capability State Product Distribution d M a E amp E m m E rsa oon ee rest I ec e m Pats t 13 teszt DB11 TEST TEST Cp tpk 5 H1 HS Z teszt DB11 TEST TEST 4 Delete machine assigning processes Add new process gt gt by parameter Change Cancel Humber of processes 273 fidd new process gt gt by product Change Ok
291. rkgroup E Users Machine Sample Control events Interventions Product Iv Measured parameters W Measured processes Iv Failure groups Cattributed parameters iv Attributed processes Select database levels to be copied Figure 57 Copying a product HNS SPC User Manual 39 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD The database items are under each other can be selected only in order from up to down consistently and only the items under the product can be selected Accordingly the order is Measured parameters Failure groups attributed parameters gt gt Measured Attributed processes In case of selecting measured attributed processes with the measured parameters and failure groups of the new product will be related the same machines as to the measured parameters and failure groups of the earlier product and process settings will be the same A products data can be modified by rewriting this data in the table The changing will be valid if the window is closed by pressing the Change Ok button The changing will be rejected if the window is closed by pressing the Change Cancef button 2 3 6 Measured parameter Measured parameter s registration contains the data of the measured parameters defined under the products in the actual factory and can be managed in the Measured parameter menu item of the Database menu 2 3 6 1 New measured parameter A new measured parameter can b
292. rocess if a setting is modified A sample range with different process settings cannot be selected for analysis all samples within a selected sample range have to be had the same settings It is recommended to change the settings with due foresight and save the settings for next samples only in reasonable case 2 6 20 Control chart for attributed parameters The control chart of the selected attributed sample range can be displayed in the Analysis Control chart menu item related to the attributed samples of the Analysis menu E3 control Chart 1F 1T FG 1 1F 15 15 1G Ioj x np chart all failures 5 24 UCL 2 25 np o 00 LCL 1 9 30 1995 8 55 a m lt gt 4 14 2008 11 49 a m Sm o 4 14 2008 11 43 Intervention Comment e o u c3 Tu wenn o vx Bes Cem Oi he lc Figure 141 Control chart for attributed parameter Important data and figures of the control chart are the following e np p c u diagram the number of the rejected parts np the rate of the rejected parts p the number of the failures c the rate of the failures uw related to the attributed samples according to the kind of the chart e Sample data sample data are displayed in the white field on the under side of the control chart sampling date and time sample size the number of the rejected parts the failures in the sample and their rate compared to the sample size as w
293. rocesses of heads positions Attributed data can be input by pieces namely the failure occurrences have to be input in several windows for the several pieces see the AS item It is possible to input the summarized failure occurrences by samples before or after the measurements see the AT and A2 items Measurements qualifications cannot be performed in the measuring program only the control charts of the processes occurs in the measuring program can be displayed if the Create MPG for displaying control charts without data inputs is on see the MV and AV items This function is usable for example in case of processes with automatic data input by DataConnect The control charts of all the processes in the measuring program will be displayed automatically if the Display control charts automatically switch is on see the Chart automatically switch in the MPG Editor If further items are wanted to add in the measuring program or further settings are wanted to give the Open MPG Editor gt gt button has to be pressed In this case the MPG Editor window is opened filled in with the selected items and settings See the Create MPG Editor menu item of the MPG menu After giving the file name the measuring program can be saved into the MPG directory selected in the Select MPG directory menu item of the File menu and the window can be closed by pressing the Save MPG file button
294. roduct workgroup and machine then the no data text is written in the first row of the table HNS SPC User Manual 61 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO The black narrow before the Product column shows the highlighted attributed process An attributed process s settings can be modified by rewriting this data in the table The changing will be valid if the window is closed by pressing the Change OK button The changing will be rejected if the window is closed by pressing the Change Cancel button See also the chapter Process settings for attributed processes Change Creating a new attributed process can be done with the Add new process gt gt by parameter and Add new process gt gt by product butions These buttons effect the same functions as the Attributed process by Parameter and by Product menu items of the Database menu See also the chapter Attributed process by parameter and Attributed process by product The highlighted attributed process can be removed from the database by pressing the Delete machine assigning process button After confirmation of the deleting the attributed process related to the machine and all the sub processes related to heads positions belonging to the given attributed parameter and machine combination will be deleted from the database 2 3 11 3 Checking the process setting s borders In case of modifying a process period if the m
295. rol chart it is not checked wheter the points are inside the warning limits e OoC By pressing this button Out of Control conditons can be set related tho the control chart Meaning and settings of several Out of Control tests are the same as in case of a measured process see the description of the Process settings for measured parameters Change menu item of the Database menu Difference as compared to measured processes the Middle Third test is not defined in case of np and c charts because it is allowed to use these charts in case of not constant sample size is not defined in case of failure charts by technical reason only WET test is defined on the Extended OoC s sheet Detect on critical control charts side only switch is always active by switching on this only the Out of Control cases are monitored that are dangerous related to the upper control limit Category charts T 5 buttons The button s numbers mean the number of the given failure categories Most settings are the same as by all failures chart only the different special information are written here Only c and u charts can be used in case of looking for all failures strategy because number and rate of rejected parts is not defined for a failure category because more failures can be occurred by parts Any chart type can be used in case of most critical failure only strategy becaus
296. rol charts for machine head position This window contains special function for working with heads and positions HNS SPC Head Tracking lf the main and sub processes are detached and the data are collected separately in case of multihead multiposition machines the control charts of the sub processes can be displayed from this window directly If there is saved the head or position number to the several measured values the control charts of the machine and the several heads or positions can be changed by more ways By appointing the given measured value than pressing the 4 x button in the left under corner of the window the control chart of the given head or position can be displayed It can also be done by double clicking on the measured value or by clicking with the right mouse button on the point of the given measured value in the diagram on the right After closing the control chart of the head or position program returns to the sample data window 2 6 12 5 Change the display range of the control chart It is possible to change the display range of the x x x mx diagram after the displayed samples The display range can be changed by pressing the Ty button the following ranges can be set in order UCL LCL The default display range the samples are displayed between the lower and the upper control limits This range is recommended to use if the process is stable and it is in control because all the samples are inside t
297. roup menu item of the Database menu In the program an attributed parameter always means a failure group which is a group of the inspected failures on a product 2 3 9 1 New failure group A new failure group can be created in the Failure group Add menu item of the Database menu As the failure groups are registered under the products the product have to be selected before creating a new failure group The data of the failure group have to be given in the Failure Group Data window which appears after selecting the product Firstly the failure group code should be given which identifiers the failure group so it is not allowed to have more failure groups the same code under a product The name of the failure group can be given in two different languages recommended in English and in Hungarian If only one name is given it is automatically copied in the other language s field so the given failure group will have one name in both languages Attention Unlike other data entry windows the names cannot be entered in two languages within the same window After giving the names in the first language by pressing the Language gt 1 button can be changed to the window of the secondary language Primary names will be copied in this window automatically and these names can be modified to secondary names This window can be changed back to the previous window by pressing the Language Z2 button This data entry m
298. roup table The failure group registration failure group data found in the actual factory can be displayed in a table in the Failure group Table menu item of the Database menu In this table can be reached all functions creating changing copying removing related to failure groups ES Failure Group X Product ar iT tede Mame by Languages 1 Category by Languages 2 Category by Languages 1 fault group 1 category 2 Category 1 fault group 1 category 4 Category fidd new I rrr az qt 5 ett 1 OTa EN 93 get tt I Copy mm M OMEN 4 e J aes ary SS p Change D L s o Figure 73 Failure group table In the table there are always displayed the failure groups of the product which is selected in the drop down list in the window s right top corner If there is not defined any failure group under the selected product then the no data text is written in the first row of the table The black narrow before the name column shows the highlighted failure group In the under table the failures and their data belonging to the highlighted failure group are displayed Creating a new failure group can be done with the Add new button in this window See the further steps in the chapter New failure group A new failure group is created under the product which is selected in the drop down list in the window s right top corner T
299. rs the frequency of the given failure are displayed the number of the occurrence and this number compared to the total number of the failures in percentage The analysed time interval the number of the parts in the selected sample range and the number of the rejected parts are also displayed in this window The number of rejected parts in DPM is also displayed if the Display DMP data pcs switch in the Control chart menu item of the Settings menu is on Maximum ten interventions are displayed together If more interventions are recorded during the analysed time the diagram can be turned over by the lt Leff and gt Right buttons The pareto analysis can be displayed for the failure group and for several failure categories within the failure group The pareto diagrams for the failure group and failure categories can be changed by pressing the AiEsilwes Cat button The order of the pareto diagrams is the following all failures HNS SPC User Manual 110 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD diagram first category diagram second category diagram gt gt last maximum fifth category diagram all failures chart gt A pareto diagram can be made by the failure occurrence weighted with the failure cost data Failure occurrence and failure cost pareto diagram can be changed by pressing the IE Pes Cost button EJ Pareto analysis 1F 11 FG 1 1F 15 15 1G oO x
300. rstly the workgroup to be changed has to be selected in the Workgroup window as follows x Name n zB8 Morkgroup AH Morkgroup AIH Select a list item to use Figure 41 Selecting a workgroup for changing After selecting the workgroup the given data can be changed in the Workgroup window In case of changing the workgroup code the program displays a warning message and asks the user for confirmation of the renaming Attention When an xBase database is used the workgroup code identifiers the database items so when modified all database elements in the relations have to be modified according to the database relations Hence the modification of the code takes time depending on the size of the database the state of the modification can be seen on the screen Stopping the program Ctrl Alt Del Reset turning the computer off while the modification is underway may result in damage to the database relations and loss of data 2 3 3 3 Remove workgroup In the Workgroup Remove menu item of the Database menu the selected workgroup can be deleted from the actual factory Selecting the workgroup is accordingly done the same way as with the modification of a workgroup After selecting the workgroup the program asks for confirmation of the deleting and once confirmation is received it removes the workgroup from the database Attention When removing a workgroup all data belonging to the workgrou
301. s numbers decimals are marked with point or with comma One row contains one measured value Sampling date and time can also be recorded after the measured value optionally separated with a comma from the measured value Date s several items year month day have to be marked with numbers and separated with point Date format yyyy mm dd Time is separated with a space from the date Time s several items hour minute have to be separated with colon 7 Time format hh mm Rows have to be closed with Cr 13 s Lf 10 characters Example for basic import file format 123 456CrLf 654 321 CrLf 123 456 1999 10 26 10 52CrLf 654 321 1999 10 26 10 52CrLf It is possible to import the files which has been exported by the HNS SPC program The format of this own file is different as the basic file formats because it can contain more data in order as follows Measured value Outstanding status of the measured value Sampling date Sampling time User ID Shift ID Team ID HNS SPC User Manual 70 e Tool ID PANG ECCE DEVELOPMENT CO LTD Import files can contain different quantity of sample data The simplest file format contains only the measured values listed in order Sample data which are not recorded in the export file can be given in the fields in the window s left down section It is necessary to set the decimal and separator format applied in
302. s to be set By exporting the data into Excel table the decimal point and the date format have to be chosen too according to the operation system ES Export Data Selected for Analysis X File text E gt Export into Excel table Decimal point 1234 Date format uyyy mm dd Settings I HNS SPC U5 x format H Export Identifiers Shift team Abort Date time Tool User ID Mask Configure export format and enter the file name B Figure 155 Exporting the attributed samples of the selected sample range The export file format is the same as in the Export menu item of the Data menu see the description about the Export menu item related to the attributed samples of the Data menu It is not a general export format in case of attributed samples unlike by the export of the measured samples so the HNS SPC V5 x format switch cannot be switched on is not active HNS SPC User Manual 111 S MUS TECHNICAL DEVELOPMENT C0 ID 2 6 24 Export Interventions It is possible to display the interventions recorded to the selected sample range as a list in an export file This export can be made in the Export Interventions menu item of the Analysis menu The interventions can be exported into a simple text file or into an Excel file In the setting window the name and path of the text file have to be given By exporting the data into Excel table the decimal point an
303. s used to calculation Figure 66 Setting the K value for warning limit s calculation Note Warning limits are only displayed on the control chart it is not checked wheter the points are inside the warning limits By pressing this button Out of Control conditons can be set related tho the mean individual value moving mean diagram of the control chart Possible settings as follows Base OoC s Ef out of Control Settings X Base Oat s Extended Oot s Others xxi M Sample is out of control limits Hiddle Third Iv enabled ees Checked samples min ie Samples in zone min ZI 41 E ag H Samples in zone max ZI rej Configure the automatic DoC detections for control charts Figure 67 Basic Out of Control settings e Sample is out of control limits A point out of the control limits means always an Out of Control case so this test can not be disabled e RUN RUN means successive points on same side of the center line on either diagram of the control chart In the first field the number of samples to be checked have to be set The set value in the second field means the number of the points which are in one side of the center line in case of a RUN In the first field cannot be set smaller value than in the second field More conditions can be set together related to the RUN test these conditions are in an OR relations In case of setting further test conditons also the giv
304. saeeeeessaasaseeessaauaaaeessasaauaeeeessaauanseesssaaaaesssanaaaanees 25 Sie 3 Te Factory dala EC claueetiaitanes 25 Figure 32 Reserved ID S METRE 26 Figure 33 Actual selected factory 26 Figure 34 Selecting a factory for changing PTT EO Ee 26 Figure 35 Confirmatinon of the identifiers renaming t22daescscee2eseconctesapesezenesddacnenceotaededadece sanusezeniedessxenaaandesdegadele capers denandyacuasebeeuededpontysapuaeRenandvacesntaeenedueaees 27 Figure 36 eo aver ulerosogis qei i ooM E EEEren 27 Fig r 37 No factory selected EET E E E E a ERE EE E E EE emt Svee ROE ny 27 Figure else Factory table NT T TU UT E E EE AR E EA A E EEA IE ER 28 Fig r 39 C pying a factos sssrinin 29 PIQUKC 40 Workgroup data EN e EA EE EERE A E A EE EEA E AEE A EE E AEE EE EEE EAE EEEE EE A EE EA E E 30 Figure 41 Selecting a workgroup for changing eise sseeeseiss ee eeee eese enun nnns nuaa ann n ss sssa asses isse sisi siis Erran esse suas assess ssa ass rris sua a seen issu sa ansa 30 Figure 42 Workgroup tabl eee eRe ee ee E Mato ast M RU eee u UND NE uM UR ener ee AD LB Ora MUI eee a E c ee ee Te ee err ere ery Tae 31 Figure 43 Copying olg o 011 o NERIS E EN 31 FIGUIC 44 Machine data T YX
305. se eiii esee sese seen hu annes hu aas s esu aaa asas na assa ssa assa ssa assa sana ann 97 L6 2J COMMON CHANT SOMOS eerie E xd ect besa sentedeaicenovay dle E E TE utehe RO dava ditumdte rS nes axe 97 2 6 12 10 ANOMA head and position analysis eiiseesssssssisseesssse sese nn nn na nnn ha nnns hash s saa s ss sa iss saa assa aa sa ssa asina rasan aa sna an 98 2 6513 intervention DAN CUG soer sescca m t ER 98 2 6 14 Export Measurements ccccccccccsececceseeeceseeccesecseseeeceaseeeeeuseecsageeecsuseecsageeessageeesseeeeesseseeessaseessegsesess 99 20 19 EXO OM TMCV GTN GINS MT 99 2 6 16 Cancel the sample selection cccceccceeeeeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeceeeesseeesseceeeeessaeeseeceeeesssaeassaeseeeeeesessaegeess 101 2 6 17 Capability index CAI AM NEP T 101 2 6 18 Select attributed samples sissssessssisssssseseeeee eene nnna nnns n nsns n rnn naar nnn ness eedan 103 2 6 19 Save process settings attributed process ssesssssssssssssssssseeeeenn nennen nnne nnne 104 2 6 20 Control chart for attributed parameters ssssssssssssssssseesee enne nnn nnne nennen nnn nnns 105 2 6 20 1 Meaning of the data on the control CHALE ccccccseccccsneeececeeeeeeeaaeeeeeaaeeneesaaeeeeesaaeeeesanansesaaaaeseesaaaaeesssaaeeessaaaesessages 105 2 6 20 2 Appointing a sample on the control chart ccccccecccseecccseecssuesensuscec
306. se is used the product code identifiers the database items so when modified all database elements in the relations have to be modified according to the database relations Hence the modification of the code takes time depending on the size of the database the state of the modification can be seen on the screen Stopping the program Ctrl Alt Del Reset turning the computer off while the modification is underway may result in damage to the database relations and loss of data HNS SPC User Manual 38 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD In the Product Remove menu item of the Database menu the selected product can be deleted from the actual factory Selecting the product is accordingly done the same way as with the modification of a product After selecting the product the program asks for confirmation of the deleting and once confirmation is received it removes the product from the database 2 3 5 3 Remove product Attention When removing a product all data belonging to the product is deleted the measured parameters and failure groups of the product the measured and attributed processes related to this product and all the measured and attributed data related to these processes The time of removing depends on the quantity of the data related to the given workgroup In case of an SQL database the removing is made by defined methods so there is no direct marking about the status of the process 2 3 5 4 Product table
307. se path E gt C HHS5 SPCDATABASE Enter the path to xBase database files Figure 15 Select xBase database Last selected directory can be set back by pressing the Restore button In case of a network database the network access path or remote driver has to be specified Selection an SQL database is done by specifying a Driver and the appropriate Alias The drivers of database can be configured with the SQLCONF EXE SQL Driver Configuration program See also the chapter Starting the program and the Installation guide document HNS SPC SQL Database Ioj x Drivers Aliases ORACLE ODBC Y Password Connect automatically on the next start D Select a database and connect Figure 16 Select SQL database The user password of the database should be given in the Password field default user ID and password SPCuser SPC Attention When selecting the SQL database the password set by the administrator is needed The user identifier has to be entered during the SQL settings among the Alias configuration data while the password belonging to it has to be given before logging on The user ID and password is only needed for logging onto the server and it is independent of the program s own user identifier and password By pressing the Connect button program logs in to the selected SQL server By switching on the Connect automatically on the next
308. see the MS M MX sheet HNS SPC User Manual 123 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD If the HeadTracking function enabled switch is on the head position number of the measured value if it is collected from a process of a head position is also stored in the database with the given measured value If the control chart whereto samples are entered in the S item is opened the control chart of the several heads positions can also be displayed The processes whereto new samples are saved are listed in the process displaying menu of the measuring program so the operator can display the measurements diagram or the control chart of these processes or the control chart can also be displayed automatically Such a process can also be added to the process displaying menu whereto any samples are recorded in the measuring program The data can be input to these processes for example by the DataConnect service automatically These processes can be taken into the process displaying menu by MV items which can be created modified or deleted on the MV sheet Ed MPG Editor P X Header nsnm S Hu AAS 81 82 Bu E1 E2 Alert File Display control chart of measured process Item n Anl Chart automatically Name Hemove Parameter Data 13 Test DBH11 Code Hame Horkgroup TEST Production Line Test DB 1 Machine TEST Machine Test DBIHT head p position p Select HONRHE HPG Figure 171
309. seeccccsseecennansccensuseennanseceususeesnaaseeeeusueeensaneeeensaueensanssensauasensansseessuessnsaneseasauasensaneseeuaaess 138 Figure 200 List of the control Charts in the measuring program isses esee enn nnne nnn na nnns ns sssa arises ssss aa sa siis rnrn aa essi essa assess ssa sese nissan nns 138 Figure 201 Save the marker data for all samples of the MPG ccccccccsseeseeeccnnsneeeecennaauseseeseaaunsaeeseanaaseeeeessaauasseesssaueseessssaacasecessaaucsecessauuaeesssssaaagses 139 Figure 202 General PKOOTANT SGUNIOS REIR 7 em 142 Figure 203 S pp rted database YPES aic ari detta acs iue lun Arb delete creda E iE ria oM MUI da fuss dM Le cH RA TENKE PTEE ENA ETE M HIA d tut eM add tial 143 Fig re 204 Database termiNOlOJY A 143 Figure 205 Password settings RECTE LMMMIUF 144 Figure 206 Simple passwords MR 145 Figure 207 Personal ASS WONG C 6 TAANE TENANTE EEH 146 Figure 200 AQGING a VOW USCP eser eee a EE E E E E A EE A EE E E E E A E E EE 146 Figure 209 IET e n EE EEn 146 Fig r 210 Shift up MP eR OE E CRO E E E E A E tee E E E E E E e A EEE A EAE 147 Fi re 211 Calculation Settings
310. ses distribution is not matched low capability chart is not acknowledged intervention comment are detected on the displayed control chart at the time of the displaying hence the alerts will contain the events related to the control chart only if the control charts are displayed The displaying and evaluating of the control charts can be ensured by switching on the Chart automatically switch related to the allotted items in the measuring program The e mail addresses have to be given in the Send alert field More e mail addresses have to be separated with semi colon With the button the recipients can also be selected in the user list if it has been defined previously see the Personal sheet in the Password menu item of the Settings menu It is necessary to configure the e mail sending function in the E mail menu item of the Settings menu The events of the mpg alert function can be logged In the Log alerts field the name and path of the log file can be given or it can also be selected with the 22 button The alert related to a measuring program will be sent when a new data input is started in the given measuring program or the given measuring program is closed The last step to create the measuring program is to save the MPG file which can be done on the File sheet in the MPG Editor window x Header MS M MX S HU S A1 A2 Bu E1 E2 Alert File NUS NON RON O
311. sessaaaaecessaauaaeessanaaeessessaunnssessas 1 Figure 2 SQL database selecting WINDOW 2 Fig re 3 The start up pos TT H a 2 Figure 4 Program dala PEPPER EET RR E TENRA TEE EAA EE EREA sae REE EE EA TEAT ETE 2 Figure 5 Program configuration data NETT 3 Figure 6 On Line Help seere er M LLL RM a nM a Lu DLE n EE 3 Figure 7 Statusicon onthe System Tray m ira ar stn okay sae RE OT ETA TE E TEO O E R EE 4 Figure 8 LOGGING I Wilt SINIDIG CDIMMON DASSWONO ETC EErEE EEEE 4 Figure 9 Logging in with personal password NETTE m 4 Figure 10 Logging in without password password protection is disabled isses essen eene nena nh nnns naar hn sss sana sn nnns sna rn nn nnns 5 Figure 11 STI eh VALOR Dm 5 Figure 12 Main window of the higher engineer access level lisse essen nenne sena nn nnns nnha ass sss ssa aisi sri sensa aas rer sssa assis rss se asa rris nea a sns snas 9 Figure 13 Taskbar OF the DVOGIAIT MT 15 Figure 14 Solecr databse typo cine et ete aac sha be cv ote Ale oad els saan Sea EEEa Ayr ea dut Ud M cts M E M MEM earar iyi 16 Fig re TS SEIGCI icio
312. sition The format and managing of the summarized pareto diagram is the same as the pareto diagram of one failure group See the description about the Analysis Pareto analysis menu item of the Analysis menu 2 6 27 Certificate A formal quality certificate can be printed with the identifiers stored in the database and this can be certified with stamp and signature Certificate can be made in the Certificate menu item of the Analysis menu for a product or for a parameter The printer can be selected in the Printer menu item of the File menu This function can also be enabled for the first operator access level in the Operator s rights menu item of the Settings menu 2 6 27 1 Certificate for a product Firstly the product has to be selected by the Certified product button Note Only the name and the drawing number are printed in the product identifier field of the certificate but the product code is not printed as default The printing of the product code can be enabled by a Registry setting In this case the product code name and drawing number are printed together if the product code is equal with the drawing number this identifier is printed only once See the Special program settings After this the data wanted to occur in the certificate have to be given The content and format of the certificate is variable within limits HNS SPC User Manual 115 PANG TENA DEVELOP
313. ssing the Print button to the printer selected in the Printer menu item of the File menu after to the settings in the Print settings menu item 2 6 13 Intervention pareto In the Analysis Intervention pareto menu item of the Analysis menu Pareto analysis can be displayed by the interventions recorded to the samples within the selected sample range The interventions recorded during the analysed time interval are summarized and the frequency values of the several interventions are displayed in the pareto diagram HNS SPC User Manual 98 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Zac Intervention analysis 1F 11T TEST 1 1F 15 15 1G rj x 100 x 30 n intervention a 1 18 18 3lNTERUENT ON L 2 18 18 4INTERUENT ON a 3 15 16 1 INTERVENT ON interventions 15 4 15 16 2INTERVENT ON Bn 5 15 18 5INTERUENT I ON 50 435 40 30 Length of analysed period 20 8 22 3 6 a m 8 5 1 25 p m Figure 131 Intervention pareto analysis The pareto diagram is displayed in the left side of the window and the name of the interventions ordered by their number can be seen on the right side Above the several bars the frequency of the given intervention are displayed the number of occurrence and this number compared to the total number of the intervention in percentage The analysed time interval and the total number of the interventions are also displayed in this window Maximum ten
314. ssword menu item of the Settings menu 3 2 2 Multiple instance Message x LIARKING Program is already running Multiple instances of the program can not be used Figure 241 Warning message Multiple instances Reason One program copy is already running on the given workstation Comment Only one program copy can be started as default It is possible to run more program copies together it can be enabled with a special setting Suggestion One of the opened HNS SPC program copies has to be closed Reference The chapter Starting the program HNS SPC User Manual 171 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO 3 2 3 There is no MPG Message ATTENTION Ho MPG associated with your ID Check the MPG Directory setting or enter your ID again Figure 242 Warning message There is no MPG If the message is displayed for a user on the 1 operator access level Reason There is no measuring program for the given user It is possible that the operator has given the user ID incorrectly or there is not associated any measuring programs to the operator s ID Comment The list of the measuring programs can be run on the 1 access level is composed by the user ID s of the operators if operators have been associated to the several measuring programs Suggestion If the operator has typed the user ID inc
315. st button just after setting the gauges and the program Attention The original settings of the gauges can be set back by removing the configuration file HNSSPC cfg All of the program settings database selection calculation settings printer settings etc are removed the default setting are set back together hence it is recommended to use this possibility carefully and only in case of need HNS SPC User Manual 161 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD When measuring analogous signals different settings related to the measurement have to be given by pressing the Settings button in the Gauge Settings window Lard PEC Tt Calibration A D Address lt 24h Ehannels i point 1 4095 n Range gain hardware point 2 a m Detect first peak Es Control Ed A D momentary value X scale Start scale la Enabled Bit value E Stop scale 3 Digital input bit E H rBit function THU sect 3 I DM Qm l ar nable measuring Noise ADI f View process data Cancel ox fem E Save measuring process File Type calibration and settings of current A D channel Figure 230 A D settings The linear A D calibration parameters can be entered in the upper right part of the window e Point 1 A D the A D value of the upper calibration point e Point Z1 scale the scale value of the upper calibration po
316. start switch program will log in to the server at next start automatically using the present previous driver alias and password HNS SPC User Manual 16 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Actual database selection cannot be changed while there are data selected for analysis See the deleting the selection in the Reset selection menu item of the Analysis menu 2 2 2 Select factory The current factory can be selected in the Select factory menu item of the File menu All program functions use data of the actual factory and there is not any direct logical relation between the several factories x Name Factory A Factory A Select a list item to use Figure 17 Select factory Note Actual factory selection cannot be changed while there are data selected for analysis See the deleting the selection in the Reset selection menu item of the Analysis menu A factory can be selected only by the user with right for the highest access level The data code and name of the actual factory are always displayed in the status row of the program s main window 2 2 3 Select MPG directory The program always searches for the measuring program files in a defined MPG directory This directory has to be selected in the Select MPG directory menu item of the File menu Ef Select MPG Directory X MPG path em i C HNS SPC DATABASE MEASPRGS Restore Cancel Enter the
317. sured process by product The highlighted measured process can be removed from the database by pressing the Delete machine assigning process button After confirmation of the deleting the measured process related to the machine and all the sub processes related to heads positions belonging to the given measured parameter and machine combination will be deleted from the database 2 3 8 3 Checking the process setting s borders In case of modifying a process period if the modified process settings are the same as the settings of the previous or the following process period than the given border can be removed This function can be reached in the Process settings Check menu item of the Database menu After selecting the process the checking starts and the unnecessary setting borders will be removed The checking s status can be seen in the Setting Border Checking window The process can be stopped by pressing the Cancef button Ef setting Border Checking X Checking of setting borders is under processing Please wait Removed borders Figure 71 Checking the process setting s borders Attention The removed setting borders cannot be set back afterwards 2 3 9 Attributed parameter failure group Attributed parameter s registration contains the data of the attributed parameters failure groups defined under the products in the actual factory and can be managed in the Failure g
318. sured together but attributed data cannot be input The measuring program is managed piece by piece firstly the program asks for placing the piece into the measuring device by displaying a measurement starting window Hi PG K Device Strategy X Place piece into measuring device and start the measuring L23 Piece again L23 Previous piece LI Cancel Start measurings m DATA IP R E Figure 195 Starting the measurement in case of Device strategy When the piece has been already placed into the device the data input can be started with the Measure button The piece which is in the device can be re measured by the Piece again button The previous piece can also be re measured by the Previous piece button The running of the measuring program HNS SPC User Manual 136 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO can be aborted by the Cancef button and the collected measured values are dropped The measured values already collected are displayed in the list of the Measurements field of the measuring program window similarly to the previous strategies In case of gauge error the error message window of the device strategy is displayed ES MPG K Device Strategy X Gauge data input from keyboard Port LPT4 L Damaged L X Cancel Gauge ERROR G DaTA P D c Figure 196 Displaying the gauge error in case of Device strategy The faulty gauge can b
319. susccssusceseeessuseessusessausessaueessuusessusestansessansessaaness 106 2 6 20 3 Displaying the failure data on the control chart sss sisse eene nennen nnns nara nnns nnn 106 2 6 20 4 Change the display range of the control Chart ccccsscecccsseececcnsensecenseuecensecsecensensecsnacsessnuacsessceusunssceusunsscensunsseesaes 107 VoM DTCC OlOIIO kc AM E tO TTE 108 20 20 06 Control chart ackhoWwledgelTiBliE susuiussaunouscutasau tst tes adsok uni ama uero ru ha td ar Ra ibt Pot ads so pes d aM S una Odi ER FoU R P eRA aua UH DR MER UAE 108 2 6 20 7 Rejecting a sample on the control chart isis iere aset aa Fasuh aa Y RERER E ER EERRE Y EXR EUR VREEXK Eu YRER MERE EK REFER RKEREFRE ERE REEENREPEN EE 108 26 208 CONO ms MI go e 108 2 6 20 9 Change the control charts of the failure group sessssssissssssiisssesee essen nennen nah nnns rn nn sena n na 109 PASA i i dc NE 110 2 6 22 Intervention ParelO NE m c Hm 111 AES i mode a UMOR Io ENT Dmm 111 2 0 24 qs INSLY GINO INS M 112 2 6 25 Cancel the sample selection ccccccceeeeececceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeesceeeeeeseeseeeeeeeesssaeeseeeeeeesseaeseseeeeeeeeesssaageess 113 2 6 26 Summarized pareto ANALYSES ccccccccsseseececcececeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeceeeeesaeseeeeeeeessaeeseeeeeeesseeeaeeeseeeeeeeessaaegeess 113 2 0 26 1 Summarized pareto analysis DV produc
320. t 0 300005 x Workgroup code name 1F 15 1F 1VVORKGROUP Machine code name head position 15 16 1F 1VVORKGROUP 1MACHINE 0 D date time intervention parameter failure group user id shit team tool mask sample size wastes failures rejected 1995 09 50 06 56 15 16 11 INTERVENTION 1995 09 50 12 00 15 16 2INTERVENTION 1385 10 02 09 02 15 16 2INTERVENTION 1385 10 03 22 06 1 5 16 4 INTERVENTION 1385 10 04 05 32 15 1G6 s INTERVENTION Figure 157 Text file with the exported interventions Example for the Excel file with the interventions HNS SPC User Manual 112 PUNS TECNICAL DEVELOPMENT C0 LTD EJ Microsoft Excel Munkaf zet1 B x F jl Szerkeszt s M zet Besz r s Form tum Eszk z k datok Ablak S g K rd se van Irja beide v 2 X adgiH3ddGia Tixsds3a Jy 90 vc amp Bi ana 210 F DA cad 59 ww rs SF eA B ia fa taa c dg 3 By ga Ye v toztat sol n ryez s vege B E33 v fe B C D ES F G H J K L M N r 1 Product code name drawing number 2 1F 1T 1F 1PRODUCT 1F 1T 000 3 Failure group code name 4 FG 1 1 fault group 5 categories 6 7 8 sszak ld se v le 1 1 category 2 2 category failure H Jr 1 fault 0 10000 10 2 2 fault 0 200005 11 3 3 fault 0 300009 12 Workgroup code name ig 1F 15 1F 1WORKGROUP 14 Machine code name head position 15 15 1G 1F TVV ORKGROUP 1MACHINE 0 0 16 17 date time intervention parameter failure group us
321. t Program always inspects wheter the given process fits to the selected distribution type In this field the applied fitting test method have to be selected e Confidence Confidence level reliablility of the fitting test Process settings e Process type It can be e general Default process type e Tool change By selecting this process type and pressing the Tool change button the constants which describe the Tool change process can be given that are used for calculations 6 means the deviation shift of the process layers and the Middle means the mean of the process layers These values can be calculated during the analysis by the program the limits of the process layers are appointed by means of U test Also the Confidence level of the U test can be given in this window e Toolwear By selecting this process type and pressing the Toolwear button the constants which describe the Toolwear process can be given that are used for calculations means the deviation shift inside the process trend and the Middle means the mean of the process trend These values can be calculated during the analysis by the program the limits of the process trend are appointed by means of U test Also the Confidence level of the U test can be given in this window HNS SPC User Manual 47 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Ed Toolwear Settings x epep Confidence Midde B Figure 65 Special settings of Tool
322. t it is possible to use only personal passwords Even if there is a user list common passwords can be used or password protection can even be turned off 2 10 5 Shift settings The shift identification can be made automatically it can be configured in the Shift ID s menu item of the Settings menu Ef shift settings Shift x W Shift code fields are filled automatically m os 7 Operator can not change the automatically filled shift code Cancel x Shift code n l2 3 fa from to from to from to from to Monday v eee Rees ee H pzee es H fea gt H Tuesday M Eee fsa Hm fasse H pze ze H fea 4 Wednesday V bom fees H m eee H Bzee mw za H a r H Thursday 608 i400 iv Reese H pza i pza fja H r e E Friday v E BB Rha pn m 14 88 22 88 v 22 98 eae 4 Saturday r 4 m 4 zT zs m i Sunday C Lm m E E A Configure automatically shift code usage enter shift codes and set default data of shifts Figure 210 Shift settings If the Shift code fields are filled automatically switch is on the shift ID out of the sample data is filled in automatically when starting the data input The shift is identified by the times given in the from and to fields and with the identifiers given in the Shift code fields Four shifts can be given at most The operator cannot ch
323. t sscscivosssnosveisriuncddvadecsmavads tianelavedavnesnidarentveatadnesmvadsMadiedensddaiansuidandanversuamnedas 113 2 6 26 2 Summarized pareto analysis by machine ccccccscsccccuseccccnsensecensensecensensecsuscsessnsansecensensesensanesseeusenssceusunsscensunsseesaas 114 CESSAT CU CAG EE ECT 115 20 2721 COMMICAIC TOP QO o P e serrande ean RRE EEEE EE EREATARA EREE EEEE A T EERE 115 2 0 2 2 COMIMCAIC TOF Dal M MM 117 Masc Ue 119 EAE N aeae OOO RR RR Tm 119 2 7 2 Creation of the measuring program eessssssssssseseeee nennen nennen nenne nnn nnns na nnn nsn nari nnns nan rns 119 VM MEOE 6 ANE COE POD ene SON eee eee nee ene mee Oe er Tees Pen eee ee eee EA een eee eee eT 119 Ae aah CRA co See eee One eer ee ne eee ert ere neem eee ene cae en nee oe Neca cee tener ee een ene eee IRR 128 2 7 3 Modifying the measuring PLOGrAM ccccceecccceseeeeceeeeeeseeeeecseeeeeseeueesseeeeeseaeeeeseeeeesaueeesseeesseuseeesseeeeesaeees 129 2 7 4 Removing the measuring program sessssssssssssseseeee nennen nennen nennen nnn enne nean nnns nre n nnns 130 HNS SPC User Manual 2 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO 2 7 5 Running the measuring PLOGLAMM cccccsececceeseecceeseecceneeeceuececceuseeccaueeeceuseeeseueeeesaueeessueeeessuseeeesseseesseaees 130 2 9 Data loggers m
324. tECU EROR aD ERR EROR ERUe NE RPRIDEPERE aEO VEI URP OP CH FR LUsPF HARE E EE deine nie seanaidsdeenoeseideadadedebbeszencccdiees 176 Figure 253 The xBase database error message windOW eese eise ee esee snas su nsns s nasa nas n ases essa asas s suas esee uasa essa ases essa sess suas esee ne sas esas sensn ss 176 Figure 254 Error message Gauge erfof d H 177 Figure 255 Error message Measuring program error eise esses esee seen ah eae s nnn n assures ssu asas esas a tassa a sies suas assa se essa sas a sa aso s ssa assa sata EEEE EE EEEren 177 Figure 256 Error message Measuring program BITOF sisse nie suopnsecu aque dd open ctiapa tn eod bp rapi EpoIeE MESA DL Gasupdsnsedlapbeenndonpn auaneete Phe vp UNE DP FUSE Do DIN S RR Pod EEEE 178 Figure 257 Error message Measuring program error 2 cccccscccccnsescccnsacecensunesensaueeenseeeeensaeeeenseeeeensaueeensseeeeanaaseseusaasesnaasaseusaasssnaasecedsuasssnacgesensensssnaaaeses 178 Figure 258 Error message Measuring program errOr eese siss esee eene ane nn nsns nu aa ea rAr asas asa saa s ssh se essa saa s sanae essa sas a sas ss essa sas s ssa s ossa aaa h sns 179 Figure 259 Error message Measuring program SITOF 3 5 vcr px Res UOI a leva a se i DW bU Ride Ro Rada Da PER EU a o DEA ERR uou ib a n pUE prs dud ba REX DR RM ac MR a a ER a o 179 HNS SPC User Manual 6 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD 1 Using t
325. ta input Hence it is possible to use one gauge in more measuring programs together without closing the measuring programs e COM port selection overridden by COM ports selected in Gauge Settings When using a gauge in the measuring program not the COM port selected in the measuring program is considered but the COM port selected in the Gauges Select and Settings menu item of the Settings menu The settings on the Sample data sheet are the following x Input Measur ing Sample data Log Alert Others Shift required automatically Team required automatically User ID required automatically Hask E required m automatically upper case letters can be entered Tool required automatically Sampling time can not be modified by the operator v Show M type measurement between MPG s value lists i Show MAS type measurement between MPG s value lists Check and set your MPG configurations Figure 218 MPG settings Sample data e Shift Team User ID Mask If the required switch is on next to a sample data it has to be entered compulsory in the Sample Codes window after selecting the measuring program otherwise the measuring program cannot be run If the automatically switch is on the identifier which was entered at the last running of the measuring program will be offered in the given sample data field in the Sample Codes window It is possible to give o
326. ta loggers MITUTOYO DL DT 10 MITUTOYO DP 3DX and DP 7 Mitutoyo DL1000 STARRETT 742A Elcometer 300 SP TERADYNE W419 Laser Trim System Reports This menu is enabled only in SQL database Capability Analysis Report that displays the actual and potential capability of the selected processes Capability Frequency Table Report that displays the actual capability and temporal distribution of the capability of the selected processes CTQ Capability OoC Report Report that displays the capability of the important processes and the Out of Control cases occurred in them Attribute Report Report that displays the capability of the attributed parameters failure groups Alert Report Report that displays the Out of Control cases occurred in the important processes Process Settings Process settings in the given factory e Measured Process Settings e Attributed Process Settings Settings Settings related to the reports for example criteria for colouration HNS SPC User Manual 13 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Settings General program settings Generals settings related to the appearance Supported database types Selecting the used database types Database terminology Name of the database items which is wanted to use in the given factory Password Setting and configuring the password system within the actual factory Shift ID s Setting the shifting and entering the shift ID s in order to f
327. tched off the previous closing values which were given at the last running of the measuring program are used and this values has not to be given before the other items This window will not be displayed at the repeated running of this measuring program if the measuring program is not selected again but it is re started x Valid closing maximum number 2 Q I Use previous closing maximum values Check number of head and change if you need Figure 188 Giving the maximum head position number closing value In case of product and parameter strategies the measurements can be done in the windows which are similar to the following window but these windows have differences according to the type of the applied gauge Ed HN5 Digimatic SMUX 4 USEMUZ 4 caliper Measuring DATA H Figure 189 Measurement window in the measuring program The applied gauge is identified after the gauge type displayed in the header of the window and after the port and channel displayed in the right top corner of the window marked with yellow colour The gauge name given by the user in the measuring program is displayed under the buttons The displayed gauge identifiers are the same as the data entered at the editing the measuring program in the Gauge namey selection Port and Channef fields If a gauge connected by HNS Digimatic SMUX or USBMUX interface or Opto RS232 Simplex or OPTO RS232 Duplex gauge is app
328. ted machine can be removed by pressing the Remove button Removing a machine means removing all the measured processes related to this machine namely the process related to this machine and the sub processes related to this machine s heads and positions Attention When removing a measured parameter and machine relation all processes related to this relation are deleted included previous and actual process settings measured samples and measured values The time of removing depends on the quantity of the data related to the given measured processes In case of an SQL database the removing is made by defined methods so there is no direct marking about the status of the process 2 3 7 2 Measured process by product When creating a measured process by a product the first step is selecting a product and than a workgroup and a machine After selecting the machine it has to be selected that what processes and sub processes are wanted to create It is possible to create sub processes only by multihead multiposition machines see the Machine menu item of the Database menu After selecting the processes to be stored the process settings have to be given See the process settings in the Process settings Change menu item related to measured parameter of the Database menu If more database items machine head position are related with the given measured parameter the Process Settings window appears more two or th
329. ted to measured parameter of the Database menu lf more database items machine head position are related with the given measured parameter the Process Settings window appears more two or three times In the window s header can be seen whether the settings in this window are related to machine to all head or to all position 2 3 11 Process settings for attributed process 2 3 11 1 Change Actual process settings can be modified in the Process settings Change related to failure group menu item of the Database menu Firstly the process to be changed has to be selected with selecting a product a failure group inside the product a machine and a head or position inside the machine if necessary See the chapter Process selection After selecting the process the given settings can be changed in the Process Settings window HNS SPC User Manual 57 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Sample mode inspecting for looking for all failures Ed Process Settings related to Machine Sample size C Can be changed Changing is disabled 188 aj pcs E into Cancel Chart Settings All failures chart a Category charts 1 ay a ES E Failure chart jafut v Important process enable on line watching and alerting Alert settings Sampling control enabled Control settings 7 M Automatic export File liF 17_FG 4_1F 1S_1S 1G DAT Export from
330. tems of the Analysis menu HNS SPC User Manual 142 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy 2 10 2 Supported database types The program supports xBase and SQL database types When selecting a database firstly the type of the database has to be selected than the database wanted to use has to be given see the Select database menu item of the File menu The first step can be skipped if always the one database type xBase or SQL is used The database type to be used can be selected in the Supported database types menu item of the Settings menu If both database types are enabled also the database type has to be selected when selecting a database Ed Supported Database Types x Bm LN E Adjust client to server time E Adjusting by f minutes Enable support for database types Figure 203 Supported database types If the SQL database is used it is possible to adjust the client s clock to the SQL server time automatically The time is assigned to the data automatically so it is important to be correct the client s clock If the Adjust client to server time switch is on the client s clock is adjusted to the server time automatically at the logging into the database In addition it is possible to check the client s clock regularly In case of switching on the Adjusting by switch the program
331. th a L7 sign are not displayed on the given access level but functions that are under this menus or menu items in the table and are marked with a amp sign are in higher level in the menu system HNS SPC User Manual 8 DANNS TECNICAL DEVELOPMENT C0 LTD 2 Functions of the program 2 1 Overview This description contains the menu items of the highest engineer access level because that level contains all functions of the software The main window of the highest access level is displayed on the following figure E HNS SPC Bl x File Database Data Analysis MPG Dataloggers Reports Settings Help e Hy EZ LZ EIE E t raclel TEBT1 HNS SPC Test p SEC Cat a Figure 12 Main window of the higher engineer access level Name and functions of several menus and menu items are as follows File e Select database Selecting the required database e Select factory Selecting a factory whose data will be used e Select MPG directory Giving the path of the directory that contains the necessary measuring programs e Select GPI directory Giving the path of the directory that contains the pictures are displayed in the measuring programs e Create xBase database Creating xBase database files empty xBase database in the directory given here e Reindex xBase database Maintenance of the actual xBase database removing of deleted physical records and re indexing of the data files e Copy xBase to SQL datab
332. that the e mail s recipient may use SPAM filter e the SPAM filter may check the domain name an existing and valid name has to be given in this case otherwise the recipient will not get the e mail sent by the HNS SPC e the SPAM filter may check the sender s e mail address a valid e mail address has to be given in this case e the SPAM filter of the recipient may check the sender with approval request this case cannot be managed by the HNS SPC in this case the recipient has to ensure that the SPAM filter let the e mails sent by the HNS SPC through The settings and the working of the e mail sending can be checked in this window after pressing the Test gt gt button Firstly a recipient has to be given than the Send a test mail button has to be pressed E mail can be also sent out of the domain Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy 2 10 14 HNS DataConnection The program is able to read in samples coming from external data sources automatically These data are forwarded to the HNS SPC in a DataConnect file in specified format This file is load by the program according to the settings automatically and the data are stored in the HNS SPC database The DataConnect file can be binary or text file see the description about its format in the DataConnect document The function can be enabled and the required settings can be given in the HNS DataConnection menu
333. the Process Settings window appears more two or three times In the window s header can be seen whether the settings in this window are related to machine to all head or to all position Highlighted machine can be removed by pressing the Remove button Removing a machine means removing all the attributed processes related to this machine namely the process related to this machine and the sub processes related to this machine s heads and positions Attention When removing a failure group machine relation all the attributed processes related to this relation are deleted included previous and actual process settings and attributed samples The time of removing depends on the quantity of the data related to the given attributed processes In case of an SQL database the removing is made by defined methods so there is no direct marking about the status of the process 2 3 10 2 Attributed process by product When creating an attributed process by a product the first step is selecting a product and than a workgroup and a machine After selecting the machine it has to be selected what processes and sub processes are wanted to create It is possible to create sub processes only by multihead multiposition machines see the Machine menu item of the Database menu After selecting the processes to be stored the process settings have to be given See the process settings in the Process settings Change menu item rela
334. the File menu the certificate see the Certificate menu items of the Analysis menu and other reports see the Reports menu can be printed in Hungarian as well as in English If the secondary names are given in English the English names can be displayed on the English documents printed from the Hungarian program 2 10 4 Password settings The way of the user identification can be set in the Password menu item of the Settings menu The program has two types of password systems Simple common passwords The several access levels have a separate password hence the users on the same access level use the same password his password system does not need user registration so the using and the maintenance of this is easier However this password system does not ensure the user identification the user makes the identification giving the user ID and name at the logging in but it is not checked Personal passwords This password system runs by a separate user registration This user register contains the ID the name the own password the access level and possibly the e mail address of the users The user ID maximum 9 characters has to be given at the logging in whereby the other data of the user are loaded automatically If the user can be found in the user register and the correct password has been given the user will be entered on his her access level This password system ensures the safe identification of
335. the Info button HNS SPC User Manual 64 PANG TURA DEVELOPMENT GO 2 5 Data menu 2 5 1 Measured samples The measured samples that are recorded in the database can be displayed or modified and new samples can be input related to a selected measured process in the Measured samples menu item of the Data menu First step is selecting the given process see the chapter Process selection Since data input can also be done in this menu item program checks the appointed gauge after selecting the measured process Than the Measured Samples window will be displayed wherein the measured samples stored in the database related to the selected process can be seen Attention Measured samples are displayed according to the settings in the Date range for analysis menu item of the Analysis menu Ea Measured Samples X no Sample data x 5 mask 13 3358H H HBZZ8 NET SALUD S S NE fick Int Com Time 9 22 1995 3 6 am 2 ZH H1HBH 4 66746 import User ID 3 19 97546 4 61069 import 4 19 99868 6 48691 import J shift 5 19 99928 H HH32Y import Tune EEG E 2zZH HH937ZH A AB2ZT 7 import T 6 66268 H HH487 import 8 26 66166 4 66611 import Taal fo 3 13 397 2H 4 61161 import 10 19 99948 4 61339 import Hask import 11 193 3984H H HH335 import Rejected le 7 12 26 00168 4 61167 import ee ee aoe Acknowledged sample no Measurement Intervention Es
336. the user provides an own password for each user but the user register has to be created and maintained continually to use this password system On the Password Login sheet can be selected the password system wanted to use with the Simple password authentication or with the Personal password authentication switch If the password protection is not wanted to use the Passwords enabled switch has to be off In this case anybody can access all the functions of the program so every user is entered on the highest access level Password and Login Settings X Simple gt gt Personal gt Password Login W Passwords enabled Simple password authentication R Personal password authentication User s ID must be entered User s name must be entered Ok Configure the password system and login modes Figure 205 Password settings HNS SPC User Manual 144 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO The password settings are always valid for the given factory so every factory has an own password system When a new factory is created the program displays the Password and Login Settings window where the password settings related to the new factory can be given with accepting the default settings or modifying them Note The simple password system is set as default with the SPC1 SPC2 and SPC3 passwords for the several access levels It is recommended to change the default passwords immediately afte
337. the diagram can be enabled with the View process data switch in the A D settings window As it is possible to perform special measurements with the A D cards and they are in fact measured processes including several measurements these measuring processes can also be documented The basic data of the measuring process the measured values whereby the measuring result is defined by the program s own algorithm can be recorded in a given file The path and name of the file which contains these data can be given in the File field after switching on the Save measuring process switch This file contains the basic data in text format This function can be used in the modes of A D peak of slowly changed process A D peak of quickly changed process and Spec Halogen Lamp Pressure Tester 2 10 12 Sound Different sound effects can be used to signal the several events during the measurements Optional sounds can be selected to the several events gauge value load value is out of specification gauge error sample completed sounds The program allows playing WAV sound files Sound Effect Settings X lf Use default sound settings Cancel Gauge value load sound e BS Valteas Ualue is Out of Specification sound Gauge error sound E MError Sample completed sound t E SCompltd Set the sound effects used with measurements Figure 231 Sound settings If the computer has no audio card simple soun
338. the import file It can be and or and Import can be started by pressing the Import data button the number of the imported samples can be seen on the right side of the status row Import can be stopped by pressing the Abort reading button In case of SQL database when import is aborted the data which have been already saved will be cancelled Attention If the number of the measured values in the import file cannot be divided with the sample size set for the given process with no remainder than the last measured values will not be imported If the import file contains the sampling date and time and other sample data and these data are also given in the Measured Sample Import window than the data in the import file will be recorded into the database The multiple export file made by the HNS SPC export function with using the all switch see the Export menu item related to measured samples of the Database menu contains all process s data of a product This text file can be imported physically but all import data are recorded into the selected process program cannot sort the data by parameters Import file is not change during the import process Note Import files can contain comments rows which have to start with character Empty rows are not considered Program makes outstanding value detection also by measured value s import if the detection is enabled in the Cal
339. the occurring OoC cases related to the given sample 2 6 20 4 Change the display range of the control chart It is possible to change the display range of the control chart after the displayed samples The display range can be changed by pressing the Ju button the following ranges can be set in order UCL LCL In the default display range the samples are displayed between the lower and the upper control limits This range is recommended to use if the process is stable and it is in control because all the samples are inside the control limits in this case 4 46 UCL piu eol Figure 145 Displaying the control chart between the control limits Extended UCL LCL The upper display limit is the upper control limit enlarged with the 30 of the control range UCL LCL the lower display limit is the lower control limit reduced with the 1596 of the control range UCL LCL This range is recommended to use if the displayed samples override the control limits but only in a small compass h 0 00 LCL Figure 146 Displaying the control chart between the extended control limits Max Min The samples are displayed between the minimum and maximum sample value All the samples are displayed in the correct place in this case This range is recommended to use if many samples are out of the control limits However it is not recommended to use this range when one sample is out of the control limits and it is much bigger than the values o
340. the speed of the data access network Attention An error message during the database service refers to the damaging of a database file If you meet with such case you should stop the further data input in the database and apply to the HNS SPC Program support for help Note Program contains checking function for correcting the individuality violation in the ASAMPLE DBF table of the database This checking can be enabled by a special Registry This checking and correcting function is built in the database re indexing Firstly the Registry should be given than database service should be started See the Special program settings Program contains re index function required in xBase systems This can be done by two ways 1 Reindex xBase database menu item of the File menu should be started that makes also database re indexing 2 Firstly all files with the extension CDX index files found in the database directory should be removed Then HNS SPC program should be started and given database should be selected Program checks index files at the opening of the database and if it is necessary that is some index file cannot be opened program creates this index file by the data file automatically In this case other checking is not done related to the database files Note If there is not any database failure so you want to make only a re indexing because of reducing the size of the index files speed optimization etc
341. tion e Event Enter a sampling event manually e Alerts e Scheduled tasks and running alerts Displaying the status matrix connected with the Automatic alert function e Alert states by processes Multi level overview about sent alerts This function is enabled only in SQL database Analysis e Data range for analysis Selecting the time range wanted to analyse e Select measured samples Selecting the range of the measured samples wanted to analyse e Save process settings Saving the process settings modified during the analysis of the measured samples in the database e Change specification Changing tolerance limits related to selected sample range for the duration of the analysis HNS SPC User Manual 11 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO LTD Analysis Frequency Frequency diagram of the measured values within the measured samples selected for analysis Distribution Frequency diagram density and linear distribution function of the measured values within the measured samples selected for analysis Density Frequency diagram and density function of the measured values within the measured samples selected for analysis Probability Linear distribution function of the measured values within the measured samples selected for analysis Capability study Calculated capability indices and statistical parameters displayed in a report format related to the measured samples selected for analysis Measurements diagr
342. tion at saving of data A4ETT EISPROGRAHFILES GEOMETRIA 2D GEOM EXE Ci GEOM 2DXTEST GPRRON 0000000000000 LLL Figure 175 Editing the E1 E2 item of the measuring program Items can be created appointed and removed the same way as on the MS M MX sheet PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO In the Program field the name and the path of the program to be started has to be given it can also be selected with the 5 button Parameters can be forwarded to the external measuring program in the Parameter field More parameters can be given separated with a space but there cannot be given any space inside a parameter It has to be selected in the Start external program field that the external program is wanted to start before or after the other items Generally the external measuring programs use the DataConnect service to forward the data hence it is possible to start the DataConnect service at the saving the data in the measuring program This function is enabled if the Start DataConnection at saving of data switch is on If the Pass login ID s to started external program switch is on the sample data is entered at starting the measuring program are also forwarded to the external measuring program to avoid their typing again It is possible to be monitored automatically the events which occurred while the measuring program is running or because the measuring program was running In case of one or more of
343. tion of the measuring program 2 7 2 1 MPG Editor The measuring program file is a text file with special required format This file can also be created or modified in a text file manually but it is recommended to use the MPG Editor of the program because of the strict and complex requirements related to the format and the content of the mpg file The MPG editor is based on the logical structure of the measuring program so it can be understand if the measuring program is already known The MPG Editor window can be opened in the Create MPG Editor menu item of the MPG menu Firstly the basic information has to be given in the Header sheet of the MPG Editor window ES MPG Editor l x Header usum S Hu AAS 81 82 Bu E1 E2 Alert File Strategy A Product Name Im SPC APG Comment i the gauge before measurement Specified sampling rate 4 hourly Dedicated to Product Code Name Drawing number hr iF 1PRODUCT htr 1T een E Mask mau be empty D Team mau be empty C Plarameter C K Device E mask filtering E team filtering Created by INZ N meth Zoltan Last used 9 8 2088 9 29 a m Figure 165 The header of the measuring program On the Header sheet has to be given the name of the measuring program Optional text comment can be given in the Comment field for example information about the content of the measuring program or about the sampling mode
344. to analysis by head position esee s nnaa annes essa assess saa sar nisse aas 115 Figure 162 Certificate settings iode ele SR 116 Figure 163 Printing the certificate for product eiiis sees esses nennen shui ahhh nns nusa asse ssssa aisi sss sss a ss sisi se sas a esses ssa ass rris snas annis snas 117 Figure 164 Certificate settings TOF parameter scis uidere ERE DARE GERE Ex robot Mua EL EM s NEN LM MR ML I IM DNMEDM LER c M DEL ML P ME ERU ME ME 118 Figure 165 The header of the measuring program PER 119 Figure 166 Editing the MS M MX item of the measuring program essissssssssssisssssee nennen nennen nnn h hn nns s sna inns sess sari snis ss aa rans sss sss nnns n annes 120 Figure 167 Creation of a not identified parameter of an MX item ssssssssssssesssiissssee eene nn hh n ness sna sh sns s ss aa inse sins s asas n rris snas n ness naar nns 121 Figure Miseni omiereiioReU qe aito aM T m m 121 Figure 169 Editing the SS item of the measuring DIOGFSITI sii nesseo tiet tese bPE re pFee ndi iege pekai Pepe tabs top p eesuesno 16100 Rana Pene ERRHEEP re su oend M LIU EErEE rnrn Erran Enrere errre 123 Figure 170 Giving the references of the measured values in the S item ccccccsseececececseeeeeeeesnaueeeeceseaseeseeeeeaaaeeseeeeesaaaeeeeeessaaaeeeeessasaaseeesssaaaeeessanaaansess 123 Fig
345. tor s rights The operators have only right to run the measuring programs as default In the Operator s rights menu item of the Settings menu the following further functions can be enabled for the first operator access level A loading of logger s data printing of certificate using of some sampling control service s functions displaying of the status matrix and entering of a sampling event ioi Data Logger Mitutoyo DL DT 18 tuu Load Logger s Data x Enable using of Sampling Control functions Sampling Control Status Event gt gt Certificate Product v m rax am M Enable using of Data SHEETS Certificate Parameter v Enable using of Certificate functions Assign rights to operators Base 14 00 Factory A Fa G 3 Figure 223 Setting of the operator s right and accessing these functions in the start up window If any of these further functions is not enabled the measuring program selection window is displayed directly after log in to the first access level Otherwise the main window of the first access level is displayed where the wanted function can be started by pressing the given button Attention The settings in this menu item are valid for the given workstation program copy HNS SPC User Manual 157 S VIG TECANCAL DEVELOPMENT C0 LTD 2 10 11 Gauges 2 10 11 1 Gauge list The gauges installed on the given workstation can
346. tton in the Interventions field after selecting the Machine Change menu item of the Database menu After selecting the intervention to be deleted and confirmation of the deleting the given intervention will be removed from the database 2 3 4 2 3 Remove intervention 2 3 4 2 4 Intervention export and import A machine s intervention list can be imported or exported by means of the a and ME buttons Firstly the import export file s name and path have to be given The exported file and the file to be imported is a textfile which contains the names in two languages of the interventions in a list P Interventions Jegyzett mb Bl x Fajl Szerkeszt s Form tum M zet Sogo amyagv lt s material change karhantart s malntenance szersz mcsere tool change Figure 50 Exported intervention list Attention Intervention s export and import cover only the intervention s names in two languages special relations are not exported imported 2 3 4 3 Remove machine In the Machine Hemove menu item of the Database menu a machine can be deleted from a selected workgroup of the actual factory Selecting the machine is accordingly done the same way as with the modification of a machine selecting a workgroup and a machine After selecting the machine the program asks for confirmation of the deleting and once confirmation is received it removes the machine from the database Attention When
347. tween a measured parameter and a machine A measured parameter can also be related with a head or position of a machine it called a sub process Measured processes can be created in the Measured process menu item of the Database menu The creating can be done for the several measured parameters one by one by Parameter item or for all measured parameter of a product together by Product item 2 3 7 1 Measured process by parameter When creating a measured process by a parameter the first step is selecting a product and a measured parameter within it After the selection the Process List Configuration window appears wherein the processes related to the given measured parameter the machines are related with it are listed It there is not any measured process related to this measured parameter than the Workgroup and Machine fields are empty Es Process List Configuration X Code Mame Product 548548 T Steel rivet Parameter Head diameter Manufacturing Equipment Horkgroup Machine Horkgroup name Horkgroup ALA Hachine name Machine A11 Process and subprocesses to keep Machine T Head zz Add co Remove E Position Add or remove process as relation of parameter and manufacturing equipments Figure 62 Creating a measured process by parameter On the topside of the Process List Configuration window the identifiers of the selected prod
348. u whereto any samples are recorded in the measuring program The data can be input to these processes for example by the DataConnect service automatically These attributed processes can be taken into the process displaying menu by AV items which can be created modified or deleted on the AV sheet Ed MPG Editor x Header HS M MYX S MU AAS A1 A2 Bu Zi E2 Alert File mj Display control chart of attributed process Item n ffi cel Chart automatically Code Mame Failure group Fea o L fault group Workgroup tris IFAhORKGROUP Machine hs 1F 4NORKGROUP 1MACHINE head e position bo Select HONRHE HPG Figure 174 Editing the AV item of the measuring program The AV sheet can be managed by the same way as the MV sheet It is possible to start external measuring programs with the E7 and E2 items of the measuring program The Ef and E items can be created modified or removed on the ET E2 sheet HNS SPC User Manual 125 Ed MPG Editor x Header HS M MYX S MU AAS 81 82 Bu E1 E2 Alert File Execute external measuring program Item n Pal t Start external program F fdd first in HPG before all items Remove C last in MPG Cafter all items Program C PROGRAMFILES GEOME TRIA 2D GEOM EXE pm Parameter C GEOM2ZD TEST GPR Pass login ID s to started external program Start DataConnec
349. uct and parameter are displayed and the data of the appointed machine on the right side In the Process and subprocess to keep field the items machine head position are displayed whereby processes and sub processes are created related to the appointed machine Creating a new measured process can be done with the Add button in this window After pressing this button the windows for selecting the workgroup and the machine appear After selecting the machine it has to be selected what processes and sub processes are wanted to create It is possible to create sub processes only by multihead multiposition machines see the Machine menu item of the Database menu HNS SPC User Manual 44 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD x Process and subprocesses to keep W Machine Head Position Distinguished main and subprocesses Figure 63 Selecting processes and sub processes to be created After selecting the processes to be stored the process settings have to be given See process settings in the Process settings Change menu item related to measured parameter of the Database menu If more database items machine head position are related with the given measured parameter the Process Settings window appears more two or three times In the window s header can be seen whether the settings in this window are related to machine to all heads or to all positions Appoin
350. ure 171 Editing the MV item of the measuring program sesiisssssseeesi essen nennen nnns en nns nnaa nnn ess sssa aisi eris su aa sa sisi ss sa sa isse essa assess ssa sar nisse aa eeren 124 Figure 172 Editing the A AS item of the measuring program sisse sies esee shes nhanh nnns sssa aisi rr sinn aa sara issu sa sa sns s essa ass rris suse nnns sena nnns 124 HNS SPC User Manual 5 PANG TURA DEVELOPMENT CO Figure 173 Editing the A1 A2 item of the measuring program 11cccccccseesececnnsnseeecensaauneeeecsaauaseeessnnaaueeeesesnaauasseessaaunseesesnaaaasssessaauasseessssaaseesssnaaaasgs 125 Figure 174 Editing the AV item of the measuring DIOOETL iii uiae tape vut Ege sog Fabd cond aci arva ao XXE E ge sao Road ca sd M FER tao XX ER Qe sao Road naues bM o ERR Fe DOE Ede seo E Rad Cade 125 Figure 175 Editing the E1 E2 item of the measuring program lssesssiisssseseeeessesesee nennen enn nnn nnns nhau nnne sss sa aisi rris sua a sanis s rrer ass rris sara sri naa snas 126 Fig re Nc IVS A Seting Sct ita i et a en TERES 126 Figure 17 o AVI the MPG TING ar a ast eats eet 127 Figure 178 Warning message when closing the measuring program without saving ssesssssssssssssssiissssse senes nh seen nnn ssa sn sensns snas 127 FIGHIECTES MPG Wizard ede ea a LL LM LL UM E LEE E 128 Figure 180 Warnin
351. ut the product code is not printed as default The printing of the product code can be enabled by a Registry setting In this case the product code name and drawing number are printed together if the product code is equal with the drawing number this identifier is printed only once See the Special program settings After this the data wanted to occur in the certificate have to be given The content and format of the certificate is variable within limits HNS SPC User Manual 117 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO for a parameter Ed Certificate Hain and sub title Lertificate Header extension Inspection certificate 3 1 B DIN EM 16264 gt gt PP 22 PP 22 2 Buyer Shipper Quantity Production 2008 03 83 E 14 46 from Inspection method jzoa8 e903 ftaa H to Spec standard Specification Quality wv i i z ualitu W suitable not suitable 26 gl aeea Date 2BHB HS H3 Signature appointment Packaging carton box plastic box metal box lattice container r Comment S use additional product identifiers Language gt gt Print English we ros B E c Hungarian F Cancel Ok Enter data used on certificate and print the certificate Po Figure 164 Certificate settings for parameter The most of the settings are the same as in case of the certificate for product see the previous point only the differences are written h
352. utomatic exports Settings of the Automatic Export function e Service Enabling the Automatic Export service and giving necessary settings e Checking service Checking the Automatic Export service Reset window positions and sizes Setting the original position and size of the windows Windows Changing the sample ranges selected by analysis and handling of the analysis windows in case of using MDI windows Help Active licences and users Displaying program copies workplaces and users logged in the actual database and information about these workplaces About Identifiers of the actual HNS SPC release Program configuration data Configuration data of the actual program release HNS SPC User Manual 14 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD The most commonly used menu items are also on the taskbar Functions of the buttons are the following from left to right S lo Ez pL Le E e SS Kei ee s Figure 13 Taskbar of the program e Analysis Select measured samples e Analysis Analysis of the measured samples Measurements diagram e Analysis Analysis of the measured samples Control chart e Analysis Analysis of the measured samples Frequency e Analysis Analysis of the measured samples Distribution e Analysis Analysis of the measured samples Density e Analysis Analysis of the measured samples Probability e Analysis Analysis of the measured samples Capabilit
353. ving standard deviaton chart e mx mR moving mean moving range chart e mx ms moving mean moving standard deviation chart e Control Limits Control limits can be calculated by the program or entered by the user manually Four fields are available in case of user defined control limits two fields for the upper and lower control limits of the mean individual value moving mean diagram and two for the upper and lower control limits of the range standard deviation moving range moving standard deviation diagram HNS SPC User Manual 48 PANG TERRA DEVELOPMENT CO Warning limits can be calculated by the program entered by the user manually or not used Four fields are available in case of user defined warning limits two fields for the upper and lower warning limits of the mean individual value moving mean diagram and two for the upper and lower warning limits of the range standard deviation moving range moving standard deviation diagram A constant value have to be given in case of calculated warning limits by pressing the K button This constant is used for calculating the warning limits and it can range from 1 to 3396 This value means the difference of the warning range and control range in the percentage of the control range Default values can be set by pressing the Default button FA warning Limits Constan a 0 x i CUHD h3 camp cafa 4 Rs EUMD E k 13 COWL rxr 3 Oox Set constant value
354. workstation where the given measuring program will be used since the accessibility of the gauges at a given measuring workstation has to be given The gauge selection can be simplified if the gauges installed at the given measuring workstation are enabled in the Gauges List menu item of the Settings menu In this case only the enabled gauges are displayed in this gauge selection list A conversion function the number of the function and the constant values can be given in the Conversion Settings window after pressing the RE lt lt direct button If the f 0 function is used the measured values are saved directly without conversion otherwise the converted values are used See the conversion functions in the MPG Measuring Program document The control charts of the processes occurred in the MS items can be displayed by the operator It is possible to display the control chart of the given process after saving the entered sample automatically with switching on the Chart automatically switch In this case the operator has to check this control chart after every data input The Chart automatically switch is inactive in case of M and MX items because there are no control chart The process status logging function can be enabled related to the given item with switching on the PSL switch The process status logging means that a status report is made related to the selected items after every running of the m
355. x Database identified parameter v Store measurements hns Digimatic SMUX 4 USBNUX 4 i P K Chart automatically E PSL f A lt lt direct Port corr CSU gt gt Parameter Head diameter Select Channel p 1 Spec Horkgroup n 18 Horkgroup AIH Hachine nii Machine A11 head p position p Sample size 5 MS 41 Head diameter A 10 A 11 0 40 CE HNSSMUM4 micrometer 0 25 mmi COHIPC1240 40 0240 0P4Q uee OOO OO Figure 166 Editing the MS M Mx item of the measuring program A new item can be created or an existing item can be deleted by the Add and Remove buttons The data of the actual item are always displayed on the sheet The selected measured parameter belonging to the actual item can be modified by the f Select button In the right top corner of the window the number of the MS M Mx items the number of the actual MS M MX item are displayed Several items can be changed by the buttons The type of the item can be set by the Store measurements switch MS measurements are stored in the database the switch is on M measurements are not stored in the database they are used for composing a sample see the S item the switch is off HNS SPC User Manual 120 PANG TENA DEVELOPMENT CO The measurement of a not identified parameter can be prescribed by pressing the butt
356. y study D I e Analysis Analysis of the measured samples Intervention pareto e Analysis Select attributed samples e Analysis Analysis of the attributed samples Control chart e Analysis Analysis of the attributed samples Pareto diagram e Analysis Analysis of the attributed samples Intervention pareto e MPG Run Input by gauge e Settings Gagues Select and Settings e File Logout from access level When moving the mouse s cursor above an active button the name of given function will be displayed The current database type the ID and name of the current factory and IDs of the logged in user are shown in the main window s status bar HNS SPC User Manual 15 PANG TURA DEVELOPMENT GO LTD 2 2 File menu 2 2 1 Select database In the Select database menu item of the File menu the required database can be selected The first step is to select the database type whether it is a regular xBase or an SQL database Ef Database Tye x Select database type to using Figure 14 Select databse type If the program only supports one database type see the Supported database types menu item of Settings menu then this selection is not necessary The selection of an xBase database is done by entering the access path of the directory containing the database files The directory can be searched also by the button Ed Select xBase dbf cdx fpE Database X Databa
357. ype of the given gauge hence it is recommended to study the documentation of the complex gauges before the first using If the data are input by keyboard the measured value has to be typed than the Enter button of the measurement window has to be clicked The data can be input by keyboard in case of a gauge error if the Operator can change to manual input on gauge error switch on the nput Measuring sheet in the MPG menu item of the Settings menu is on Damaged status can be added to a measurement by pressing the Damaged button It is recommended to use this possibility if the given measurement cannot be done for some reason for example the given piece has been destructed or lost It is necessary to use this status in this case because the measuring program cannot be continued until the given measurement is done The measured value has been already read out can be seen in the Measured value field than the program steps over to the next measurement or qualification In the measuring program qualifications attributed parameters can also be specified for the operator beside the measurements The attributed data can be input piece by piece like the measurements or by samples together depending on the data input mode which has been specified in the measuring program If the attributed data input is specified by A or AS item the data will be input piece by piece hence the Attributed Data Input window will be displayed
358. ysis menu The steps of the sample analysis are the following 1 selecting the time range to be analysed Date range for analysis 2 selecting the sample range to be analysed Select measured samples Select attributed samples e product e process measured parameter failure group machine head position e sample range selection 3 loading the samples of the selected time range by the program 4 sample analysis Analysis 5 saving the process settings which were modified during the analysis if necessary Save process settings 6 cancelling the sample range selection Reset selection Analysis always can be made related to a selected time range if there is no selected sample range the given analysis menu items cannot be used 2 6 2 Selecting the time range Before the analysis the given measured or attributed samples stored in the database have to be selected In the sample selection windows all samples stored in the database related to the given process are listed as default Maybe not all samples are necessary to list which can be ranged for more years If only the samples of a given time range is wanted to display in the sample selection windows this time range can be set in the Date range for analysis menu item of the Analysis menu Time range can be set by many ways It is possible to choose a standard time range day week month quarter or year or an o
359. ze Z 16 E Checked samples E ES p m m Di 2 of 3 points in a row are out of warning limits lt lt Default same side Cancel Samples in zone k Detect on critical control chart side only Configure the automatic DoC detections for control charts Figure 69 Other Out of Control settings e Closed to Limits Program monitors the number of points inside the control field next to the control limits The monitored range is set in the Zone size f field expressed as the percentage of the control field Also the number of the checked samples should be set this means the number of successive points have to be checked The set value in the Samples in zone field means the number of the points which are inside the monitored field in case of a Closed to Limits case In the Checked samples field can not be set smaller value than in the Samples in zone field e 01 2 of 3 points in a row are out of warning limits same side 2 points of 3 successive points are outside the warning limits on the same side of the center line e Detect on critical control chart side only switch is active only in case of one sided tolerances In case of enabling this switch only the control limit next to the given tolerance limit is displayed and only the Out of Control cases are monitored that are dangerous related to the displayed control limit e Default settings can be set by pressing the Default

HNS SPC - User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents